JP2023016306A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase a performance effect in connection with a title display of a ready-to-win performance.SOLUTION: After a decorative pattern comes into a ready-to-win mode, a super-ready-to-win performance can be executed. The super-ready-to-win performance includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until a performance result is reported. A decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode before the title display part in the super-ready-to-win performance, and title characters corresponding to the super-ready-to-win performance are displayed so as to use a display position of the decorative pattern resulting in a ready-to-win mode in the title display part. When a movable body performance is executed in a variable display started during a predetermined period when conformation movable control is underway on power-on not accompanying initialization, performance movable control is restricted during a predetermined period. In the meantime, when display of an effect indication and output of a movable body performance sound are performed and the movable body performance is executed after a predetermined period, performance movable control, and display of the effect indication and output of the movable body performance sound are performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-32

Description

According to the present invention, variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player. related to gaming machines.

As a conventional game machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, there has been proposed a game machine that displays a title indicating the type of the ready-to-win effect at the start of the ready-to-win effect. In Patent Document 2, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure, an initial action (long initial action) in which the movable body is operated in the same way as the production action (long initial action), and a part of the production action by the movable body. can be executed by omitting the initial operation (short initial operation).

JP 2019-118411 A JP 2015-113217 A

However, there is still room for improving the marketability of the game machine having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

The game machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance 31 and 32 by the control CPU 120 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter (for example, a portion that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, when power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1. part to control),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The first reach includes a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. ,
The second reach includes a title display part for displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. ,
Different from the execution time of the title display part in the first reach and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach,
The title display part in the first reach and the title display part in the second reach,
a first part from when the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed at the fixed position;
A third part from the state where the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed at the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)),
If power failure occurs during the advantageous state and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a display during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
In the advantageous state, if power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, special as a round game When power failure occurs when the variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, the display during restoration is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the display during restoration 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
In the title display part in the first reach, the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part, corresponding to the first reach. Display the title display,
In the title display part in the second reach, the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part corresponds to the second reach so that it is longer than the third part. display the title display,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure), the game can be played. To provide a game machine which enables a player to quickly confirm that a variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before power cutoff, without being distracted by a movable body operating by confirmation movement control, and to enhance marketability. can be done.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 131SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction frequency|count determination table for every transition opportunity. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the expectation degree of the reach production|presentation of super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the difference of the expectation degree between reach production|presentations of super reach. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the data holding area for production|presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice production. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of stop symbols; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation control pattern according to variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation control pattern according to variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in time saving state A and probability variable state. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in time saving state B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base weak reach A production. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of low base weak reach B effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image which shows the bad example of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strongest reach production. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition of images in a modification of the title display part; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of high base super reach A to D effects. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base super reach A to D effects. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation time of super reach production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the production|presentation times of a super reach production|presentation. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title character of the super ready-to-win effect and the decoration pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing execution status of expectation level suggestion display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of a selection effect; It is an explanatory diagram showing the number of operations until switching to the next title in the selection effect and the execution ratio of the super ready-to-win effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display; It is explanatory drawing about the execution ratio of the production|presentation which can be performed during variable display. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the explanatory note displayed in an explanatory note display effect. It is a timing chart showing the display state of the explanatory note displayed in the explanatory note display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timings at which the colors of title characters change in the title color change effect; It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation D. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an operation prompting image; It is a figure which shows the execution condition of a jackpot start production. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the remaining number of times until play time. It is a figure which shows the execution status of play time start production. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect, the explanation text, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion characters. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and the like of the super ready-to-win effect and the title characters and the like of the play time start effect. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning state of a game effect lamp. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; It is a figure which shows the brightness|luminance data table used for super reach production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a parent table of weak reach common titles. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a weak reach system common title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a parent table for title common chance-up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a title common chance-up red child table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table for introduction of the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common titles of high base reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a child table of common titles of high base reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the engine which comprises the title display part of low base weak reach A and B production, and luminance data. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. (A) is a diagram illustrating a variable display result specifying command, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a game state background specifying command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2, and (C) is an explanation showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol). It is a figure, (D) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), (E) is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing of a jackpot classification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small-hit completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of initial operation control processing; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of origin placement control processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of operation confirmation control processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of operation confirmation control processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which it is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which it is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-top movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation list which CPU for production|presentation control can perform. (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during a variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram that shows a list of effects that can be executed in a big hit game state. It is a figure which shows the example of operation|movement of the advance notice of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the advance notice at the time of a start. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body announcement/pseudo continuous announcement. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a reach notice and a button notice. It is a figure which shows the operation example of SP reach advance notice. It is a figure which shows the example of operation|movement of a big hit production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a jackpot production (promotion production). It is a figure which shows the operation example of state transition operation control. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. (A) is a diagram explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the mode of lamps and sounds according to the operation of the movable body. (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of operation check control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a timing chart in the case of executing the movable body advance notice after the initial operation by cold start; FIG. 4 is a timing chart in the case of restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a starting prize is generated during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a starting prize is generated during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when executing the movable body advance notice after the initial operation by hot start; FIG. 4 is a timing chart in the case of restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when restricting the advance notice of the movable body after the initial operation by cold start; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for restricting advance notice of a movable body during initial operation by cold start; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during the initial action, and variable 2 display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated after an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during an initial action, and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started during the initial action period in response to the starting prize. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the case where the movable body moves to the performance position as the initial motion and the case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as the initial motion. When the movable body moves to the production position as the production action of the movable body notice, and when the movable body moves to the production position as the production action of the movable body notice It is a timing chart of advance notice of the movable body when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the effect position as the initial motion. 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by cold start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 10 is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the effect position in the initial motion; It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare effect; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation check control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately after the start of a special interval; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control as a modification when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval; It is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed. It is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power interruption having generate|occur|produced during time saving, and having been switched on after that. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button announcement is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the start notice is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on power failure occurring during normal fluctuation and then power being turned on. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power-off having generate|occur|produced during a big hit, and having been turned on after that. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement of a movable body when operation check control is started based on power interruption having generate|occur|produced during time saving, and having been switched on after that. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of initial operation by cold start; A timing chart at the time of initial operation by cold start and a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; 4 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control; (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an operation example of operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the win/fail button effect as a modified example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an operation example when an error occurs in operation confirmation control.

[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode in the title display part in the specific reach. The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to use the display position of .
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information causes the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the identification information, the title display can also naturally attract attention, and as a result, the title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
Before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the decoration identification information is displayed in the reach mode of the first size (decorative pattern (large)), and after that, the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) displayed in the reach mode (Large)) is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in the second size It is characterized in that it is displayed so as to use the display position of the displayed decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decoration identification information displayed in the first size becomes the second size, thereby attracting the player's line of sight, and using the display position of the decoration identification information in the second size, the display position of the decoration identification information is displayed in a specific reach. By displaying the corresponding title display, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode is displayed, the specific reach is overlapped with the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode. It is characterized by displaying the corresponding title display (title character).
According to this feature, at the timing when the decoration identification information in the ready-to-reach mode is displayed in the title display part of the specific reach, the title corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap the decoration identification information in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying , it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach A to C production) and,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state of being overlapped with one decoration identification information (decorative pattern on the left side) of the decoration identification information in the reach mode. is characterized by
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state of being overlapped with one decoration identification information among the decoration identification information in the reach mode. It becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to form 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) that is expected to be controlled in the advantageous state more than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third ready-to-win state is characterized in that it appears in a state of being superimposed on both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) in the ready-to-win state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which is expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first reach and the second reach, is overlapped with the decoration identification information of both of the reach modes. Since it appears, the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to form 1-5,
Title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) and the third reach (low base strongest reach production ) appears in a state of being overlapped with one decoration identification information (left decoration pattern) or both decoration identification information (both decoration patterns) of the decoration identification information in the reach mode, It is characterized in that it is displayed in a fixed position, and is displayed in a state where it overlaps part of the decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) in the reach mode even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, even after the title display is displayed at a fixed position, it is easy to draw attention to the title display.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and in the title display part, the reach mode and display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized in that the title display (title character) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach by using the display position of the decoration identification information in the form, the title display can also be naturally focused, and as a result, the title display is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
When the first decoration identification information (odd-numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in the ready-to-win mode and when the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the advantageous state (jackpot game state) ) are characterized by different expectations controlled by .
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which decoration identification information results in the ready-to-reach mode, so it is easier to draw attention to the title display. .

[Mode 3]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ) and, determine one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and in the title display part, the reach mode and display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the first decoration identification information in the reach mode is displayed. Display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the second decoration identification information in the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized by displaying the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach, the second reach, and the third reach using the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode in the display part, the title display can also be naturally noticed. , and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode in the title display part in the specific reach. Display the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information causes the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display as well. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-5-7) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-7-9) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reach using a plurality of characters,
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) uses the first character (friend character "Mumu") in the first reach and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach, Reach for notifying that the first character (ally character "Mumu") is controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach. A reach that is used to inform that the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach are on the front side and the second character (enemy character) in the second reach The character "Robo") is displayed on the back side, and the display is started.
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach B effect), the first character (friend character "Mumu") in the first reach is on the front side and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") ”) is positioned so as not to be on the far side.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is started from an arrangement in which the first character, who is informed that the control will be in an advantageous state, is on the front side, and the second character is on the back side. As a result, the player can empathize with the game, and intuitively recognize that the player has a high degree of expectation. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
The first character is a character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") to which benefits are given when winning the battle,
the second character is a character (enemy character "Robo") that does not give a benefit if it wins the battle;
At the start of the introductory part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first characters (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed with their backs facing forward. A character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed facing the viewer at a position on the far side, and the first character and the second character face each other.
According to this feature, the direction of the player and the direction of the first character are the same for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation. It makes it easier to recognize that the degree is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed in the title display part is displayed at a position including the display area where the title display (title character) was displayed.
According to this feature, when the title display disappears, the player who has been paying attention to the title display can naturally look at the first character and the second character.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2, PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The first reach and the second reach are reach in which dialog subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), title display (title character) and dialog subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B production), the dialog subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach are displayed continuously,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the title display (title characters) is displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation and a long execution time, is displayed so as not to overlap the title display and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, while having a relatively low degree of expectation and a short execution time. At the first reach, even if the dialogue subtitles and the title display are overlapped, by finishing the title display first, the dialogue subtitles can also be noticed, and the title display and the dialogue subtitles are suitably provided to the player. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title is displayed in the subsequent introduction part It is characterized by the fact that the production scene is not switched until the display of dialogue subtitles displayed at the same time as the display (title characters) is completed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the first reach and the dialog subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the dialog subtitles displayed simultaneously with the title display are displayed in the subsequent introductory part. Since the production scene does not change until the end of , it is possible to draw attention to the dialogue subtitles after drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1 or 6-2,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitle is output. On the other hand, it is characterized in that the sound corresponding to the title display (title character) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title display and the dialog subtitles are displayed at the same time, the audio corresponding to the dialog subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title display is not output. easier.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach AD effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is a plurality of characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). is composed of
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title of the specific reach (title characters) in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of a plurality of characters is visible in the title display part of the specific reach. is displayed, the display size is gradually reduced from the first size, and the title display (title character) of the specific reach is displayed so that the display size is reduced to the second size (reduced size) in which all of the plurality of characters can be seen. ,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D (Introduction)) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, display is performed in a first size in which only a part of a plurality of characters can be seen, and then the size is gradually reduced to a size in which all characters can be seen. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is the gaming machine according to form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) is started, the movable object (movable body 32) is superimposed on the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
A background corresponding to the motion of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed during a period from when the movable object moves until the movable object returns to the initial position (drop effect), and the movable object returns to the initial position. title display (title characters) at the first size (enlarged size) in which all of the plurality of characters are not visible and the display area of the display means is filled up and the background is not visible when the display returns to . It is characterized in that the display is started, and thereafter the title display of the second size (reduced size) and the background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the display method of the reach title can give an impact, and at the same time, the background can be switched without a sense of incongruity, and the title display can be preferably shown to the player.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach AD effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is a plurality of characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). is composed of
The display means (image display device 5) enlarges and displays a plurality of characters from a state in which a plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which a reduced size is displayed at a fixed position) in the title display part of the specific reach. The title display part is ended by (expanding until the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters), and the display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (background at the start of the introduction part) can be visually recognized. displayed as
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D (Introduction)) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display in the title display part, and by suitably using the title display, it is possible to switch to the display corresponding to the next introductory part without discomfort. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The execution time (T1-1-2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) Unlike (T2-1 to 3),
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the second part (title display period) is more than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) displaying a title (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the second part (title display period) is more than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) The first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, by making the second part displayed at the fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. can be done. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until the display at the fixed position is longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time to be long, it is possible to incite which title display is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the title display part can be understood by making the relationship of the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part common. can be made easier.

[Mode 10]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern in the normal state), which is the variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (normal state), which is the variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ), a third variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state), and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (in a probability variation state Determining any one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a deviation variation pattern) and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the normal state) is transmitted,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the probability variation state),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
Title display part execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state) and title display in the second reach (super reach effect in variable probability state) Unlike the part execution time (T4),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state, the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state is the reach performed at
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) , displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) , the title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed at the fixed position is the most displayed. By lengthening it, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part is displayed at the fixed position until the first part is displayed at the fixed position. By making the time from the beginning to the end of the display longer than that of the third part, it is possible to stimulate which title display is to be displayed. Even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the relationship between the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part can be made common to make the title display part easier to understand.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is the gaming machine according to form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T1-1 to 2, It is characterized by being shorter than T2-1 to 3 and T3).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short. Since the execution time of the title display part is relatively long, it can be strongly stimulated.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5), in the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the second part (title display period) is the first part (title start period) and the third part ( displaying a title (title character) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period), and
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed at the fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. Further, by making the first part until the display at the fixed position longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to stimulate which title display is to be displayed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Form 12]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to inform that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect). ,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C production, low-base strongest reach production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The display means is
Title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) is the first mode (white mode) and title display corresponding to the specific reach is the first mode It is possible to display in a second mode (red mode) with a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than
In the title display part (the title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production), the expectation level suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first size , and then display the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode) In any case when displaying, displaying the expectation level suggestive display in a common manner,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, strong reach type common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level indication display, and the form suggests the level of expectation, thereby attracting the player's attention. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display earlier than the title display, it is possible to draw the attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation level suggestive display is performed in a common manner whether the title is displayed in the first manner or the second manner, it is possible to draw attention to the subsequent title display manner.

[Mode 13]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-7) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state to 9), a third variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10 to 12) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state and, determining one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-8 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B production), the expectation indication is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C production), the expectation level indication display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars),
The expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B production) and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C production) are common display the highlighting on the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C title),
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). and
According to this feature, even when the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. Even in this case, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlighting common. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 13-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-1,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is suggested by N + 1 (4) objects,
In the expectation indication display, each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and when one object is highlighted and when 0.5 objects are highlighted, , highlighting is performed in a common manner.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by performing highlighting in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. can be mitigated.

The gaming machine of Form 13-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-2,
In the expectation suggestive display, the time for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects (star-shaped object) are common. and
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects.

The gaming machine of Form 13-4 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-2 or 13-3,
In the expectation suggestive display, a common emphatic sound ( It is characterized by the output of an expectation-indicating sound.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by outputting a common sound whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. be able to.

[Mode 14]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance). It is possible to notify
When the second command is received, the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to notify
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part for displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, An introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A-C production, low-base strongest reach production, high-base reach A-D production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. is possible and
Emphasis on the first object (star-shaped object) in the expectation indication display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) After that, while continuing the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted. It is characterized by ending the highlighting of the star-shaped object) and performing the highlighting of the third object (star-shaped object).
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects, and in the expectation suggestion display, before the highlighting of the first object ends At this point, the highlighting for the second object starts, but the highlighting for the third object does not start until the highlighting for the first object ends, so we know the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation. make it easier to

The gaming machine of Form 14-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 14-1,
In the expectation suggestive display, an emphatic sound (expectation suggestive sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and an emphatic sound for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) ( It is characterized in that after the output of the expectation suggestive sound) is completed, the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object (expectation suggestive sound) is output.
According to this feature, the emphasized sound of the highlighting for one object does not overlap with the emphasized sound of the highlighting of the next object, so that the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of Form 14-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation level"),
The highlighting of the object (the star-shaped object) is characterized by being superimposed on the characters (the characters "expectation").
According to this feature, by highlighting the object, attention can be drawn to both the plurality of objects and the characters forming the expectation suggestive display.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance). It is possible to notify
When the second command is received, the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to notify
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part for displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, An introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a plurality of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A-C production, low-base strongest reach production, high-base reach A-D production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. is possible and
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), the holding display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strong reach common title, strongest reach strongest reach title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, while the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach, the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestive display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition as an expectation suggestive display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 15-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the started variable display is characterized by matching the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation suggestive display.
According to this feature, even if it becomes a specific reach in a situation where the maximum number of pending display and active display is displayed, it is incorrect that the maximum number of objects that constitute the expectation indication display is displayed. It is possible to prevent being recognized by

The gaming machine of form 15-3 is the gaming machine according to form 15-1 or 15-2,
The pending display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) is displayed in a single color before the start of the title display part.
According to this feature, the hold display can be ended without a sense of incompatibility.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16), a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state A certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a sixth variation pattern (PA2-10 to 12 / PA2-18) that is an uncontrolled variation pattern,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (PB1-2 ~ 4 / PB1-14 to specify the variation pattern specification command) to the effect control means is transmitted,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6 / PA2-16) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, the fifth command (PB1-8 ~ 10 / PB1-16 to specify the variation pattern specification command) to the production control means is transmitted,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A effect / high base reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A effect / high base reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base strong reach A effect / high-base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The second reach (low-base strong reach B effect / high-base reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base strong reach A effect / high-base reach A effect), it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of the first number (3) objects (star-shaped objects),
Expectation composed of objects (star-shaped objects) with a second number (3.5) larger than the first number in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) It is possible to display the degree suggestion display,
In the title display part of the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect), the expectation level suggestion composed of objects (star-shaped objects) of the third number (4), which is larger than the second number. can display the display,
the number difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the number difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) The difference from the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state when the performance) is executed is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed. is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number and from the second number to the third number, the object The amount of increase in the number of is the same number, but the amount of increase in the degree of expectation that is controlled to be more advantageous when the number increases from the second number to the third number than when the number increases from the first number to the second number is As the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled more favorably than the increased number of objects. I don't expect it to be.

The gaming machine of Form 16-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns are a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state ( PA2-13 to 15 / PA2-19) and
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command (PB1-11 ~ 13 / PB1-17 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance / high base reach D performance) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance / high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The display means displays an object (star-shaped object) having a fourth number (4.5) larger than the third number in the title display part in the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect). is capable of displaying a configured expectation indication,
the number difference (0.5) between the third number and the fourth number is smaller than the number difference (1) between the first number and the third number;
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state and the third reach (low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect) when the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect) is executed ) is executed, the difference from the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed. is greater than the difference between the expected degree of control to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases from the third number to the fourth number, more objects are displayed than when the number increases from the first number to the third number. Although the amount of increase in the number of is small, the amount of increase in the degree of expectation that is controlled in an advantageous state is greater when the number is increased from the third number to the fourth number than when the number is increased from the first number to the third number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that control will be performed in an advantageous state even if the number of objects increased is small.

The gaming machine of Form 16-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 16-2,
The difference in number between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference in number between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, the number of objects displayed as the degree-of-expectation display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number, compared to when the third number is increased by 1 from the first number. The fourth number can be expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state.
The gaming machine of Form 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16-1 to 16-3,
Expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state and the second reach (high base reach B effect) when the third reach (high base reach C effect) is executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state ) is executed, the difference from the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state is the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect) is executed in the normal state and the expected degree of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, can be expected to be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases. can.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
Both the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach Reach A to C production) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The display means (image display device 5)
Displaying the expectation indication display in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
Do not display the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach type),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach with a relatively high expectation is longer than the title display part in the first reach with a relatively low expectation, and the title display part in the second reach While the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. be able to. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 17-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and consists only of a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). and
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production). It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, the second reach is longer than the first reach. It can be made to recognize sensibly that the degree of expectation is high.

The gaming machine of form 17-3 is the gaming machine according to form 17-1 or 17-2,
It is a reach executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance). ,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and consists only of a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach production) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production). and
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, the third reach is longer than the second reach. It can be made to recognize sensibly that the degree of expectation is high.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (PA2), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state -2 to 3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2-4 to 12) and determine any one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2, 5, 8) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 to 3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
Both the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reach executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) as the effect result, and the advantageous state (big hit game state) is the effect result. ) is a reach that is notified that it is not controlled, and that another reach (super reach effect) is executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) when it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) as a result of the performance. There is a certain reach when it is notified that it will not be
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and notifies whether or not the other reach is executed. It is composed of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The display means (image display device 5)
Displaying the expectation indication display in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
Do not display the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach type),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, while the expectation indication is displayed in the title display part in the second reach where it may be notified that the control will be directly in an advantageous state, the effect that the control will be directly in an advantageous state is displayed. Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, which is not notified, it is possible to prevent the first reach from causing excessive expectations. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 18-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 18-1,
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) in a fixed mode (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach production) will be executed It is characterized by being displayable.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation level suggestive display is not displayed.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) is via a selection effect using title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effect) including the specific reach. and
The display means is
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) and the selected effect, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display along with the title display (title characters),
When displaying the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach), the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) are displayed step by step,
It is characterized in that, when displaying the expectation level suggestive display in the selection effect, the expectation level suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed step by step.
According to this feature, when displaying the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the specific reach, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expected When displaying the degree of suggestion display, the degree of expectation indication display composed of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so the degree of expectation indication is displayed step by step not only in the title display part but also in the selection effect before that. It is possible to eliminate the annoyance of being displayed in

The gaming machine of Form 19-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 19-1,
The selection performance is a performance that changes step by step from low expected reach (super reach performance) to high expected reach (super reach performance) by operating the performance operation means (push button 31B),
The time required to change one stage in the selection effect (minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) is the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) may be shorter than the time required to display one level of the expectation suggestive display of the title display part (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted).
According to this feature, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

The gaming machine of Form 19-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 19-2,
The selection performance is a performance in which the current reach (super reach performance) is changed to a reach (super reach performance) with a level of expectation higher by one stage than the current reach (super reach performance), and each stage is changed to the next stage. It is characterized in that the number of times of operation of the performance operation means (push button 31B) required for the operation is increased.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of reach, the more impatient the player can be.

The gaming machine of Form 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the title display part is started.
According to this feature, even when the specific ready-to-win is executed via the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part, so the player can easily determine which ready-to-win is finally executed.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) in a manner with greater movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title characters of the super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the player will be controlled to the next level, and by moving the display of the name of the advantageous status more widely, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous status. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is the gaming machine according to form 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D), when displaying the title display (title characters), the background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the effect for starting the big win) is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, by moving the background of the display of the name of the advantageous state more widely, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
displaying the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the promotion character display displayed in the introductory part prompts the player to take action. can prompt actions by In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is the gaming machine according to form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special promotion character display (operation is capable of displaying facilitator characters (large),
Both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) move more than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). is displayed in a large form.
According to this feature, whether it is promotion character display or special promotion character display, by moving the title display more than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take action. .

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is the gaming machine according to form 21-1 or 21-2,
It is characterized in that the number of characters (3) of the prompt character display (operation prompt characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, the number of characters in the promotion character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanation character display (explanation character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
displaying the explanatory character display (explanatory character) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the additionally displayed explanatory character display is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display, so that attention is also drawn to the addition of the explanatory character display in addition to the title display. can be done. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is the gaming machine according to form 22-1,
The explanation character display (explanation character) is characterized by having a content suggesting that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to further draw attention to the fact that the explanation character display is added.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is better than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects). is also displayed in a larger font size,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger character size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that the second reach is more expected than the first reach, just by displaying the title. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 23-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) corresponds to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effects). The display area (display area size) of the title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C production) is larger than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up the (title character) It is characterized by being larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects).
According to this feature, the display area occupied by one character is larger in the title display corresponding to the second reach, so that the user can perceive that the second reach is more expected than the first reach. be able to.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a plurality of characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
Before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of the first size is displayed in the reach mode, and then the second size smaller than the first size is displayed. Displaying the decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)) in a reach mode,
displaying at least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decoration identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be noticed in the title display part. can. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 24-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 24-1,
Any character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and smaller than the second size (decorative pattern (small)) is also displayed in a large size.
According to this feature, the decoration identification information can be reliably recognized in the ready-to-reach mode, and after that, the decoration identification information is reduced, and the title display is configured in a size larger than the decoration identification information. Since each character is displayed, attention can be drawn to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is already advantageous This is the situation after being informed that the player will be controlled to the state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 25-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS"),
After the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) is displayed at the first position (top position), the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed at the second position (bottom position). is,
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper position) ”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) displayed at the second position (lower position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
The first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed at the first position (fixed position top) and the second position (fixed position bottom). Sometimes the font size is displayed in the smallest size,
When the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed at the first position (top position) and second position (bottom position) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display (operation prompting characters (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 25-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (the title character of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)). is also characterized by a large
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotion character display. Even so, since the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 25-1 to 25-3,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display suggesting a situation more advantageous than the promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is the gaming machine according to form 25-4,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is the largest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (the title character for the jackpot start effect). characterized by being larger than
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display, so which character should be focused on? Even if it does, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 26-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reach with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that it is possible to congratulate the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is the gaming machine according to form 26-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is the character that constitutes the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the column.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Therefore, regardless of which character is focused on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so that it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is the gaming machine according to form 27-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed, it develops to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and the title display part in the specific reach is started. .
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part in a series of flows and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. can.

The gaming machine of form 27-3 is the gaming machine according to form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character in the character string constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the string.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotional character display. Even if the user pays attention to , it is possible to make the user pay attention to the title display.

[Form 28]
The game machine of form 28-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
After notification of control to the advantageous state by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), an advantageous state name display (title character of big hit start production) corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled is displayed. is viewable and
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big hit start effect) larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect);
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display, the title display can be noticed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 28-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 28-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed, it develops into the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and the specific reach ( It is characterized in that the display of the name of the advantageous state (title characters of the big win start presentation) is displayed after the fact that the advantageous state is controlled by the low base weak reach A, B presentation) is notified.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part in a series of flows and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. After that, after being notified that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state by the specific reach, by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The game machine of form 29-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) for a longer time than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the control is to be carried out to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 29-2 is the gaming machine according to form 29-1,
The time from when all the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears corresponds to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being longer than the time from when a part of the character string that constitutes the title display (title characters) is displayed until the entire character string is not displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the advantageous state name display with congratulatory meaning can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title display is displayed for the purpose of arousing the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. can give people satisfaction.

The gaming machine of form 29-3 is the gaming machine according to form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title character of the effect of starting the big win) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is an operation suggestion display that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state (right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion) image (large)), and after a predetermined period of time from the switching to the operation suggestion display, the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (the operation method of hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R) is operated. Control that is advantageous by
The time for switching from the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start production) to the operation suggestion display (right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large)) corresponds to the specific reach (super reach production). It is characterized by being shorter than the time to end the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short period of time, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an advantageous control is performed by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method from the period when the advantageous state name display ends.

[Mode 30]
The game machine of form 30-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the big win) for a longer period of time than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is already advantageous This is the situation after being notified of the control to the state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 30-2 is the gaming machine according to form 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the prompting action is performed or until the time when the prompting action is effective elapses,
During the time when the advantageous state name display (title character of the effect of starting the big win) is displayed, the prompting action is not performed after the prompting letter display (operation prompting letter (small)) is displayed, and the prompting action is performed. is longer than the time until the valid time elapses.
According to this feature, after the prompt character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer time than the time during which the prompting action is not performed, thereby controlling the advantageous state. can be blessed.

The gaming machine of form 30-3 is the gaming machine according to form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is not displayed is the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small )) is longer than the displayed time.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display can be seen properly is set longer than the time during which the promotion character display intended to prompt the player to act is displayed, thereby satisfying the player. can give you a feeling.

The gaming machine of form 30-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 30-1 to 30-3,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that prompts an operation) without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting characters (large)) is a prompting introduction display (prompting introduction effect) that is displayed, followed by prompting letters (characters prompting an operation),
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start effect) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. be able to.

[Mode 31]
The game machine of form 31-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the prompting character display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed for a longer time than the prompting character display, so that the title display can be noticed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 31-2 is the gaming machine according to form 31-1,
The prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed during the time from when all the character strings forming the title display (title character) are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears. It is characterized by being longer than time.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the title display can be seen properly longer than the time during which the promotion character display is displayed for the purpose of prompting the player to perform an action, the title display can be noticed.

The gaming machine of form 31-3 is the gaming machine according to form 31-1 or 31-2,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that prompts an operation) without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting characters (large)) is a prompting introduction display (prompting introduction effect) that is displayed, followed by prompting letters (characters prompting an operation),
The time during which the title display (title character) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is displayed is made longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, so that the title display can be noticed.

[Mode 32]
The game machine of form 32-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
After notification of control to the advantageous state by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), an advantageous state name display (title character of big hit start production) corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled is displayed. is viewable and
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big hit start performance) for a longer time than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the control is to be carried out to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 33]
The game machine of form 33-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-16) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and the A plurality of variation patterns (PB1-15 to 17), which are variation patterns controlled to an advantageous state, and eighth variation patterns (PA2-17 to 19), which are variation patterns not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among the variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-14) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-16) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-15 to 17) is sent to the effect control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-17 to 19) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The third reach (high-base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and a notification of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part up to and including
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reach executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) are reach executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
It is possible to display the expectation level indication display in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A effect),
It is possible to display the expectation level indication display in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A effect),
It is characterized in that the expectation suggestive display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the first reach. By not displaying, it is possible to prevent excessive expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by the first reach. On the other hand, although the third reach in the special state that is more advantageous than the normal state has lower expectations than the fourth reach in the special state, since the expectation is higher than the first reach in the normal state, even the third reach is the fourth By displaying the expectation degree suggesting display even in the reach, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state both in the case of the third reach and in the case of the fourth reach.

[Mode 34]
The game machine of form 34-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern in the normal state), which is the variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (normal state), which is the variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ), a third variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state), and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (in a probability variation state Determining any one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a deviation variation pattern) and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the normal state) is transmitted,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the probability variation state),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The first reach (super reach effect in normal state) is a reach executed in normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a reach that is executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach production in the normal state), the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach, common title for strong reach) to control the
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (high base reach system common title),
In the introduction part in the first reach (super reach production in the normal state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong Reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (super reach production in the variable probability state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is made shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, so that the special state can proceed at a good tempo. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 34-2 is the gaming machine according to form 34-1,
The frequency of the second reach (super reach production in the variable probability state) in the special state (variable probability state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach production in the normal state) in the normal state. there is
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach increases in the special state, the special state can proceed at a good tempo.

[Mode 35]
The game machine of form 35-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-4) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state 12), a third variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. and, determining one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15) is sent to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low-base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strongest reach production) is more likely to be in the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the first reach in the first display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area) Display the title display (title character) corresponding to
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach effect), the second display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode. Display the title display (title character) corresponding to the reach,
When the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) is entered after reaching the specified number of times, the display indicating that the special state is entered after reaching the specified number of times (the title character of the play time start effect) is displayed in the second display. It is characterized by displaying in a display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is the same as the title display of the second reach, which is relatively expected. Since the display is performed in the 2-display operation mode, it is possible to recognize that the special state after reaching the specific number of times is highly advantageous.

The gaming machine of form 35-2 is the gaming machine according to form 35-1,
When the display (title character of the play time start production) indicating that the special state (time saving state B (play time)) is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is ended, the second reach (low base strongest reach production) It is characterized by ending the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the same display operation mode (the display mode in which the title characters are erased while being enlarged) when ending the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, even when ending the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, the display operation mode is the same as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation. Since the game is ended in the display operation mode, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special state after reaching the specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Mode 36]
The game machine of form 36-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (time saving state B (play time)), it is possible to display a display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times can be,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). is larger than the size of the characters that make up the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, but it is indicated that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. The display shown is a state of being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and the size of characters constituting the display indicating that it is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times constitutes a title display corresponding to a specific reach. By making it larger than the character size, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 36-2 is the gaming machine according to form 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reach with different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times are the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the characters that make up the .
According to this feature, the character that constitutes the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed larger than the characters that constitute the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. You can bless being controlled to a special state after reaching it.

The gaming machine of form 36-3 is the gaming machine according to form 36-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times corresponds to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the character string that composes the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string constituting the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times is the character string constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Since it is displayed larger than the largest character, no matter which character you pay attention to, the display indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Therefore, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

[Mode 37]
The game machine of form 37-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (time saving state B (play time)), it is possible to display a display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times can be,
The display time of the display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is longer than the display time of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). also long,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, but it is indicated that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. The display shown is a situation in which the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times, and the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times is displayed longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so that the specified number of times You can bless being controlled to a special state after reaching it. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 37-2 is the gaming machine according to form 37-1,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the display (the title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times until at least part of the character string is not displayed is , is longer than the time from when a part of the character string that constitutes the title display (title character) corresponding to the above-mentioned specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until the entire character string is not displayed. there is
According to this feature, the title display is displayed for the purpose of arousing the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state during the time when the display indicating that the control to the special state will be performed after reaching a certain number of times with the intention of congratulations can be clearly seen. The player can be given a sense of satisfaction by making the time longer than the required time.

[Mode 38]
The game machine of form 38-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
The size of the characters that make up the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is the display that indicates the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). Larger than the size of the letters that make up
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific reach, the specific reach It is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to . In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 38-2 is the gaming machine according to form 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach A to C production) and,
The display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time) is displayed during execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), and the second reach It is characterized by not being displayed during execution of (low base strong reach A to C production).
According to this feature, by displaying the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times in the first reach, which has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to make the user aware of the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times, while at the same time the degree of expectation is high. In the high second reach, by not displaying the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance, and when the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times is small, the player's feeling of disappointment is reduced. can be mitigated.

The gaming machine of form 38-3 is the gaming machine according to form 38-2,
When it is notified that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is controlled to the advantageous state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining until play time is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying the number of times character) again,
When the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is notified that the control is not in the advantageous state, the specific number of times is reached after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is completed. It is characterized in that the display indicating the remaining number of times up to the post special state (characters of the remaining number of times up to the play time) is displayed again.
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state is controlled in the second reach, the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again, so that the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again. When the number of times is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated. Further, when it is notified that the second reach is not controlled to an advantageous state, the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again after the end of the second reach. It can be quickly relieved when there are few.

[Mode 39]
The game machine of form 39-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation promotion effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), it is possible to display a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
The size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the number of remaining times until play time). larger than
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display prompting the player to perform an action at the timing related to the specific reach is changed to the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times. By making it larger than the size, it is possible to draw the attention of the promotion character display and effectively prompt the player to take action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 39-2 is the gaming machine according to form 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion production A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the specific number of times is reached A display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (remaining number of characters until play time) is displayed at the same time,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in the introduction part (operation promotion production D) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a special state after reaching the specific number of times It is characterized in that the display indicating the number of times remaining until play time (characters of remaining number of times until play time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing to a specific reach, by displaying the promotion text and at the same time displaying the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is conscious. In the operation promotion display of the introductory part, by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to notify that it will be controlled to an advantageous state

[Form 40]
The game machine of form 40-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start effect), the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is finished,
The size of the characters composing the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) is the same as the size of the characters composing the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). bigger than the size
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the name of the advantageous state is displayed is the situation after it has already been notified that the control will be in the advantageous state, and the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is unnecessary. Therefore, before displaying the name of the advantageous state, the display indicating the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times is ended, and the size of the characters that make up the name of the advantageous state is changed to the special state after reaching the specified number of times. By making the display indicating the remaining number of times to the state larger than the size of the characters constituting the display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 40-2 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1,
Display showing the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times to play time) regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching the specified number of times characters) are the same size,
The size of the characters composing the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) is the same as the size of the characters composing the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). It is characterized by being larger than it is.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of remaining times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times, the size of the letters constituting the advantageous state name display indicates the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times. By making the size of characters larger than the size of the characters that constitute the display, it is possible to congratulate the control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 40-3 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100), after reaching a specific number of times in the special state (time saving state B (play time)) first start area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) game media It is characterized by determining a special variation pattern (time saving B start variation pattern) when (game ball) enters.
According to this feature, when the game medium enters the starting area for the first time in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, an effect corresponding to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Mode 41]
The game machine of form 41-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be displayed by changing from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode). is possible and
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the specific reach (low base weak reach A, The time when the title display (title character) corresponding to B production) is displayed is the title display ( title character) is displayed longer than the displayed time,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to the specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the specific reach in the second mode By making the time during which the title display corresponding to is displayed longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, the change to the second mode is ensured. can be recognized. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 41-2 is the gaming machine according to form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or the first aspect (white aspect) is left unchanged,
When changing the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode) , when a specific timing has come (when the time t1 has passed since the start of the title display period), the first mode (white mode) is changed to the second mode (red or gold mode) and a specific effect Output a sound (specific sound),
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not changed in the first mode (white mode), when the specific timing comes (title display When the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the period), the specific effect sound (specific sound) is output without changing the first mode (white mode).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at the specific timing, the specific sound effect is output, and when the title display does not change from the first mode at the specific timing. Since the specific sound effect is also output, it can be expected that the output of the specific sound effect will change to the second mode.

The gaming machine of form 41-3 is the gaming machine according to form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes multiple types of aspects (red and gold aspects),
When changing the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red, gold mode) , a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output when changing to any of the second modes (red and gold modes).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at the specific timing, the specific effect sound is output regardless of the type of change to the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw the user's attention to which type of second mode is to be changed by outputting the specific sound effect.

[Form 42]
The game machine of form 42-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red mode) and display it. can be,
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled from the first mode (white mode) to a more advantageous state than the second mode (red mode). It is possible to display by changing to the third mode (golden mode) with high expectation,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (golden aspect), the first aspect (white mode) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow), and then to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). and
According to this feature, even when the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first form to the second form in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the first form to the third form , the display mode is changed to the common display mode and then changed to the second mode or the third mode. Alternatively, until the change to the third mode, it is possible to make the user expect to change to the third mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the second mode, until the end.

The gaming machine of form 42-2 is the gaming machine according to form 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and when the light is clear, the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). Characterized by change.
According to this feature, it is possible to stimulate the change to the second mode or the third mode by shining the characters that constitute the title display.

[Form 43]
The game machine of form 43-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a plurality of variation patterns. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach system controlling the light emitting means using a common title);
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). and
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is made common for two different reach, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part is a brightness data table corresponding to each. By using the data table, it is possible to appropriately set the period until notification of whether or not the player will be in an advantageous state, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The game machine of form 44-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state A fifth variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) that is a variation pattern, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state The seventh variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10), and the eighth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12), which is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 4) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command to the effect control means (PB1-5 ~ 7 / PB1-8 ~ 10 to specify the variation pattern designation command) is transmitted,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 ~ 9 / PA2-10 ~ 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
The first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach is a title display part for displaying a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety of whether or not is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production) are the first reach (low base weak reach A production) and the second reach Expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table for the first title display part (weak Reach system common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production/low base strong reach C production) Control the light emitting means using the luminance data table for (strong reach system common title),
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction / strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the reach of 2 with high expectations and the reach of 2 with low expectations, thereby preventing increases in cost and capacity, By using the corresponding luminance data table, it is possible to preferably lengthen the period until the notification of whether or not an advantageous state is achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable title display. .

[Form 45]
The game machine of form 45-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state A fifth variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) that is a variation pattern, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state The seventh variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10), and the eighth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12), which is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, A ninth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among the variation patterns of
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 4) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command to the effect control means (PB1-5 ~ 7 / PB1-8 ~ 10 to specify the variation pattern designation command) is transmitted,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 ~ 9 / PA2-10 ~ 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, the tenth command (variation pattern designation command for designating PA2-13 to 15) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach is a title display part for displaying a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety of whether or not is notified,
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production) are the first reach (low base weak reach A production) and the second reach Expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach production) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A production), the second reach (low base weak reach B production), and the third reach (low base strong reach A production). ), the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than any of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table for the first title display part (weak Reach system common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production/low base strong reach C production) Control the light emitting means using the luminance data table for (strong reach system common title),
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the third title display part for the fifth reach (strongest reach type strongest reach title). ,
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction / strong reach system strong reach C introduction) to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach production), the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the introductory part of the fifth reach (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction). .
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the reach of 2 with high expectations and the reach of 2 with low expectations. By using the brightness data table corresponding to each, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is notified whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, and the reach with the highest expectation is , the title display part and the introductory part are each provided with dedicated luminance data tables, which enhances interest, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 46]
The game machine of form 46-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be displayed by changing from the first mode (white) to the second mode (red or gold),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), if the title display (title character) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the first luminance data table (weak reach system common title (white)) to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), when changing the title display (title character) to the second mode (red or gold), the second luminance data table (weak reach system common title (red) or weak reach system common title (gold)) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), regardless of whether the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second mode (red or gold), common The light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part is common even when the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of the specific reach and when it is changed to the second mode. , to prevent an increase in cost and capacity, and to use brightness data tables corresponding to the respective title display parts, in the case where the title display is not changed to the second mode and in the case where the title display is changed to the second mode. Each of them can be suitably produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 47]
The game machine of form 47-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the light emission using the luminance data table for the first part (weak reach type title start) control means,
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the luminance data table for the second part (weak reach system title display) controlling the light emitting means using
In the introductory part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed at the fixed position in the specific reach, and the second part after the title display is displayed at the fixed position By using the brightness data table corresponding to the , and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period for displaying the title and the period for notifying whether or not it is in an advantageous state can be suitably set. As a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Example]
A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Basic description]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[Configuration, etc. of pachinko machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". Incidentally, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece moves to the winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (the second start winning opening) by moving the movable piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change-over switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the throwing rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17. FIG.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided jackpot types in which many prize balls can be obtained, jackpot types with few prize balls, or jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability / high base state, a variable probability state is a high probability / high base state, and a normal state is also called a low probability / low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

[Progress of production, etc.]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of informing the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

[Major Operations of Main Board 11]
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command are received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the winning order (also called winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of putting out balls are changed according to set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball-out rate are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value, the throwing rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. By having different execution ratios of normal reach and super reach depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

[Main operations of production control board 12]
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control processing, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

[Modified example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may include. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 131SG]
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 131SG will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 131SG, for example, the place described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1", and "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach" and "super reach". It may be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the characteristic portion 131SG, "fluctuation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing face facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Unlike the description of FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different display ratios of the jackpot display results. Instead, the game machine is not provided with "loss with time saving" as a variable display result, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after turning on the power to the game machine (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the occurrence of the big hit, the variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in a low probability state. Also, when the next big hit does not occur, there is a case where control is performed to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or a relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this embodiment, the game state is also called "play time".

In this embodiment, when controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot A among a plurality of types of jackpots, variable display is performed 110 times in time saving state A (low probability/high base state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. Therefore, when the number of times of variable display from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times remaining, while it is controlled to the big win game state of either the big win B or the big win C among a plurality of kinds of big wins. Since 110 times of variable display is performed in the probability variable state (high probability / high base state), the number of variable display times from the end of the probability variable state to the short relief time is 900 times remaining. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of variable display is 1100 times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in the lower left part of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the pending display corresponding to the first special figure pending storage in which the variable display has not yet been executed although the starting prize has been won. A first special figure reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided, and in the lower right part of the image display device 5, a reserved display corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory that has started winning but has not yet been variable display is displayed. A displayable second special figure reservation storage display area 130SG005U is provided. At the bottom center of the image display device 5, an active display area 130SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 5, there is a fourth symbol 131SG005J for informing the player that the variable display is being executed, and in the center of the image display device 5, similarly to the variable display of decorative symbols, It is possible to display a small pattern 131SG005M in which variable display is executed, and in the upper right part of the image display device 5, it is the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to a time saving state B (relief time saving state) described later. It is possible to display the remaining number of relief time reduction arrival times display 131SG005Z indicating the number of relief time reduction arrival remaining times.

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed with a game ball. It is formed in the right game area 2R that can flow down. A game ball weakly launched by the shooting device flows down the first path as the left game area 2L, and a game ball strongly launched by the shooting device flows down the second path as the right game area 2R.

Furthermore, in the lower left part of the image display device 5, the first reservation storage display area 131SG005D showing the number of the first special figure reservation storage by the number of display of the reservation display, in the lower right part of the image display device 5, the second special figure reservation A second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided to indicate the number of memories by the displayed number of reserved displays. Further, at the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display area 131SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the flowing direction of the game balls. The first big winning hole is opened and closed so that game balls can enter and closed where game balls cannot enter by driving the solenoid 131SG082A (see FIG. 11-2) to open and close the big winning hole door (not shown). It is possible to change between states. The second big winning hole is opened and closed so that game balls can enter and closed where game balls cannot enter by driving the solenoid 131SG082B (see FIG. 11-2) to open and close the big winning door (not shown). It is possible to change between states.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first big prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second big prize opening. there is

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win the general winning hole 10, the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right game area 2R (first route). 2 path), the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, It is possible to win a prize and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 incorporated in the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, a first Special symbol display device 131SG004A, second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of executing variable display of the second special symbol, first suspension display device 131SG025A capable of displaying the number of first suspension memories, capable of displaying the number of second suspension memories Second holding display device 131SG025B, normal pattern display device 131SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal patterns, normal pattern holding display device 131SG025C capable of displaying normal pattern holding memory number, number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (jackpot Type) can be displayed round indicator 131SG131, jackpot game state, high probability / high base state (probability variable state), low probability / high base state (time-saving state), etc. A game that launches game balls toward the right game area 2R In the right-handed lamp 131SG132 that lights up in the state, the probability variable lamp 131SG133 that lights when it is in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the low probability / high base state (time saving state) A game information display unit is provided in which lighted time reduction lamps 131SG134 are collectively arranged. When the game state is the normal state, the right-handed lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops when the variable display results in a big win.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). An information output circuit for output is installed.

In this embodiment, the second big winning opening is provided with a V winning opening and a discharge opening downstream of the V winning opening. A variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by means of a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. shall flow down to the outlet without being able to pass through the

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening provided downstream of the second big winning opening. and a discharge switch 131SG023B2 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the discharge port.

Also, the effect control board 12 is connected with a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 . In addition, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED 131SG031 for prompting a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during variable display of the first special symbol, and a lighted during variable display of the second special symbol. 2nd special figure LED 131SG033, 1st reservation LED 131SG034A that lights up when the number of first reservation storage is 1 to 2, and 1st reservation LED 131SG034B that lights up when the number of 1st reservation storage is 3 to 4 , a second pending LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, and a push button 31B. A button LED 62, a movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination Random number MR3 for use, random number MR4 for determining variation pattern, random number MR5 for determining the result of normal map display, and random number MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5 are controlled to be countable. . It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR6 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern determination table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc., is stored.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), the special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win gaming state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this embodiment /80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

In the determination table stored in the ROM 101, in addition to the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. For the first special symbol), in addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. ), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big win (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value. may be changed.

[Jackpot type determination table]
Figure 11-3 (C1) and Figure 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Also, these jackpots A, jackpots B, and jackpots C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open period and a long open state with a long open period. (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot C'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this. More than one type may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, thereby winning the jackpot. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are implemented after the end of the game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this embodiment, even in the case of a big hit A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V cover is in a short-circuited open state, but it is extremely rare, so if a big hit A is made , V will not be won and the variable probability control will not be executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, 110 times probability variation control and time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game state is finished. The invention is not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, time saving control may be provided 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times). By doing so, the interest is improved because the next big hit is rich, and after the end of the big hit D, even if the big hit does not occur in the 110-time probability change state and the probability change control ends, the time saving state A (low probability After executing 899 times of variable display without generating a big hit in the high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) to be described later by executing the variable display only once in the normal state. Therefore, interest increases.

[time reduction number of times]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the present embodiment, when a game ball does not win a prize in the probability variable region due to the occurrence of a big hit A, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low Time-saving state A in which definite control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with a time-saving number of times of 110 times. In addition, either a big hit B or a big hit C occurs and the game is played in the probability variable area When the ball wins, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability-variable control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, a pole battle rush (pole/BATTLE RUSH)).In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to the big hit in the low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability Control is performed 1100 times in a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, the play time is 1100 times of time-saving).However, after the time-saving state B ends, it is 900 again without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state. Even if the change is performed twice, it is not controlled to the time saving state B again based on this.

In addition, the relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1−ML)̂n}×100
(K = time saving arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display count)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is approximately 1/319, the relief short-time arrival rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which setting values can be set, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is, so that even if the jackpot probability is a low setting value, the player can be saved. can do.

[Variation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns of this embodiment are roughly divided into a losing variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a big hit variation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the loss variation pattern is roughly divided into non-reach loss variation patterns (variation patterns whose variation pattern type is non-reach) and normal reach. Normal reach variation pattern (variation pattern type is normal reach variation pattern), reach performance of low base weak super reach A or reach of low base weak super reach B in normal state (low base state) Low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) that will be missed when the production is executed, and finally low base strong super reach A reach in the normal state (low base state) Variation pattern of low base strong super reach A (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A) that is lost after the production is executed, and finally low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) Low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern), which is lost after the reach production is executed, and finally low base strong super in the normal state (low base state) Low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern), which is lost when the reach effect of reach C is executed, and finally low base in the normal state (low base state) Low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern), time saving state A or probability change state (high base state) final The high-base super reach A reach effect is executed on the high-base super reach A fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high-base super reach A fluctuation pattern), time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) Finally, the high base super reach B reach effect is executed and the high base super reach B fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high base super reach B fluctuation pattern), time saving state A or probability variable state (high In the base state), the high-base super-reach C fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high-base super-reach C variation pattern), the high base super reach D variation pattern (variation pattern type is high Variation pattern of base super reach D) is provided.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is non-reach, when the special figure variation time is 12000 ms and the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display is 2 or less in the normal state, no reach performance is executed. PA1-1, the special figure fluctuation time is 5000 ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display is 3 in the normal state, no reach effect is executed PA1-2, the special figure fluctuation time It is 2000 ms, PA1-3 in which no reach effect is executed during time saving control (time saving state A or probability variable state), special figure fluctuation time is 500 ms, and any reach in time saving control (time saving state B) There are provided four types of variation patterns PA1-4 in which no effect is executed.

As a variation pattern with normal reach as the variation pattern type, there is provided one type of variation pattern of PA2-1, which has a special figure variation time of 20000 ms and loses when normal reach performance is executed.

As a variation pattern with a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 43000 ms, and a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed PA2-2, special figure variation time It is 53000 ms, and two types of fluctuation patterns of PA2-3 are provided in which the low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed and loses.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach A variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 63000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach A reach effect is performed. PA2-4, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 73000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed and lost. PA2-5, the special figure fluctuation time is 40000 ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-6.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach B as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 78000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is performed. PA2-7, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 83000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed and lost. PA2-8, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000 ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-9.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach C as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 88000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach C reach effect is performed. PA2-10, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 93000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed and lost. PA2-11, the special figure fluctuation time is 50000 ms, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effects of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of variation patterns PA2-PA12.

As a variation pattern with the lowest base strongest super reach as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 98000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. PA2-13, which is missed, has a special figure fluctuation time of 103000 ms, and after the reach production of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach production of low base strongest super reach is executed PA2-14 which is missed , The special figure fluctuation time is 60000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed without executing the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B. PA2- 15 three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach A as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PA2-16, which has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms and is missed when the high base super reach A reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach B variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern PA2-17 that has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms and will be missed when the high base super reach B reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach C, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms, and there is one type of variation pattern of PA2-18 that will be missed when the high-base super reach C reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach D, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms, and there is one type of variation pattern PA2-19 that will be missed when the high-base super reach D reach effect is executed. is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6, as the big hit variation pattern, as well as the loss variation pattern, non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, Variation patterns of the lowest base super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are provided.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation pattern, the special figure variation time is 500 ms + 15000 ms, and during time saving control (time saving state B) any reach in There is provided one kind of variation pattern of PB1-18 in which no effect is executed.

As the variation pattern of the normal reach type variation pattern, there is provided one type of variation pattern of PB1-1 which has a special figure variation time of 20000 ms + 15000 ms and is a big hit when normal reach performance is executed.

As a variation pattern with low base strong super reach A as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 63000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is performed. PB1-2 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 73000ms+15000ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach A is executed to make a big hit. PB1-3, the special figure fluctuation time is 40000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns are provided for PB-4.

As a variation pattern with low base strong super reach B as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 78000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is performed. PB1-5 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 83000ms+15000ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach B is executed to make a big hit. PB1-6, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns PB1-7 are provided.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach C as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 88000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach C reach effect is performed. PB1-8 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 93000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach C is executed to make a big hit. PB1-9, the special figure fluctuation time is 50000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach production of the low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach production of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns PB1-10 are provided.

As a variation pattern with a low base strongest super reach as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 98000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. PB1-11 that becomes a big hit, special figure fluctuation time is 103000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed and PB1-12 that becomes a big hit , The special figure fluctuation time is 60000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed without the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B, and the big hit PB1- Thirteen three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with high base super reach A as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-14 that has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms and a reach performance of high base super reach A is executed and becomes a big hit. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach B as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-15, which has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and a hit performance of a high base super reach B is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern of high-base super reach C, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and one type of variation pattern of PB1-16 that becomes a big hit by executing the reach effect of high base super reach C. is provided. As a variation pattern with high base super reach D as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-17, which is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and a hit performance is executed with high base super reach D. is provided.

[Variation pattern type determination table/Variation pattern determination table]
The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining the variation pattern type according to the game state and the variable display result, the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern type determination table, the game state, the variable It also includes a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining a variation pattern according to the display result and the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display is performed (the number of reserved memories for variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game state and variable display result. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number MR3 read at step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game state is a normal state and the variable display result is a loss, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is set to "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern If the type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is "low base strongest super reach". to decide.

Also, if the game state is a time saving state A or a probability variable state and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and the loss variation pattern determination The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the table B and the value of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is set to "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined as "high base super reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern If the type is determined to be "high base super reach B" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C" and the value of random number MR3 is 4095 If it is within the range of , the variation pattern type is determined as "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is lost, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach".

In addition, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is set to "low base strong super Reach A" is determined, and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", and the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706 If there is, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strongest super reach".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is lost, select the big hit variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the table B and the value of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the variation pattern type is determined as "normal reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the variation pattern type is set to "high base super reach". A” and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the variation pattern type is determined to be “high base super reach B”, and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380 determines the variation pattern type to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, determines the variation pattern type to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is lost, select the big hit variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and the loss variation pattern determination table C The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach".

After determining the variation pattern type as described above, depending on the game state and the variable display result and the reserved memory number of special symbols to execute the variable display (variable display target pending number) Figure 11-8 ~ Figure 11-10 Select one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in , compare the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read at step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal process, and determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is lost, the game state is the normal state, and the variable display target reserved memory number is 0 to 2, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-8 (A). , the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-1. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1. If the determined variation pattern type is low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-2 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the random number MR4 is 200 to 255. If it is within the range of , the fluctuation pattern is determined as PA2-3.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-4, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-5. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-7, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-9.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-10, and the value of random number MR4 is 89 ~ If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-13, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to 173. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-15.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost, the game state is the normal state, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 3, the change pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is selected, A variation pattern is determined by comparing the deviation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-2. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-4, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-5. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-7, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-9.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-10, and the value of random number MR4 is 89 ~ If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-13, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to 173. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is lost and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the probability variable state, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), and the loss variation pattern determination table A variation pattern is determined by comparing C with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-3. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-17. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-18. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-19.

Also, if the variable display result is lost and the game state is the time saving state B, the variation pattern determination table D for loss shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern determination table D for loss A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-4.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-1 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-3, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-4. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-7.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-9, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-10. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-11, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 to 166. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-13.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the big hit variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is selected, and the big hit variation pattern determination table A variation pattern is determined by comparing B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-1 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-14. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-15. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-17.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the time saving state B, the big hit variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-18 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255.

[Expectation level of super reach performance]
When the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above, the expected degree of big hit is as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to (C). The degree of expectation of a super reach effect is the ratio of a big hit when the corresponding super reach effect is executed. It is a value calculated by dividing by the sum of the percentage of big hits by executing and the percentage of losing by executing the corresponding super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), among the reach effects of super reach executed when the game state is the normal state, from the reach effects of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B, Since there is no direct hit, the expected hit level is 0%. C, Low Base Strongest Reach) may develop into a reach production, and the expectation of development from low base weak super reach A to other super reach reach production is about 44%, low base weak super reach B to other The degree of expectation for the development of reach performance of super reach is about 68%. The degree of expectation for the development of a super reach effect is the rate at which another super reach effect develops when the corresponding super reach effect is executed. The ratio of development is the sum of the ratio of developing to other super reach effects by executing the corresponding super reach effect and the ratio of losing without developing to other super reach effects by executing the corresponding super reach effect. It is a value calculated by division.

In addition, among the reach effects of the super reach that are executed when the game state is the normal state, the hit expectation level of the reach effect of the low base strong super reach A is about 20%, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach B is about 20%. The expected degree of big hit is about 25%, the expected degree of reach performance of low base strong super reach C is about 35%, and the expected degree of reach performance of low base strongest super reach is about 55%. In addition, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach jackpot expectations for reach performance are when developed from low base weak super reach A, when developed from low base weak super reach B, and low base The expected level of jackpot is different between when it is executed directly without passing through weak super reach A and B, and the expected level of hit performance of low base strong super reach A developed from low base weak super reach A is about 19. Approximately 20%, the reach performance of low-base strong super reach A developed from low-base weak super reach B is about 20%, and the reach performance of low-base strong super reach A is performed directly without going through B. The expectation level is about 21%, and the expectation of the hit performance of low base strong super reach B developed from low base weak super reach A is about 24%, low base strong super reach B developed from low base weak super reach B. The expected hit of the reach effect is about 25%, and the expected hit of the reach effect of the low base strong super reach B, which is directly executed without going through B, is about 27%, and has developed from the low base weak super reach A. Low base strong super reach C has a reach expectation of about 33%, and low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach B. The reach expectation of reach C is about 35%, go through B. The hit expectation of the low-base strong super reach C, which is directly executed without being played, is about 37%, and the hit expectation of the low-base strongest super reach, developed from the low-base weak super reach A, is about 53%. Low base weak super reach B The reach expectation of the low base strongest super reach that developed from B is about 55%. 57%.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), the hit expectation of the high-base super reach A reach performance executed when the game state is the time-saving state A is about 14%, and the reach performance of the high-base super reach B is about 14%. The degree of expectation for a big hit is about 16%, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 27%, and the degree of expectation for a big hit in the reach performance of the high base super reach D is about 70%.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), the high-base super reach A reach performance that is executed when the game state is a variable probability state. The degree of expectation for big hit is about 45%, the degree of expectation for big hit of reach performance of high base super reach C is about 60%, and the degree of expectation of big hit of reach performance of high base super reach D is about 90%.

As will be described later, in the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display an expectation indication display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit of the corresponding super ready-to-win effect by the number of stars. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the reach production of low base weak super reach A and B among the super reach executed when the game state is normal state, the expectation indication display is not displayed, 3 stars for the expectation indication in the reach production of the base strong super reach A, 3.5 stars for the expectation indication in the reach production of the low base strong super reach B, expectations in the reach production of the low base strong super reach C 4 stars are displayed in the degree suggestive display, and 4.5 stars are displayed in the expected degree suggestive display in the reach performance of the lowest base strongest super reach. As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and (C), 3 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach performance of the high base super reach A that is executed when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable probability state. 3.5 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach production of high base super reach B, 4 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in reach production of high base super reach C, and high base super reach 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of D.

The same number of stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach effect of super reach executed when the game state is normal and the reach effect of super reach executed when the game state is variable probability state. However, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectations are not the same. When the number of stars displayed in the degree indication display is the same, the super which is executed when the gaming state is a probability variable state than the reach effect of the super reach which is executed when the gaming state is a normal state Reach's reach production suggests a higher jackpot expectation.

In addition, even if it is a super ready-to-win reach effect that is executed when the game state is a normal state or a super ready-to-win reach effect that is executed when the game state is a variable probability state, the expectation level indication display Every time the number of stars displayed in increases by 0.5, the suggested jackpot expectation increases, but as shown in FIGS. As the number of stars increases in the expectation degree suggestion display of the reach performance, the suggested increase amount of the jackpot expectation degree increases. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), when the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display increases from 3 to 3.5, the amount of increase in the expectation of the jackpot is It is the same whether it is a super ready-to-win reach effect executed when the game state is a normal state or a super ready-to-win reach effect to be executed when the game state is a variable probability state, but the degree of expectation When the number of stars displayed in the suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4 and from 4 to 4.5, the amount of increase in the expected degree of jackpot is performed when the game state is the normal state. The ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win that is executed when the game state is in the variable probability state is larger than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

[Production control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIGS. 11-13(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. ``Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types should be used as the jackpot type in the case of a big hit.

As for the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command with a variable display result of "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation designation command for designating the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. be.

The command 9000H is an initialization designation (power-on designation) command for displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on in the image display device 5 . The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command for displaying a power failure recovery screen indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power failure (power failure) state on the image display device 5 .

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify and display the special figure reserved storage number in the first reserved storage display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 132SG005U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command for designating the variable category of the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 in a state where the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, the start of the jackpot game. The command D200H is a V winning notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the V switch 131SG023B1 in the jackpot game state, ie, that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding relief working time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variable count notification command for notifying the remaining probability variable control count in the probability variable state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED 131SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying that the right-handed LED 131SG031 is turned off.

Command 91XXH is a restoration time reduction time number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction counter by converting it into a hexadecimal number at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction time count specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3 digit, fourth digit), different EXT data is set.

In the recovery time reduction time number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction time number designation 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the relief time reduction number is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are restoration time reduction number designation 2 commands that designate the second digit of the value of the number of times of restoration. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number designation 3 commands that designate the third digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number designation 4 commands that designate the fourth digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time.

The command 94XXH is a relief time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set according to the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction .

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that designates that the relief time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that designates that the remaining 1 to 125 times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that the remaining 127 times or more is reached until the relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display number is 700 times, relief A command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number of times 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specifying command for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data holding area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIGS. It is The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, It has a game control timer setting section 131SG153, a game control counter setting section 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 131SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 131SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 131SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store a maximum of four pending memories as the first special figure pending memory (a pending memory that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 131SG151A), and a second special figure pending memory ( It is possible to store up to four pending memories as a pending memory that can be stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, at the time of execution of the variable display, the CPU 103, first, if there is a second special figure reservation memory in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6), random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B are shifted. That is, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1. The values of MR1 to random number MR4 are read, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of the pending number 2 is set as the pending memory of the pending number 1 and the pending memory of the pending number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in 2nd special figure reservation storage part 131SG151B. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, after reading the random values MR1 to MR4 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A, shift the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A. That is, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the pending storage of the holding number 1 of the first special figure holding storage unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random values stored as the holding storage of the holding number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR4 are read, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of the pending number 2 is set as the pending memory of the pending number 1 and the pending memory of the pending number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B (if the variable display result is a big hit, the random value Judgment of jackpot type based on MR2) is executed), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 6), a variation pattern that differs according to the number of pending memories of the game state, the variable display result, and the special symbol that executes the variable display After determining the variation pattern type using the type determination table, the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table according to the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of retained memories, and the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine a variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory just before the variable display.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 131SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 131SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 131SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR6 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

[Production control data holding area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 131SG190 shown in FIG. 11-15 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 131SG191, a production control timer setting unit 131SG192, a production control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 131SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. In the startup winning command buffer 131SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. The storage area, the area for storing the variable category designation command, the area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and the area for storing the pending display flag are associated with the number of pending storage, and the first special figure pending storage And a storage area (entry) for storing separately in the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B of FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 131SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-15(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 131SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , is provided.

In this embodiment, if the starting winning is generated when the variable display is not executed and the reserved memory does not exist, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category command, the reserved memory based on the starting winning The number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the jackpot game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

[Start Winning Judgment Process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (131SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (131SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 131SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 131SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage reaches the upper limit at 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (131SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (131SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 131SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106). .

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. Random number MR2, random number MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, and random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (131SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the big hit type/small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random number MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (131SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the process of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (131SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (131SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 131SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 131SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 131SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

[Random value determination process when winning a prize]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in 131SGS 112 of FIG. 11-17 as the winning random number determination processing. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbols) is set to "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 6), and the state of the big hit game is entered. A determination is made as to whether or not to control. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special figure display result. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not the big win is to be made. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "big hit", and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc., as will be described later, Pre-reading notice such as panel display effect and pending notice effect is performed. will be executed.

11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). . In step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number MR1 is out of the jackpot determination range, that is, if the result of the variable display is a loss, transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss is performed (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is the normal state, select the losing variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the game state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the variation pattern type determination table B for loss shown in FIG. Step 131SGS126e), if the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Further, in step 131SGS123a, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. If the big hit variation pattern type determination table B shown and the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the big hit variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. , step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

At step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random number MR3 extracted at step 131SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and others (normal reach). For example, if the random value MR3 is a non-reach variation pattern type, the variation category is determined as non-reach, and if the random value MR3 is a normal reach variation pattern type, the variation category is determined as other (normal reach), and random Numerical value MR3 is low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strong super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B. , high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category may be determined as super reach. Then, the variable category designation command (any one shown in FIGS. 11-17(B)) according to the determination result is set to be transmitted, and the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed (step 131SGS132).

In addition, the command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103 .

[Game control main processing]
11-18 are flow charts showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction. Then, the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to transmit a recovery time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the relief time-saving number counter and performs control to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the relief time reduction number designation command is transmitted, and the remaining variable until the current relief time reduction You will be notified of the number of impressions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when power is restored, aside from the command at the time of restoration, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery and the number of times of recovery is transmitted. do not have. For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Also, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, in the initialization process of step S8, the area of the relief time reduction counter Perform clear processing on the included area.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set in the relief time saving number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is turned on, even if the variable display is executed 900 times, if no big hit occurs, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is entered. will be controlled. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control command for instructing initialization to be transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set to the relief time reduction number counter, so the CPU 103 initializes It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the effect control command that instructs.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter ("900" in this embodiment), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal, and restores the time relief. Control is performed to transmit the number of times of working hours designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear processing is executed at the time of turning on the power to the game machine, the case of initial setting is set to "900" in the relief time reduction counter. Not limited to this, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (steps S4 and S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

[Time saving flag, variable probability flag]
In the present embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any one of the conditions for being controlled to the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flags include a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the big win A, the big win B, and the big win C. This time-saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (when the big hit occurs during the time-saving state A, 110 times of time-saving control ends and the normal state controlled timing).

The time saving flag B is set when it is controlled to the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving. This time-saving flag B is when variable display is executed 900 times in which the display result does not become a big hit pattern after RAM clearing, or when the display result does not become a big win pattern in a low probability state after the end of the big win game state, variable display is performed 900 times. is executed, and when the time-saving state B ends (the timing of the big hit during the time-saving state B, the timing of the time-saving control ending 1100 times and being controlled to the normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when V is won in the first round of the big win game, when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, and a variable probability flag is set. This variable probability flag is erased at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the timing when the variable probability state becomes a big hit, the timing when the variable probability control is executed for the 110th time and the timing is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the variable probability flag is erased based on the 110th time since the variable display is controlled to the variable probability state when step 131SGS69A in FIG. 11-20 described later is YES.

[Special symbol normal processing]
FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in the present embodiment, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening It may be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 131SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 uses the low probability jackpot determination value to perform the big hit determination. Further, if the variable probability flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the high-probability big-hit determination value to perform the big-hit determination. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 131SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value matching the random number is determined as the jackpot type (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for type determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted and set to "0") It is a configuration that can occur. In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is entered based on the big hit A, and the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment). Although it is controlled to the time saving state B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit, it is configured to control to the time saving state A based on the big win.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 131SGS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In addition, in the present embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the number of times of variable display until the relief time saving after step 131SGS71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter. The processing mode is not limited. For example, after executing the counting process of the number of times of variable display until the relief time saving in step 131SGS71 and thereafter, the subtraction process of the time saving number counter may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will be a relief time saving, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "110" to the time saving number counter (see step 131 SGS172), the value of the time saving number counter will be 1 extra Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, you may comprise so that "111" which is one more may be set to the number-of-hours-saving counter beforehand.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS69A, when it is in the variable probability state, the processing after step 131SGS70 (especially the processing of step 131SGSS71) is not performed, so when the gaming state is the variable probability state Even if the variable display is executed (in this embodiment, during pole/battle rush), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not subtracted. If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is set, the processing after step 131SGSS70 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not updated, the relief time-saving number designation command or the relief time-saving number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state B or time-saving state B The timing is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 900 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS71, it is related to whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Instead, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131 SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time-saving number designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time-saving number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time-saving number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating control to the time reduction state B at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 131 SGS75 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data, and outputs command 957FH as a relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control for transmission to the CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the number of times the remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this embodiment, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times ) (step 131SGS77). Incidentally, whether or not the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9601H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction, and transmits a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining variable display times until relief time saving and execute the later-described fanning effect or countdown effect.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time It is configured to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command and a relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command, and when the relief time becomes short after the second time, it is configured not to transmit the relief time-saving number designation command and the relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command. Also good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a big win A, the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be a big win B, the special symbol stop symbol is "3". When it is determined to be a big win C, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be ``7'', and when it is determined to be a loss, the stop design of the special design is determined to be ``-''. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 11-21 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol fixing period timer is in operation (step 131SGS131). When the symbol fixation period timer is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 131SGS132). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

When the jackpot flag is set, the game state flags such as the time saving A flag, the time saving B flag, and the probability variation flag are cleared (step 131 SGS134), the time saving number counter is cleared (step 131 SGS135), and the number of times of the time saving is cleared (step 131 SGS135). The transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). In addition, the big hit start designation|designated command by which transmission setting was carried out is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 by CPU103 performing command control processing (refer FIG. 5).

Moreover, when the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, CPU103 determines whether the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. When the relief working hours determination flag is set, the relief working hours determination flag is cleared, and the working hours saving B flag indicating that it is the working hours saving state B is set (step 131SGS141, step 131SGS142). Furthermore, while setting 1100 corresponding to the time saving state B (relief time saving) to the time saving number counter, transmission setting of the time saving state B designation command is performed (step 131SGS143, step 131SGS144). In addition, the time saving state B specification command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the lighting of the right-handed lamp 131SG132 is started, and transmission setting of the right-handed LED lighting notification command is performed (step 131SGS145, step 131SGS146). In addition, the right hitting LED lighting notification command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol determination period, is set in the symbol determination period timer, and transmission setting of the symbol determination designation command is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). It should be noted that the symbol determination designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the game state designation command according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. In addition, the game state designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, in step 131SGS131, when the pattern fixing period timer is in operation, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern fixing period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150), and determines whether or not the pattern fixing period timer has timed out ( Step 131SGS151). When the symbol fixing period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stopping process is ended, and when the symbol fixing engine timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not the derived stopped symbol is a winning symbol (step 131SGS152). . When the derived stop symbol is a winning symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 131 SGS153), and the derived stop symbol is a jackpot symbol. If so, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 131SGS154).

[state change]
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described. 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), when a big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to the variable probability state, and the big hit is achieved. When A occurs, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via big hit (low probability/high base state)). In addition, although not shown, even when the big hit B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit). Also, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after RAM clear processing or the end of the probability variable state, the number of variable display times reaches 900 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, or the time reduction state After the end of 110 variable displays in A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), time-saving state B (time-saving state via relief time-saving (low accuracy / high base state) ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the variable probability state is entered again. controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process or the probability change state ends, the variable display count reaches 900 times without the next big hit occurring, or if the time is reduced) When the number of times of variable display reaches 790 times without occurrence of the next big hit after completion of 110 times of variable display in state A), control is made to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. In such a control mode, I can't limit it. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the time saving number of times (in this embodiment, 110 times) corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (V switch 131SG023B1) are compared, and the current time saving number of times If the remaining number of times is larger, the present time saving state B may be continued as it is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or during the variable probability state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player, so during the time saving state or during the variable probability state The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

[Production control process processing/pre-reading notice]
As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, in the pre-reading notice setting process of the present embodiment, the timing at which the start winning is generated (holding storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) By setting the pending display flag to any of 0 to 2 at the timing when the starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending memory number notification command are newly stored), active display or pending display is determined, and the ratio of control to the big hit game state can be suggested by the display modes of the active display and the pending display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "non-reach", the pre-reading notice is not executed ( The value of the pending display flag is set to "0") is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") is 5%. , and execution of the pre-reading notice in the effect pattern β (set the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "other (normal reach)", the pre-reading notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to " 0") is determined at a rate of 90%, execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is determined at a rate of 10%, and pre-reading Execution of the notice in the performance pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "super reach", the pre-reading notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0" ) is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is determined at a rate of 20%, and pre-reading notice Execution in the production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "big hit", non-execution of pre-reading notice (setting the value of the pending display flag to "0") is determined at a rate of 5%, and pre-reading notice is executed in the effect pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to “1”) at a rate of 30%, and the pre-reading notice is executed in the effect pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to “2” ) at a rate of 65%.

In addition, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the relief time reduction etc. remaining number display update process (step 131SGS163), and the relief time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. do. In the pending display/active display update processing, the processing of starting the display of the pending display or the active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, and erasing the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display. Processing, processing of hiding or starting to display the pending display or the active display according to the progress of the effect during the variable display is executed. In the relief time-saving arrival remaining number display update process, the value of the relief time-saving arrival remaining number display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced every time the variable display is started. A process of hiding or starting to display the relief time reduction reach remaining number display 131SG005Z is executed according to the progress of the production in the middle. In the relief time-saving arrival notification effect execution processing, from the end timing of the variable display when the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, the processing for executing the relief time-saving arrival notification effect for notifying that the control is made to the time-saving state B is executed. .

[Variable display start setting process]
11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11. FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS602). In addition, the first special figure reservation storage (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of start winning is shifted one by one. (Step 131 SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" are erased because there is no shift destination.

In step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). When the second variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS605). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one. (Step 131 SGS 606). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "2-1" are erased because there is no shift destination.

In addition, when the second special figure variable display start command reception flag is not ON, the variable display start setting process is terminated.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is determined according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, when the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reaching loss), the stop pattern is 100% "124" or "578 , etc. (non-reach mode, non-reach out-of-range mode). Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach missing), 95% of the stop symbols are combined with even numbers such as "242" and "676" ( Determined as even number reach mode, even number reach out mode), and at a rate of 5% Determined as a combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach out mode) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach missing), the stop pattern will be 80% of the even number "reach" such as "242" or "676" Determine the combination (even number reach mode, even number reach out mode), and at a rate of 19%, "131" or "545" etc. Other than 7 "Reach" combination (odd number reach mode, odd number reach out mode) , and at a rate of 1%, it is determined to be a combination of "reach" in 7 patterns such as "767" and "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach loss mode).

Then, when the variable display result is "big hit", the stop pattern is determined to be a combination of even numbers of "reach" such as "222" and "666" (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) at a rate of 20%. Then, at a rate of 50%, the combination of "reach" with an odd number other than 7 such as "111" and "555" is determined (odd reach mode, odd reach jackpot mode), and at a rate of 30% "777" A combination of "reach" in 7 patterns ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) is determined.

In other words, when the decorative pattern is "7" pattern, the probability of hitting the jackpot is the highest. It is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit decreases in order (expectation of a big hit by decorative patterns: reach with "7" pattern > reach with odd numbered patterns other than "7" > reach with even number > no reach). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decoration pattern is in a ready-to-win state, and to which pattern to achieve a ready-to-win state.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is illustrated a form in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the combination of even numbers of decorative patterns results in a reach or the combination of an odd number of decorative patterns results in a reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of expectation for big win may be the same regardless of the combination of decorative patterns, and the degree of expectation for big win when the degree of reach is achieved according to the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative patterns. may be different.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 after determining the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determines whether or not to execute the notice effect during variable display suggesting the possibility that the result of variable display will be a big hit during variable display. is executed (step 131SGS609).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table (effect control pattern) according to the variation pattern, the game state, the result of the variable display, and the determination result of the notice effect determination process during variable display (step 131SGS610), and sets the process timer. Start (step 131SGS611).

A production control pattern is set in each process table. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound control for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (131SGS612). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

[Regarding effects during variable display]
When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command designating the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, the variable display start setting of subsequent step S171 is performed. Based on the variable display results such as the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command in the process, the special pattern and the decoration pattern specified by the variable display result specification command, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern (fixed decoration pattern), The mode of variable display of decorative patterns, the presence or absence of execution of ready-to-win performance, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, the performance control pattern reflecting the determination result etc. is set, and based on the set performance control pattern, decoration is performed. It controls variable display of symbols, ready-to-win production, and the like.

[Regarding production control patterns]
As shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the effect control pattern is set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1-4, PA2-1-19 and PB1-1-18.

As effect control patterns corresponding to the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, patterns of non-reach 1 to 4 are set in which the decoration pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode and becomes non-to-win. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are variation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is a variation pattern selected in the time saving state A or the probability variation state, and PA1-4 is the time saving state B In the non-reach 1 to 4 patterns corresponding to each, the time until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed is set to be different depending on the variation time according to the variation pattern. ing.

As a production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal ready-to-win ready-to-win production ("Normal" in the figure) is executed in which the decoration pattern is in a ready-to-win mode, and then a ready-to-win game is lost. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in normal state, time saving state A, probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-2, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A ("low base weak A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-3, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B ("low base weak B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. is set.

As a production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-4, after the reach production of normal reach, the reach production of low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach production of low base strong reach A ("low base strong A ”) is executed, and the pattern is set to be out of reach after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-5, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach A is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-6, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach A is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-7, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach B ("low base strong B ”) is executed, and the pattern is set to be out of reach after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-8, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-9, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-10, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-11, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As a production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-13, after the reach production of normal reach, the reach production of low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach production of the strongest low base super reach ("low base strongest" in the figure) ) is executed, and a pattern is set in which the reach is lost after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-14, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-15, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the lowest base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is lost.

All of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach A ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach B ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is

Variation patterns PA2-16 to 19 are all variation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed and then a big hit is set.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strong reach A is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-3, after the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach A is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low-base strong reach A is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach A is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach B is executed, and then a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super-reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach B is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low-base strong reach B is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strong reach C is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach C is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10, a pattern is set in which, after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed, and then a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super-reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the strongest super-reach to the low-base is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the lowest base strongest super-reach is executed, and then a big win is made.

All of the fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are fluctuation patterns selected in the normal state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation patterns PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the high base reach A is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the high base reach B is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the reach effect of the high base reach C is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the reach effect of the high base reach D is executed, and then the big hit is achieved.

The variation patterns PB1-14 to 17 are all variation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern that results in a big hit without executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is set. Variation patterns PB1-18 are variation patterns selected in the time saving state B.

[About the flow of production during variable display]
FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, decoration Control is performed so that the pattern is not in a ready-to-win mode and is out of reach-to-win state.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, decoration A ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is performed in which the pattern is in a ready-to-win mode, and then control is performed so that if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach is lost, and specified by the variation pattern specification command. If the variation pattern is PB1-1, it is controlled so as to be a big hit.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, the reach effect of normal reach. After the execution, the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and after that, loss is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach A, and the reach is controlled to be lost.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, the reach effect of normal reach. After the execution, the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the loss is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach B, and control is performed so that the ready-to-win is lost.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 4, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, the low base A big hit is reported as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach A, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 5, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach A, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A Loss is notified as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, a big win is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 7, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, the low base A big hit is reported as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach B, and control is performed so as to achieve a big win.

Effect control CPU120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 8, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-6, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach B, and control is performed so as to achieve a big win.

Effect control CPU120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is performed. Loss is notified as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-7, a big hit is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 10, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-8, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach C, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

Effect control CPU120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach C is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 11, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-9, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach C, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is performed. Loss is reported as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, a big hit is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, after that, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13. If so, the deviation is notified as a result of the reach production of the low base strongest super reach, control is performed so that the reach is deviated, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-11, the low base strongest super A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance, and control is performed so that the big win is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, normal reach After executing the reach performance of low base weak super reach B, the reach performance of low base strongest super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14. If so, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach production of the lowest base strongest super reach, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, the low base strongest super A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance, and control is performed so that the big win is achieved.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the effect result of the reach effect of low base strongest super reach If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-13, the big win is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the lowest base strongest super reach, and the big win is reported. Control so that

In this way, in the normal state, a big hit is notified as a production result in the reach production of the low base weak super reach A and B, and the reach production of the low base weak super reach A and B is passed through without being controlled to the big hit. Low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest reach, low base weak super reach A, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach executed without going through the reach production of B Only in the reach performance of the super reach, a big hit is notified as a result of the performance, and controlled to the big hit.

FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-3, decoration Control is performed so that the pattern is not in a ready-to-win mode and is out of reach-to-win state.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1 , the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach is lost, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is PB1-1, it is controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14 , after executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach A, and then if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16, the reach of high base super reach A Loss is reported as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-14, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach A. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15 , after executing the reach effect of normal reach, execute the reach effect of high base super reach B, and then if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17, the reach of high base super reach B Loss is notified as the effect result of the performance, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-15, the big hit is the effect result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16 , After executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach C, and then reach high base super reach C if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 Loss is notified as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-16, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach C. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17 , After executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach D, and then reach high base super reach D if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19 Loss is notified as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-17, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach D. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

In this way, in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state, the performance result of a big hit or a loss is notified in the reach performance of the high base super reach A to D controlled after the normal performance or the normal performance, and then controlled to the big hit or loss. Further, another ready-to-reach effect is not executed from the high base super reach A to D controlled after the normal effect.

11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in time saving state B. FIG. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-4, the decorative pattern reaches. It is controlled so that non-reach is out of range without becoming a mode.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, the decorative pattern reaches It controls so that it becomes a big hit without becoming a mode.

In this way, in the time-saving state B, it is controlled so as to always be non-reach in the case of a loss and in the case of a big hit.

[About super reach performance]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach during the variable display. The reach effect of super reach is performed in the normal state as described above. Includes high base super reach A-D reach renditions performed in . In the following, the reach effects of normal reach and super reach may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively. Base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach reach effects, respectively, simply low base weak reach A effect, low base weak reach B effect, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach It is sometimes called B production, low base strong reach C production, low base strongest reach production, and the reach production of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are respectively. They may simply be referred to as a high base reach A effect, a high base reach B effect, a high base reach C effect, and a high base reach effect.

In the super reach production, a production that suggests the possibility of a big hit is executed, and the production result of whether it will finally be a big hit (for low base weak super reach A and B, low base strong super reach A to C, This is an effect in which the result of developing to the strongest super reach at a low base or losing) is notified.

In addition, a title is set for each type of super reach effect, and in the super reach effect, the title display part where the title of the super reach effect is displayed and the effect result are notified after the title display part. It consists of an introductory part up to and.

[Regarding modified examples of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, as a variation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, after executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, it develops into another super reach effect. However, after the execution of the low-base weak reach A performance, the variation pattern PB1-JA that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach performance, and the low-base weak reach B performance. After the execution of , the configuration may include a variation pattern PB1-JB that becomes a big hit without developing into another super ready-to-win effect.

In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JA, After the normal reach performance is executed, the low base weak reach A performance is executed, a big hit is reported as a performance result of the low base weak reach A performance, control is performed to make the big win, and the first variable display start command or the When the second variable display start command is received and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, after executing the normal reach performance, the low base weak reach B performance is executed, and the low base weak reach B performance is executed. A big win is reported as a performance result of the performance, and controlled to be a big win. Therefore, in such a configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, it is notified whether or not the effect results in a big hit, or it develops into another super reach effect. Thus, in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B effect, whether or not a big hit will be achieved as a result of the effect is notified, or another super reach effect develops.

In addition, after the execution of the low base weak reach A, B production, it may be configured not to include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach production, and in such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A, B production , whether or not a big hit will be achieved as a result of the effect is notified.

Also, in the following embodiments, after the execution of the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to apply a configuration including a variation pattern that results in a big hit without developing into another super reach effect. , low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach A so that the jackpot expectation level is higher than low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach A production , and a variation pattern that becomes a loss after execution of B performance, and a determination ratio of a variation pattern that becomes a big win without developing into other super reach performance after execution of low-base weak reach A and B performances are determined.

[About low base weak reach A effect]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base weak reach A effect, and FIG. 11-33 shows the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, relative As shown in FIG. 11-32(a1), the type of decorative pattern (large) designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed at a predetermined timing. ) are stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R of the image display device 5 to perform a normal ready-to-win effect in a ready-to-win mode. After that, an operation prompting effect A, which will be described later, is executed, and as shown in FIG. , the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is started after executing the white flash effect of displaying the entire display area in white.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (background of the sky in the daytime) during the fluctuation of the decoration pattern (large) in the normal state displayed before the white flash effect is changed to the white flash effect. After that, it switches to the background of low base weak reach A production (corridor background), and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in reach mode before the white flash production is larger than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash production. It switches to the reach mode of the small decorative pattern (small).

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect, a part of the title characters of the low-base weak reach A effect "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when it is done until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Catch Bakuchu!" Catch it!" disappears and the title end period until it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in FIGS. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), they are made to overlap with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" Let When the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary at a fixed position, part of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" be done.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach A production During the start period, even if the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode are numbers “1” to “9”, part of the title characters “Catch the Bakuchu!” Will be the left and right decorations of the reach mode Among the patterns (small), it appears in a manner that overlaps with the decoration pattern (small) on the left side, and when the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" It is displayed in a mode in which a part overlaps with both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" In the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character " Bakuchu" appears, and below the title text "Catch Bakuchu!", the subtitle "Try to catch it if you can!" The voice of the words displayed as subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the voice reading out the title is not output. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. to the right of until all the title characters disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, the expectation level suggestion display, which will be described later, is not displayed.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect. As shown in Figure 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production is the same as the background of the title display part (corridor background), and from the title display part The scene of the video that has started (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues throughout the introduction part, and the line displayed in the title display part "Try to catch it if you can!" , the voices of the lines output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also continuously output. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the voice output of the line displayed in the title display part "Try to catch it if you can!" The scene changes to a video scene (a scene in which the ally character "Mumu" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

The effect control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into one of low base strong super reach A to C and low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command. At the end of the part, after executing the drop performance of dropping the movable body 32, it is developed into one of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance. . On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the low base weak super reach A, the reach is lost, the ally character "Mume" will catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. is not possible, the effect result of the low base weak reach A effect is reported as the effect result of not being a big hit, and then the image display device 5 is displayed with a decorative pattern indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result specifying command. Display the combination of (Large).

In addition, after the execution of the low-base weak reach A effect, in a configuration including a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the low-base weak super reach A effect by a variation pattern designation command. Later, after the execution of the low base weak reach A production, if a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach production is specified, at the end of the introduction part, the ally character “Mume” will be the enemy character “Baku "Chu" is caught, and as a result of the low base weak reach A effect, the effect result of a big win (control to a big win game state) is reported, and then the image display device 5 is given a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a designated type of jackpot is displayed.

[About low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base weak reach B effect, and FIG. 11-35 shows the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, decoration The variation of the pattern (large) is started, and as shown in FIG. 11-34(b1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specifying command is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. , the normal ready-to-win performance is executed in which the game is stopped in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R to set the ready-to-win mode. After that, an operation prompting effect A, which will be described later, is executed, and as shown in FIG. , the white flash effect for displaying the entire display area in white is executed, and then the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (background of the daytime sky) during the change of the decoration pattern (large) in the normal state displayed before the white flash effect is changed to the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to a low-base weak reach B production background (a background in which the characters “Mume” and the character “Boingo” face each other on both sides of the hockey table), and the decoration pattern that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash production. (Large) is switched to the ready-to-reach state of the decorative pattern (small) smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, part of the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" which was displayed at the fixed position and a title end period until it disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in FIGS. The left decorative pattern (small) among the decorative patterns (small) is made to appear in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the entire title character ``Biribiri Hockey Showdown'' is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters ``Biribiri Hockey Showdown'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``Biribiri Hockey Showdown'' is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach B production During the start period, even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" will be displayed in the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode ( Small) appears in a form that overlaps with the decoration pattern (small) on the left side, and in the state where the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is stationary at a fixed position, part of the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is in the reach mode. It is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small).

The effect control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" to be displayed at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. In the title display period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in FIGS. ' are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen, and the subtitles corresponding to the scene "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the voice reading out the title is not output. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" displayed at the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move until everything disappears. As shown in FIG. 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, the expectation level suggestion display, which will be described later, is not displayed.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B production is the background of the title display part (with the hockey table in between the character “Mume” and the character “ Boingo" facing left and right), and the scene in the video that started from the title display part (the scene where the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on the left and right) continues throughout the introductory part. Then, the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" is also continuously displayed, and the voice of the line output from the speakers 8L and 8R is also continuously output. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b7) to (b8), the introductory part is displayed at the timing when the voice output of the line "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" displayed in the title display part is finished. The scene switches to the next video scene (a scene in which the ally character "Mu Yume" hits the puck back).

The effect control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into one of the low base strong super reach A to C and the low base strongest super reach after the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command. At the end of the part, after executing the drop performance of dropping the movable body 32, it is developed into one of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance. . On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that results in a loss of reach after low base weak super reach B, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Mume" will be in a match with the enemy character "Boingo". A performance result to the effect that it is not a big hit is notified as a performance result of the low-base weak reach B performance, and then the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result specifying command is displayed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加A combination of decorative patterns (large) is displayed.

In addition, after the execution of the low-base weak reach B effect, in a configuration including a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low-base weak reach B effect by the variation pattern designation command. After the execution, if a variation pattern that results in a big hit is specified without developing into another super reach effect, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Mume" wins the game with the enemy character "Boingo", and the low A performance result to the effect that the base weak reach B performance is a big win (to the effect that it is controlled to a big win game state) is reported, and then the big win of the type specified by the variable display result specifying command is sent to the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About low base strong reach A effect]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach A effect, and FIG. 11-37 shows the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach A production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later Execute and develop into a low base strong reach A production.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect is started. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect after executing the selection effect described later as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1′) do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden at the start of the selection effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A production is the prologue display period before the title characters of the low-base strong reach A production “Two people catch the explosion!” , a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" Catch!" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title ending period until the title text "Two people catch Bakuchu!" disappears and switches to the introduction part. ,including.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A production that transitioned from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern radially spreading from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory With the display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F maintaining the reserved display and active display, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background exclusively for the fall effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low-base strong reach A effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

As shown in Fig. 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period after transition from the fall effect, the display area is exclusively for the fall effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume". After the prologue display period ends, the background of (the background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) will switch to the background of the low base strong reach A effect (the background in which the allied characters “Mume” and “Jam” are displayed in the corridor). , the pending display and the active display, which were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Mumu", are hidden after the prologue display period ends. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a low base strong reach A effect (background in which friendly characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are displayed in the corridor). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display that were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as they are.

In the title start period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIGS. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the left decorative pattern (small) is made to appear in a manner that overlaps, and then the entire title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" and let it rest at a fixed position. When the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in an overlapping manner.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach A production During the start period, even if the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", part of the title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), the left decorative pattern (small) appears in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small). Catch Bakuchu with people!” is displayed in a form overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach form.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" In the title display period of the low base strong reach A production, first, as shown in FIG. The state of being displayed at the fixed position is maintained for a predetermined time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-37. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), below the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" Display the expectation indication. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIGS. to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the caption of the dialogue is not displayed like the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speaker 8L, The voice of the dialogue is not output from 8R.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strong reach A production is the background after the title start period in the title display part (the friendly character "Mume" in the corridor) and the background where "Jam" is displayed), and the scene of the video that started from the title display part (the scene where the allied characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are displayed in the corridor) continues throughout the introduction part. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-36(c8) and 11-37, after the start of the introductory part, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears A caption "Catch it if you can!" is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed in the caption is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A production, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R The sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to output the voice of the dialogue according to.

The effect control CPU 120, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after a low base strong super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the ally characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are the enemy characters at the end of the introductory part. Catch the ``bakuchu'', notify the effect result of the effect of the low base strong reach A effect to the effect that it is a big hit (to the effect that it is controlled to the big win game state), and then designate the variable display result to the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot designated by the command is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the low base strong super reach A, the reach is lost, at the end of the introduction part, the friendly characters “Mume” and “Jam” will be the enemy character “Bakuchu”. ' is not caught, and as the result of the low-base strong reach A performance, a performance result indicating that it is not a big hit is reported, and then the image display device 5 is notified of the reach specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach A production]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" A hint is displayed. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating active display may be displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, since the expectation indication displayed in the title display part also suggests the expectation by a plurality of objects, the pending indication, the active indication, and the expectation indication indication are displayed at the same time in the title display part. In this case, there is a possibility that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as objects of the expectation level suggesting display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production where the expectation indication is displayed, the suspension indication and active indication are configured by not displaying the suspension indication and active indication at the same time as the expectation indication indication. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

In addition, in the normal state, the game ball almost never enters the second start winning opening, so when the number of reservations of the first special figure is the maximum (4) and during variable display, the reservation display and active display A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as , and it will match the number of objects indicating that the expectation is the maximum in the expectation indication display, but the title display part of the low base strong reach A production However, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestive display, even if the low base strong reach A effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, It is possible to prevent confusion between the object displayed as the pending display and the active display and the object of the expectation level suggesting display, and misunderstanding that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level suggesting display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and the active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation indication display of the title display part is displayed, but the prologue display period starts. Sometimes, it is also possible to configure that the pending display and the active display are not displayed, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the object constituting the pending display and the active display from being mistakenly recognized as the object of the expectation level suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. , After displaying the friendly character "Muyume" on the layer in front of the reserved display and the active display, the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged. Since the suspended display and active display displayed before the display area is completely filled with the display are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the suspended display and active display can be hidden without discomfort. In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the character is displayed on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, and is displayed before the entire display area is filled by expanding the display until the entire display area is filled. It is a configuration in which the pending display and active display are hidden, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white except for the reach mode decorative pattern (small) etc. Monochromatic To hide the reserved display and the active display without giving a sense of incongruity even in such a configuration, by executing the display presentation to erase the reserved display and the active display displayed before the single-color display presentation. can be done.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIG. is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 36 (c6), by changing the color of the three star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach A effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach A effect is obtained. The expectation of the jackpot in is suggested.

When developing from a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect to a low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. Until the display area is completely filled by the enlarged display of "Dream Dream", if the number of reservations remains, the pending display and the active display are displayed, and in the subsequent title display part, the expectation indication display is hidden. As shown in FIGS. !” At the same time, five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are displayed. After that, when the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, the objects constituting the pending display and the active display become non-existent. Objects forming the expectation level suggestive display are displayed immediately after they are displayed, and there is a risk of confusion between the pending display and the active display and the expectation level suggestive display. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-36, after the expectation level suggestion display is hidden in the prologue display period, the expectation level suggestion display is hidden in the title display period, and the title characters "Two people Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed at a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and after that, an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" Also, it is possible to prevent confusion between the active display and the expectation suggestive display.

[About low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach B effect, and FIG. 11-40 shows the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach B production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later Execute and develop into a low base strong reach B effect.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is started. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a selection effect described later, as shown in FIG. do. Although the details of the selection effect will be described later, in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect includes the prologue display period before the title characters “Gekishin Robo Battle” of the low-base strong reach B effect is displayed, and the display of the image display device 5. The title start period from when a part of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at the fixed position, and the fixed position Including the title end period until the display of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" that was displayed in the 1 disappears and it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

In the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach B production that has shifted from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory With the display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F maintaining the reserved display and active display, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background exclusively for the fall effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period after transition from the fall effect, the display area is exclusively for the fall effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume". After the prologue display period ends, the background of the (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) is a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B production (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" The background displayed on the left and right), and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Mumu" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. . The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a title display-dedicated background of low-base strong reach B effect (background in which friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are displayed at left and right positions). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display that were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as they are.

In the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d3) to (d4), a part of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed from the left side of the display area, and the left and right decorations of the reach mode The decoration pattern (small) on the left side of the patterns (small) is superimposed, and then the entire title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. In a state where the title characters ``Gigantic Robo Battle'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``Gigantic Robo Battle'' is displayed so as to overlap both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach B production During the start period, even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed in the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. ), and when the title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' is stationary in a fixed position, part of the title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' appears on the left and right decorations in reach mode. It is displayed in a manner overlapping with both of the patterns (small).

The effect control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" to be displayed at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. In the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect, first, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d4), the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a manner in which the expectation indication display is hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-40. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5) to (d6), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" displayed at the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the caption of the dialogue is not displayed like the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speaker 8L, The voice of the dialogue is not output from 8R.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect is the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana ” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed in the left and right positions), at the start of the introduction part, the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (Background where ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" confront each other in the town). In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the enemy character "Robo" faces the front at the back side as seen from the player, and the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" are at the front side as seen from the player. starts with a video scene in which the two face each other with their backs turned. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo" located on the far side from the player's point of view and the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" located on the near side from the player's point of view are titled during the title display period of the title display part. The character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at the position where it overlaps with the fixed position where it was displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, the dialogue "Lose" corresponds to the scene in which friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" confront enemy character "Robo". I'm not here!" is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed by the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B effect, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the subtitles are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to output the voice of the dialogue according to.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after a low-base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" are the enemy characters "Jam" at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle with "Robo", the effect result of the low base strong reach B effect is reported to the effect that it is a big hit (to the effect that it is controlled to the big win game state), and then the image display device 5 displays it in a variable manner. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the kind of jackpot specified by the result specifying command is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that results in a loss of reach after a low base strong super reach B, at the end of the introduction part, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" become the enemy character "Robo". is defeated in the battle, and the performance result of the low base strong reach B performance is reported to the effect that it is not a big hit, and then the image display device 5 is shown the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result specification command. A combination of decoration patterns (large) is displayed.

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach B effect]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the image display device 5 displays the title characters ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' and the expectation suggestive display in a size smaller than the title characters ``Gekishin Robo Battle''. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach B effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the degree suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that the objects constituting the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as the expected degree suggestive display object. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production where the expectation indication is displayed, the suspension indication and active indication are configured by not displaying the suspension indication and active indication at the same time as the expectation indication indication. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, so if a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as pending display and active display, Even when the base strong reach B effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation level suggestive display, and the expectation level is misidentified as being the maximum in the expectation level suggestive display. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, from the time the prologue display period starts in the low base strong reach B effect, it may be configured to hide the pending display and the active display. It is possible to prevent the object from being misidentified as the object of the suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in FIGS. , After displaying the friendly character "Muyume" on the layer in front of the reserved display and the active display, the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged. Since the suspended display and active display displayed before the display area is completely filled with the display are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the suspended display and active display can be hidden without discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, by executing the monochromatic display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) etc. of the reach mode, before the monochromatic display effect A configuration may be employed in which the displayed pending display and active display are erased, and in such a configuration as well, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in FIG. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5) to (d6), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 39 (d6), by changing the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low base strong reach B effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach The degree of expectation for a big hit in the B performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggesting display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach C effect]
Since the low base strong reach C effect has many points in common with the low base strong reach B effect described above, a drawing of the low base strong reach C effect is omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach C production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later and develop into a low base strong reach C effect.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 is performed at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect is started. In the drop effect, while maintaining the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the low base is maintained. After switching from the background at the end of the weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the initial position. up to

Further, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect after executing the selection effect described later. Although the details of the selection effect will be described later, in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C production is the prologue display period before the title characters "great earthquake robo battle" of the low base strong reach C production are displayed, and the title characters "great earthquake" in the display area of the image display device 5 The title start period from when a part of "Robo Battle" is displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title text "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title that was displayed at the fixed position Including the title end period until the display of the characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" disappears and it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C production that transitioned from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern radially spreading from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory With the display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F maintaining the reserved display and active display, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background exclusively for the fall effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low-base strong reach C effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

During the prologue display period after transitioning from the fall effect, the background exclusively for the fall effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" will be displayed in the prologue display. After the period ends, the background will switch to a low base strong reach B effect (background in which the ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and the ally character "Mume" The suspended display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of , are hidden after the prologue display period ends. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, in the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a title display-dedicated background with a low base strong reach C effect (a background in which the friendly characters "Muyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed at left and right positions). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display which were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as non-display.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C production, a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" overlaps with the left side decoration pattern (small) of the reach mode left and right decoration patterns (small) from the left side of the display area. After that, the entire title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at a fixed position. In the state where the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'' is displayed in a mode overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) is displayed, but during the title start period, the reach mode Even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) are numbers "1" to "9", part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is the left side of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in reach mode. Appears in a form that overlaps with the design (small), and when the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is a reach form Left and right decoration design (small) is displayed in an overlapping manner with both of the

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to the display during the title display period. In the title display period of the low base strong reach C production, first, the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a mode in which the expectation level suggestion display is hidden, and is maintained for a predetermined period of time. , the speakers 8L and 8R output the voice for reading the title. Next, below the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'', an expectation suggestive display is displayed in a size smaller than the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle''. The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low-base strong reach C presentation, the title characters ``Big Earthquake Robo Battle'' displayed at a fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C effect, subtitles of words are not displayed unlike the low-base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the voice of the words is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect. The background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right. background), at the start of the introduction part, from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production (ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and enemy characters Switch to the background where the "large robots" confront each other in the town). In the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect, the enemy character "Dai Robo" faces the front on the back side from the player's point of view, and the friendly characters "Mume" and "Nana" on the front side from the player's back. Start from a video scene where the two face each other. At this time, both the enemy character "Dai Robo" located on the far side from the player's point of view and the ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" located on the near side from the player's point of view are displayed during the title display period of the title display part. , the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed in a position that overlaps with the fixed position where it was displayed. In addition, after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the line "I will never lose!" From 8R, the voice of the lines displayed with subtitles is output.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C effect, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R The sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to output the voice of the dialogue according to.

The effect control CPU 120 designates a variation pattern for a big hit after a low base strong super reach C by a variation pattern specification command, and the allied characters "Mume" and "Nana" are the enemy characters at the end of the introductory part. After winning the battle with the ``big robot'', the effect result of the effect of the low base strong reach C effect to the effect that it is a big win (to the effect that it will be controlled to the big win game state) is notified, and then, to the image display device 5, A combination of decoration patterns (large) indicating the kind of jackpot designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command after the low base strong super reach C, the reach is lost, at the end of the introduction part, the ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" become the enemy character "Large Robo ”, the effect result of the low base strong reach C effect is reported as the effect result that it is not a big hit, and then the image display device 5 is notified of the reach specified by the variable display result specifying command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach C effect]
In the title display part of the low-base strong reach C production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'' and an expectation suggestive display in a size smaller than the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle''. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part includes five star-shaped objects and the characters "expectation The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the degree suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that the objects constituting the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as the expected degree suggestive display object. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the suspension display and active display are configured by not displaying the suspension display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, so in the situation where a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as pending display and active display Even when the base strong reach C effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation suggestive display, and the expectation is mistakenly recognized as the highest in the expectation suggestive display. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, from the time the prologue display period starts in the low base strong reach C effect, it may be configured to hide the pending display and the active display. It is possible to prevent the object from being misidentified as an object of the suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, during the prologue display period, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center), the ally character “Yume After displaying "Yume", the friendly character "Muyume" is displayed in an enlarged manner until the entire display area is filled, and the reserved display and Since the active display disappears after the prologue display period ends, it is possible to hide the pending display and the active display comfortably. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach C effect, by executing the monochromatic display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, before the monochromatic display effect A configuration may be employed in which the displayed pending display and active display are erased, and in such a configuration as well, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a mode in which the expectation indication is hidden for a predetermined period of time, and then the title character is displayed. An expectation indication is displayed below "Great Earthquake Robo Battle". At this time, in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black, and then, among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach C effect is displayed. By changing the color of the corresponding four star-shaped objects from black to gold, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the low base strong reach C performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggestive display from being confused.

[About low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strongest reach effect is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach effect. is.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the variation If the pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed, Develop into a low base strongest reach production. Also, when the variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach production, the selection production described later Execute and develop into a low-base strongest reach production.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, start the title display part of the low base strongest reach production. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect after executing the selection effect described later as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1') . Although the details of the selection effect will be described later, in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect is part of the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The title start period from when it is displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" Including the title end period until the display of "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" disappears and it switches to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period.

In the title start period of the low base strongest reach production, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e3), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode is maintained, and the title text "6 people catch the explosion" !” is displayed in an enlarged size in which only part of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". In addition, the part displayed in the display area of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After that, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!" The reduced-sized title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" are fixed at a fixed position. When the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" It is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small).

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the lowest base strongest reach production will start. During the period, even if the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9", the title characters that appear in enlarged size "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" It is displayed in a mode overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period after the transition from the drop effect, the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The background for the fall effect that was displayed before it was displayed in the exhausted mode (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) is part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" While the display area is completely filled, the background for title display with the strongest reach at low base (background where 6 friendly characters and enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right) , and when the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" Also, during the title start period after transitioning from the drop effect, it was displayed before the display area was completely filled with a part of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The suspended display and the active display are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period.

Also, during the title start period after transitioning from the selection effect, it was displayed before the display area was completely filled with a part of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The selection result image of the selection effect (here, the title image of the low base strongest reach effect) is displayed in a manner in which the entire display area is filled with a part of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" While it is being done, it switches to the background dedicated to the title display of the low base strongest reach production (background where 6 friendly characters and the enemy character “Bakuchu” are displayed on the left and right), and the title character “Bakuchu with 6 people” is displayed. Catch!" is displayed at a fixed position in a reduced size, the background dedicated to the title display with the strongest reach at the lowest base is displayed as the background. The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as they are.

In the title start period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" In the title display period of the low base strongest reach production, first, as shown in FIG. The state where it is displayed at the position is maintained for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, the speakers 8L and 8R are caused to output a voice reading the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), below the title characters "6 people catch Bakuchu!" Display the expectation indication. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strongest reach effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" , is expanded until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". At this time, the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" In a manner different from the case where "Catch Bakuchu!" Expand until the display area is completely filled. That is, during the title start period, the trajectory passed by each part of the title characters in the process of shrinking the title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!" expands during the title end period. It is different from the trajectory that each part of the title character passes through in the process. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). reference). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the caption of the dialogue is not displayed like the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The voice of the dialogue is not output from.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach production (the background in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character “Bakuchu” in the city) is the title Unlike the background dedicated to the title display in the display part (the background in which 6 friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After the title end period is over, the background dedicated to the title display is completely filled by part of the, and then it switches to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production. The introductory part of the low base strongest reach production starts with a video scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu". Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the start of the introduction part, the line corresponding to the scene where six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" is "Catch it if you can!" !” is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach effect, while the title is read out from the speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the display part is also not output. The voice of the corresponding line is output.

The effect control CPU 120 designates a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after the strongest super reach at a low base by a variation pattern specification command. A performance result of a big win (to be controlled to a big win game state) is reported as a performance result of the low-base strongest reach performance, and then the big win of the type specified by the variable display result specifying command is sent to the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating . On the other hand, when a variation pattern was specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the strongest super reach at a low base, the reach was lost. Then, a performance result indicating that it is not a big hit is notified as a performance result of the low-base strongest reach performance, and thereafter, a decoration pattern (large) indicating the type of reach loss designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display combinations.

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the strongest reach performance at the low base]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the image display device 5 shows the title characters "6 people catch Bakuchu!" display is displayed. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the reservation display, the active display, and the degree of expectation If the suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the object that constitutes the pending display and the active display will be misidentified as the object of the expectation level suggestive display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the hold display and active display are configured by not displaying the hold display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

Also, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, the low base is displayed in a situation where a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display Even when the strongest reach effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level is mistakenly recognized as being the maximum in the expectation level suggestion display. can be prevented.

In addition, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in FIGS. Only some characters are displayed in an enlarged size that is visible in the display area, and then all characters are displayed in a reduced size that is visible in the display area. Sometimes, the pending display and the active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and the active display can be hidden without a sense of discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, by executing the single color display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decoration pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is displayed before the single color display effect. A configuration may be employed in which the suspended display and the active display that have been displayed may be erased, and even in such a configuration, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, as shown in FIG. The displayed state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 41 (e6), by changing the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach production out of the five star-shaped objects from black to gold, the low-base strongest reach production is achieved. The expectation of the jackpot in is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggestive display from being confused.

[Regarding the modification of the title display part]
FIG. 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in the modification of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, the low-base strong reach C effect, and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title display part of the corresponding super reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1), the display area A blackout effect is executed to display the entire image in black. If the pending display and the active display were displayed before the execution of the blackout effect, the pending display and the active display disappear with the start of the blackout effect.

After continuing the blackout effect for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation suggesting display (Fig. 11- At 43 (f2), an expectation suggestive display of the strongest reach performance at the low base) is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for a predetermined time, and as shown in FIGS. The title character of the effect (in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title character of the strongest reach effect at the low base) is displayed at a fixed position in a size larger than the expectation level indication display.

When all title characters of the corresponding super ready-to-win effect are displayed at fixed positions, a part of the title characters is displayed in a form overlapping both left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode. As the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode ( In any case where the small) is a number from "1" to "9", the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect when displayed in a fixed position are part of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode (small) is displayed in an overlapping manner with both of the

Also, the title characters are displayed in one of the white mode (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) and the red mode (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are to be displayed in the white mode or the red mode is determined by the previously described notice effect determination process during variable display at step 131 SGS609. In the notice effect determination processing during variable display, when a variation pattern including execution of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect is specified, a big hit is achieved. Whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red is determined with a probability according to whether or not the title characters are present, and a big hit is achieved when the title characters are displayed in red. Whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or in a red mode is determined with the probability that the rate is higher than the rate of a big hit when the title characters are displayed in the white mode. Therefore, in the title display part of the corresponding super ready-to-win performance, when the title characters are displayed in a red mode, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the title characters are displayed in a white mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation level suggestion display and the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect, and then, as shown in FIGS. The background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed while the display of the title characters of the reach performance is maintained, and the voice for reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, subtitles of words are not displayed unlike the low-base weak reach A effect and the low-base weak reach B effect, and the voice of the words is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the title characters are displayed after the blackout effect is started (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title end period. Incidentally, the control of the title end period is the same as that of each super ready-to-win effect described above, so the explanation here is omitted.

In this way, in the modified example of the title display part, the title character of the corresponding super reach effect is larger in size than the expected level indication display, and the expected Since the degree of expectation is suggested, the attention of the player is attracted. However, by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display before the title characters, the expectation degree suggestion can be first noticed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2), regardless of whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red, if the type of super ready-to-win effect is the same, a common mode is used. An expectation indication is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether the mode of the title characters after the expectation level suggestive display is displayed is the white mode or the red mode.

[About high base reach A to D production]
FIG. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the high base reach A to D effects, and FIG. 11-44 shows the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. is a timing chart showing In addition, high base reach A to D productions are common except for the types of enemy characters that appear, title names, and expectations suggested by the expectation level indication display, so the high base reach A production will be explained here. However, the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects is omitted.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command 11-44 (g2), the type of decorative pattern (large) designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. A normal ready-to-win performance is executed in which the game stops at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and is in a ready-to-win mode. After that, the title display part of the high base reach A effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A effect is fixed after part of the title characters "Battle reach A" of the high base reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until the title character "Battlereach A" is displayed at the position, the title display period when the title character "Battlereach A" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title character "Battlereach A" that was displayed at the fixed position disappears. and a title end period until switching to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period.

In the title start period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), while maintaining the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the title character "Battle reach A" is changed to that The characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which only some characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battlereach A". In addition, the portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears in a mode that overlaps both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Fig. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced to a reduced size in which all the characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area. The title character "Battle Reach A" is fixed at a fixed position. When the title character "Battle Reach A" is reduced in size and is stationary at a fixed position, a portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the Reach mode. be.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the high base reach A production will start. During the period, the title character "Battle Reach A" that appears in an enlarged size will be the left and right decorations of the reach mode, regardless of whether the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9". The title character "Battle Reach A", which appears in a form that overlaps both the patterns (small) and is displayed in a reduced size when stationary in a fixed position, is part of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach form. is displayed in an overlapping manner with both of the

As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the time saving that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" The changing background (night sky background) of the decorative pattern (large) in the state A or the variable state is displayed in a manner in which the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A". While there, it switches to a title display background with a high base reach A effect (a background in which the ally character “Mume” and the enemy character “Maskman” are displayed on the left and right), and the title character “Battle reach A” shrinks. In the state of being stationary at a fixed position at the size, a background dedicated to title display with high base reach A effect is displayed as the background. In addition, the suspended display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title character "Battlereach A" will be replaced with the enlarged title character "Battlereach A". A” is hidden while it is being displayed in a manner in which the entire display area is filled up. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to display during the title display period. In the title display period of the high base reach A effect, first, as shown in FIG. This state is maintained for a predetermined time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-45. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-44(g4) to (g5), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Fig. 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title character "Battle reach A" displayed in a fixed position in a reduced size is replaced with the title character "Battle reach A". Expand until the entire display area is filled with a part of Reach A'. At this time, when the title characters "Battlereach A" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period, instead of being enlarged and displayed in the opposite manner as when the title characters "Battlereach A" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period. In a mode different from the reverse mode, the title characters "Battle reach A" are expanded until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Battle reach A". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process of shrinking the title character "Battle reach A" during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process that the title character "Battle reach A" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Battlereach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A production, subtitles of dialogue are not displayed unlike the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The voice of the dialogue is not output from.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the high base reach A effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high-base reach A production (the background in which the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting) , unlike the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background where the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right), the title character "Battle Reach A" during the title end period. After the title end period ends after the title display-dedicated background is partially filled up, the background is switched to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A effect. The introductory part of the high-base-reach-A production starts with a moving image scene in which the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the start of the introductory part, the line "Fight !” is displayed, and the voice of the lines displayed by the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high base reach A production, the title is read out from the speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, while subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the title is read from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the display part is also not output. The voice of the corresponding line is output.

The effect control CPU 120, when a variation pattern for a big hit after a high-base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, causes the ally character "Mume" to fight against the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introductory part. After winning the battle, the performance result of the high base reach A performance to the effect that it is a big hit (to the effect that it is controlled to the big win game state) is reported, and then specified by the variable display result specification command to the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the types of jackpots selected is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command after the high base super reach A, the reach is lost, the friendly character “Mume” is defeated by the enemy character “Maskman” at the end of the introduction part, and the high base super reach A A performance result to the effect that it is not a big hit is reported as the performance result of the base reach A performance, and then a combination of decoration patterns (large) indicating the type of reach loss designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加display.

[Regarding the indication of expectations for high base reach A to D productions]
Since the expectation level suggestion display of high base reach A to D production is common except that the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display is different, here we will explain the expectation level suggestion display of high base reach A production, The explanation of the expectation indication display of base reach B-D effects is omitted.

In the title display part of the high base reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle reach A" and the expectation indication display in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle reach A". The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the time-saving state A or the probability variable state where the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of pending and an object indicating active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the pending display and active display in the title display part , and the expectation level suggesting display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the object that constitutes the pending display and the active display will be misidentified as the object of the expectation level suggesting display. Therefore, in the title display part of the high base reach A production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the suspension display and the active display are configured by not displaying the expectation level suggestion display and the suspension display and active display at the same time. This prevents the object from being misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

In addition, in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the game ball hardly enters the first start winning opening, so if the number of reservations of the second special figure is the maximum (4) and is being displayed variable, the reservation A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as display and active display, and it will match the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level indication display, but the high base reach A production In the title display part, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, when a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the high base reach A effect is executed. However, it is possible to prevent the object displayed as the pending display and the active display from being confused with the object of the expectation level suggestion display, and misunderstanding that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level suggestion display.

Further, when the high base reach A effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle reach A" are displayed only in part during the title start period. Displayed in an enlarged size that is not visible in the area, then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area, and when the background dedicated to title display with high base reach A effect is displayed, the title start period Since the suspended display and the active display that were displayed before are hidden, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without a sense of discomfort. In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, by executing the single color display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) etc. of the reach mode, it is displayed before the single color display effect. A configuration may be employed in which the suspended display and the active display that have been displayed may be deleted, and even in such a configuration, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle reach A" are displayed in place in a manner in which the expectation level indication display is hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. 44 (g5), 3 of the 5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A effect (3.5 for the high base reach B effect, 4 for the high base reach C effect, and 4 for the high base reach C effect) By changing the color of the star-shaped object (4.5 in the reach D production) from black to gold, the expectation of a big hit in the high base reach A production is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggestive display from being confused.

[Regarding the display position of the title character]
11-46 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) and 11-46(B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. The visual recognition area in the display area 5L is an area that can be visually recognized from the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, an area that is not covered by members constituting the game board 2. FIG.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" At this time, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" The position overlaps with the intersection of the diagonal lines of 5L, and as shown in FIG. It overlaps with the intersection of the diagonals of a certain visible rectangular area 5S.

Similarly, the title characters for low base weak reach B production "Biribiri Hockey Showdown", the title characters for low base strong reach A production "Two people catch the explosion!", The title characters for low base strong reach B production "Shock" Robo Battle", low-base strong reach C production title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", low-base strongest reach production title character "6 people catch the explosion!", high base reach A production title character "Battle Reach A" , the title character "Battle reach B" for high base reach B production, the title character "Battle reach C" for high base reach C production, and the title character "Battle reach D" for high base reach D production, As shown in FIG. 11-46(A), the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is the position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. As shown in 11-46(B), the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5, and the It is in an overlapping position.

The design of game machines is often changed in the development stage, and the area where the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is covered by the members constituting the game board 2 changes due to the change in the design of the game board 2. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In addition, there are cases where a game machine installed in a game store is taken over, repaired, and resold. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed by changing the area covered with the display area 5L. In such a case, if the placement of the title characters in the super ready-to-win effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, the display position of the title characters may deviate greatly from the center of the visible area. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in any title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the fixed positions where the title characters are displayed during the title display period are the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. It is a position that overlaps with the intersection point and also overlaps with the intersection point of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. Therefore, the title character displayed at a fixed position during the title display period is displayed at a position overlapping both the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible rectangular area 5S. Even if the design of the game board 2 is changed when the machine is reused, it is possible to prevent the display position of the title characters from deviating greatly from the center of the visual recognition area.

[About the duration of Super Reach production]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the effect time of each super ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the effect times of each super ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) is T1-1, and the presentation of the title display part The time is Tt1, the effect time of the title start period is Tt1a, the effect time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the effect time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall effect time of the low base weak reach B effect is T1-2, the effect time of the title display part is Tt1, the effect time of the title start period is Tt1a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt1b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt1c.

Although the overall presentation time differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the effect time of the title display part, the effect time of the title start period, the effect time of the title display period, and the title end The presentation time of each period is the same time.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the overall effect time of the low base strong reach A effect is T2-1, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, and the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, The effect time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the effect time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall effect time of the low base strong reach B effect is T2-2, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt2b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall effect time of the low base strong reach C effect is T2-3, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt2b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

In addition, although the total performance time is different for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect, the effect time of the title display part, the effect time of the title start period, the title The rendering time of the display period and the rendering time of the title end period are the same.

The overall effect time of the low base strongest reach effect is T3, the effect time of the title display part is Tt3, the effect time of the title start period is Tt3a, the effect time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the title The rendering time of the end period is Tt3c.

The overall performance time of the high base reach performances A to D is T4, the performance time of the title display part is Tt4, and the performance time of the title start period is Tt4a. The presentation time is Tt4b, and the presentation time during the title end period is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall performance time of the low-base middle (normal state) super reach performance in this form, as shown in FIG. The total performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low-base strong reach A performance, the low-base strong reach B performance, and the low-base strong reach C performance with high expectations for big hits is the low-base weak reach A Longer than the overall performance time (T1-1, T1-2) of the production, low base weak reach B production, and expects a bigger hit than low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach production B, low base weak reach C production The total production time (T3) of the high-level low-base strongest reach production is the total production time (T2-1, T2- 2, T2-3) is set longer.

In addition, among the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, the total production time (T1 -2) is set longer than the entire presentation time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A presentation. In addition, low base strength reach A production, low base strength reach B production, and low base strength reach C production, low base strength reach A production and low base strength reach C production, which have higher expectations for big hits than low base strength reach A production and low base strength reach production B. The total production time (T2-3) is longer than the total production time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A production and the low base strong reach B production (T2-1, T2-2), and the low base strong reach A production, Of the low-base strong reach B effects, the total effect time (T2-2) of the low-base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low-base strong reach A effect, is the total effect time of the low-base strong reach A effect. It is set longer than (T2-1).

Comparing the production time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this form, as shown in FIG. production, low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A-D production), the production time during the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is the same as the production during the title start period. Longer than the time (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the production time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the production time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is longer than the title end period is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the production time of the title display part in the super reach production in this form, as shown in FIG. The production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the strong base reach A production, the low base strong reach B production, and the low base strong reach C production is the production of the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production. The performance time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach performance B, and the low base strong reach performance with a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base weak reach C performance, which is longer than the time (Tt1). is set longer than the effect time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. In addition, the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production is the production of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B production, the low base strong reach A to C production, and the low base strongest reach production. It is set shorter than the time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3).

In this form, when comparing the title start period and title display period in the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D productions, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), the title in the low base strongest reach production The production time (Tt3a) of the start period is set longer than the production time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D productions, and as shown in FIG. The effect time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the reach effect is set longer than the effect time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach AD effects.

In this form, when comparing the performance time of the title start period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (F), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach, which have higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach B production The production time (Tt2a) of the title start period of C production is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production, and is longer than low base strong reach A production and low base. Strong reach B, low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, when comparing the title display period in the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (G), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach B production with higher expectations for big hit than low base weak reach B production The effect time (Tt2b) of the title display period of C effect is longer than the effect time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and is longer than the low base strong reach A effect and low base. Strong reach B, Low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, when comparing the performance time during the title end period in the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (H), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach B production with higher expectation for big hit than low base weak reach B production The effect time (Tt2c) in the title end period of the C effect is longer than the effect time (Tt1c) in the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and is longer than the low base strong reach A effect and the low base. Strong reach B, low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, the character display period of the title display part (title display A period that does not include the prologue period described later in a part, and is a period that includes the title start period, title display period, and title end period). The performance time (Tt2d) of the character display period of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, which have higher expectations for big hits than the weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, is Longer than the effect time (Tt1d) of the character display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the hit is greater than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach effect B, and the low base weak reach C effect. The effect time (Tt3d) of the character display period of the low base strongest reach effect with high expectation is the character display period (Tt2d) of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. ) is set longer than

In this form, the title start period and the title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) When comparing, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (J) (K), any super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production in low base (normal state) , Strongest reach effect at low base), the effect time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a /Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the effect time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c) of the title end period.

In this form, super reach performance during low base (normal state) (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) and high base (time saving state A and variable state) Comparing the overall production time of the medium super reach production (high base reach A to D production), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the super reach production in the high base (time saving state A and variable state) The total production time (T4) of (high base reach A to D production) is the super reach production during low base (normal state) (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low It is set shorter than the entire performance time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the base strongest reach performance).

[Regarding the title character of the Super Reach effect]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part and the decorative design in the super ready-to-win effect.

As shown in Fig. 11-49 (A), the title character of the low-base weak reach A production is "Catch Bakuchu!" The standard size of title characters) is FJ, and the size of the display area in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all the title characters) is EJA.

The title character of the low base weak reach B effect is "Biribiri Hockey Showdown", the number of characters in the title is 10, the font size of the title character is FJ, and the display area size in which the title character is displayed is EJB. .

The title characters of the low base strong reach A production are "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" The size is EKA.

The title characters of the low-base strong reach B effect are "Gekishin Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 7, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKB.

The title characters of the low base strong reach C effect are "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 8 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKC. .

The title character of the low base strongest reach effect is "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" is ESK.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before developing into the super reach effect is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after developing into the super reach effect is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this form, as shown in FIG. , the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is a font size larger than the font size FJ of the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. . Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect is the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title character of the reach B effect.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach production B, low base weak reach C production, low base strongest reach production, which has higher expectations for a big hit than low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach A production, The font size is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters composing the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect constitutes the title characters of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, and the low-base strong reach C effect. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title character of the low base weak reach A production, the low base weak reach B production, the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach B production, the low The font size FK of the title character of the strong base reach C effect and the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strongest reach effect are both smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before developing into the super reach effect. The font size is larger than the font size KS of the decoration pattern (small) after developing into the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect, low base weak reach B effect, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach The size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the C production, and the largest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach production, both develop into a super reach production. The size is smaller than the size of the smallest size character among the characters that can be taken by the previous decorative pattern (large), and it is the smallest of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. Small size character size, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach C effect The size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the title characters, low base strongest reach effect The size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the title characters is larger than the size of the largest size character among the characters that can be used in the decoration pattern (small) after developing the Super Reach effect. .

When comparing the display area size of the title character in this form, as shown in FIG. The display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of title characters for production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production are the display area sizes EJA for low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. , EJB, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B, low base weak reach C production with higher expectations for big hits Low base strongest reach production title character display area size ESK is a low base It is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect.

[About indication of expectation level]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the expectation indication displayed in the title display part is five star-shaped objects and is displayed above the star-shaped object. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

11-50(A), the effect control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, and the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. After displaying the characters "Expectation" to indicate that the object is the object, a plurality of star-shaped objects to be changed from black to gold are changed from black to gold step by step in order from the left side. When the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of the star-shaped object from black to gold, the effect control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object, and then changes the color to normal display in gold.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the star-shaped object whose color is to be changed, and also changes the color to white so that it shines from the center toward the periphery, and the outline is displayed. After changing the entire enlarged object to white until disappears, display a star-shaped object whose whole or half has changed to gold. In particular, for the second to third star-shaped objects, a part of the enlarged star-shaped object is a part of the characters "expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation. Enlarge to a size that overlaps with the In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs highlighting in a common manner when changing the entire black star object to gold and when changing half of the star object to gold.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when the effect control CPU 120 changes the plurality of star-shaped objects to gold, the highlighting of the previously started star-shaped object ends. At the timing (t1) before normal display, the next star-shaped object is started to be highlighted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the two adjacent star-shaped objects until the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object whose highlighting has been started first ends. At the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started . That is, two adjacent star-shaped objects are highlighted at the same time, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted at the same time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the expectation suggesting sound at the timing when the star-shaped object is started to be highlighted, and a plurality of star-shaped objects are displayed. When changing the object to gold, the output of the expectation suggestive sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first is terminated before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object is started, and the next star-shaped object is highlighted. It is designed not to be output overlapping with the expectation suggestive sound accompanying the highlighting of the star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
FIG. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect directly without going through the low base strong reach A to C effects or the low base strongest reach effect, any kind of super It is the production|presentation which specifies whether reach production|presentation is performed.

When the selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal reach effect as shown in FIG. A window is displayed in the display area of , and the title of the selection effect is displayed in the window. In the title of the selection effect, a message "Upgrade your reach!" is displayed, suggesting that the selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the title image of the super reach effect in the window, the button image imitating the push button 31B, and the continuous operation of the push button 31B. and an operation prompting image consisting of the operation prompting characters "Consecutive hits!" The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content of the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect. , the expectation indication is also displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has a jackpot expectation level of 0 as the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window and has the lowest level of expectation for development to other super reach effect. is first displayed, and each time the operation of the push button 31B is detected for the number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is performed. Switch to the title image of the next super reach effect until the title image is reached.

As shown in Figure 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window is the lowest low base weak reach A effect with the lowest development expectation for other super reach effects After the title image, expectations for development to other super reach effects are higher than low base weak reach A effects Expectations for big hits are higher than low base weak reach B effects, title images for low base weak reach B effects, and low base weak reach A and B effects Title image of low-base strong reach A production, low-base strong reach B production title image with higher expectations for big hits than low-base strong reach A production, low-base strong reach B productions with higher expectations for big wins than low-base strong reach B production The title image of the C production and the title image of the low base strongest reach production having a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach C production are switched in order.

Then, when the title image of the super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the type specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the number of push buttons corresponding to the title image of the displayed super ready-to-win effect. When the operation of 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h9), the confirmation image in which the operation promotion image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window is displayed. It is notified that the super ready-to-win effect of the title image will be executed, and then the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, the number of operations of the push button 3B to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is three times, and the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is changed to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect is 4 times, and the number of operations of the push button 31B to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect is 8 times. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching from the title image with low base strong reach B effect to the title image with low base strong reach C effect is 10 times, and the title image with low base strong reach C effect is changed to the title image with low base strong reach effect. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching to the image is 15 times, and the higher the attitude of the super reach performance of the title image to be switched to another super reach performance or the higher the expectation of the big win, the more necessary it is to switch to the next title image. Therefore, the push button 31B must be operated many times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-52, when the selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects are not executed, and the expected degree of jackpot is always higher than the low base strong reach A effect. It is confirmed that the super reach effect will be executed, the ratio of executing the low base strong reach A effect is about 32.18%, the ratio of executing the low base strong reach B effect is about 30.16%, and the low base The ratio of executing the strong reach C effect is about 30.30%, and the ratio of executing the low base strongest reach effect is about 7.36%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the title image of the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect in the selected effects to display the expectation suggestive display in the same way as the title display part. In the expectation indication display in the part, five star-shaped objects are displayed in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left. , In the expectation suggestion display displayed in the selection effect, the number of star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level of the corresponding super reach effect out of the five star-shaped objects is displayed in gold from the beginning. .

The minimum time required for switching from the title image of the super ready-to-win effect displayed in the selection effect to the title image of the next super ready-to-win effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the super ready-to-win effect, and pressing the push button 31B once. This is the time obtained by multiplying the time required for the operation. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is about 80 ms, and the push button 31B needs to be operated three times when switching from the title image with the low base weak reach A effect to the title image with the low base weak reach B effect. , and the minimum required time is about 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the expectation indication of the title display part, the time for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, that is, the time for the suggested expectation to change by one level is about 300 ms, and the low base weak reach A It is set longer than the minimum required time for switching from the title image of the effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. For this reason, in the selected effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the low base in a time shorter than the time in which the degree of expectation suggested in the degree of expectation suggestive display of the title display part changes by one step. It becomes possible to switch to the title image of the weak reach B effect.

[About effects that can be executed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. Effects that can be executed during variable display include description display effects, title color change effects, and operation promotion effects AD, as shown in FIG. 11-53.

The explanation display effect is an effect that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and is an effect for displaying an explanation suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high.

The title color change effect is a effect that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and B effect, and is the effect of changing the color of the title characters from the initial white to red or gold.

The operation promotion performance A is a performance that can be executed in the normal reach performance, displays an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B, and develops into the low base weak reach A performance and B performance according to the operation of the push button 31B. It is a production that informs whether or not. In addition, in the operation promoting effect A, depending on the operation of the push button 31B, not only the low base weak reach A effect and B effect, but also the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect can be developed. good.

The operation promotion effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. , and indicates whether or not it will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects according to the operation of the push button 31B. In addition, in the structure in which a big win is reported as a performance result in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance result as to whether or not a big win is reported in response to the operation of the push button 31B in the operation promotion performance B. It may be configured.

The operation promotion effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the strongest reach effect. This is an effect of displaying one of a plurality of types of cut-in images according to the setting.

The operation promotion effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. , is an effect for notifying the effect result of whether or not a big hit is achieved according to the operation of the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a description display effect during variable display, whether or not to execute a title color change effect and which color to change to, and whether or not to execute an operation promotion effect A. , which of the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) is to be displayed in the operation prompting effect B, whether or not the operation prompting effect C is to be executed, and the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) In the advance notice effect determination process of the variable display start setting process, it is determined which of the above is to be displayed and whether the operation prompt image (small) or the operation prompt image (large) is to be displayed in the operation prompt effect D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(A), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined. At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a failure of the performance result is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern is specified in which the effect result is a big hit, non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a big hit is specified, the execution of the explanatory text display effect is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is specified, so low base strong reach A It is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is high by executing the explanation text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the ~C effect.

In this embodiment, the description display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and regardless of whether the description display effect is executed in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects. However, the execution time of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the execution time of the title display part do not change, but as a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are performed, the first variation pattern, A second variation pattern in which the variation time is set longer than the first variation pattern, and when the first variation pattern is specified, the explanation display effect is not executed, and the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the explanation text display effect is executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, it is not determined whether or not the explanation display effect is executed in the notice effect determination process, but the explanation is determined by whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. It is determined whether or not to execute the display effect. At this time, by determining the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern so that the expectation of the big hit is higher when the explanation display effect is executed than when the explanation portion effect is not executed, low base strong reach It is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is high by executing the description display effect in the title display parts of the effects A to C.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(B), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are executed is specified, whether or not the title color change effect is executed , and which color is to be changed when the title color change effect is executed is determined. At this time, if a variation pattern is identified that results in a failure, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 80%, execution (red) is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution (gold) is determined. Not determined. Also, if a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution (red) at a rate of 75% ) is determined, and execution (gold) is determined at a rate of 5%. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C effect and a low-base strongest reach effect is specified, the title color change effect is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified. has been decided, it is highly likely that by changing the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B productions, it will develop into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strong reach production. It is suggested. In addition, since the execution (gold) is decided only when the variation pattern that develops to the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production is specified, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B production By changing the color of the title letters to gold, it is confirmed that it will develop into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strongest reach production.

In addition, after the low-base weak reach A and B effects are executed, in a configuration including a variation pattern that leads to a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, if a variation pattern that leads to a big win is specified, a variation that results in a loss. The execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when the pattern is specified, and the possibility of a big hit is high due to the change in the color of the title characters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B effect. may be suggested. In addition, in such a configuration, execution (gold) is determined only when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit is specified, and the color of the title characters changes to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B production. The jackpot may be determined by doing so.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), in the notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern that deviates from the normal reach effect and a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A and B effects are specified. , whether or not to execute the operation prompting effect A is determined. At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects is identified, execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In this way, the execution is always determined when a variation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A, B effect is specified, and the execution may be determined even when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified. , the possibility of developing into low base weak reach A and B effects is suggested by executing the operation promotion effect A in the normal reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), in the notice effect determination process, the effect result of the low base weak reach A, B effect is a variation pattern, the low base weak reach A, B effect to the low base strong reach When a variation pattern that develops into the A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect is specified, it is determined whether to display the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image is determined at a rate of 90%. The image (large) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that becomes a deviation is specified. And since the operation promotion image (large) is determined among the operation promotion images (large), the operation promotion image (large) was displayed in the operation promotion effect B at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In this case, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of developing into low-base strong reach A to C effects and low-base strongest reach effects than when the operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern is specified in which the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are executed, the operation promotion effect C and whether to display the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) when the operation prompting effect C is to be executed. At this time, if a variation pattern is identified that results in a failure, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined by the ratio. In addition, when a variation pattern that results in a big hit is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 65%. , execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a big hit is specified, the execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is specified, so the low base strong reach A Execution of the operation promotion effect C at the end of the introductory part in the ~C effect suggests that the possibility of a big hit is high. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a big hit is specified, a cut-in image ( Since B) is displayed, the cut-in image (A) is displayed when the operation promotion effect C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the cut-in image (B) is displayed. It is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is higher than if the

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are executed is specified, an operation promotion image ( It is decided whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a failure of the performance result is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when a variation pattern is specified in which the effect result is a big hit, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 90%. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the production result is a big hit is specified, the operation promotion image (small) and the operation promotion image (large) are selected at a higher rate than in the case where the variation pattern that results in a loss is specified. Since the image (large) is determined, when the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion production D at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production, the operation promotion It is suggested that the possibility of winning a big hit is higher than when the image (small) is displayed.

[Description display effects]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. .

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Muyume" as shown in FIGS. 11-55(A) to (I). Afterwards, the ally character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and when performing an explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period, the background of the ally character "Muyume" is enlarged and displayed on the front side. Display the explanatory characters "Surprise!", "Peach Tree", and "Great Lucky!" in order on the layers. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-55(A), the effect control CPU 120 first causes the explanation character "Surprise!" 11-56 (t1)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (B), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at a low speed (FIG. 11-56 (t2)), and then , as shown in FIG. 11-55(C), it is displayed while moving leftward again at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(D), the effect control CPU 120 causes the explanation characters "peach tree" to be displayed while moving leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (see FIG. 11 -56 (t4)), as shown in Fig. 11-55 (E), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at a low speed (Fig. 11-56 (t5)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), it is displayed while being moved to the left at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the explanation character "Big Lucky!" -56 (t7)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (H), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at a low speed (FIG. 11-56 (t8)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55(I), it is displayed while being moved to the left at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a title color change effect in which white title characters are changed to red or gold in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 causes part of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move them toward the fixed position, and move them to the fixed position. to stop. Thereafter, during the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 causes the white title characters to be displayed stationary at a fixed position, as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when the execution of the title color change effect is not determined, the effect control CPU 120 causes the specific sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. As shown in -57 (B) and (C), the white title character is kept stationary at a fixed position, and then the white title character displayed at the fixed position during the title end period is moved from the fixed position. Move it to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when execution of the title color change effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 causes the specific sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. As shown in -57 (D), if the title character displayed at the fixed position is changed to appear to glow, and after the time of t2 has elapsed, it is decided to change to red, As shown in FIG. 11-57(E), the title characters are changed to red, and if change to gold is determined, the title characters are changed to gold as shown in FIG. 11-57(F). After that, the title characters are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear while maintaining the changed color displayed at the fixed position during the title end period. In the case where the title characters are changed from shining to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light of the title characters shines.

As shown in FIGS. 11-58 (A) and (B), the effect time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects is 500 ms, the effect time T2 of the title display period is 2200 ms, and the title ends. The effect time T3 of the period is set to 300 ms, and the time t1 from the start of the title display period until the title characters change to a mode in which the title characters appear to shine is 800 ms. The time t2 until the title characters change to red or gold after they become visible is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 until the title display period ends after the title characters change to red or gold is set to 1200 ms. there is

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-58(C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white during the title display period is reduced. Also, in the title display period, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in the white form in the title display part. Also, the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold color in the title display part is longer.

[Regarding operation prompting effect A]
FIG. 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect A. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect A for prompting the operation of the push button 31B in the normal ready-to-win effect.

The performance control CPU 120 is executing a normal ready-to-win effect in which the decoration pattern (large) is in a ready-to-win mode, as shown in FIGS. , an operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) simulating the push button 31B and an operation facilitating character (small) for urging the operation of the push button 31B, "Push!" is displayed.

The button image (small) is formed with a remaining time meter indicating the remaining time of the effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the remaining amount of the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A, B production, as shown in FIG. 11-59 (C) , a white-out effect for displaying the entire display area in white is executed, and then, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a failure, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) and stops the decoration pattern (large) in a failure mode, as shown in FIG. 11-59(E). Let

[Regarding operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect B. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect B for prompting the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the operation promotion performance B is to be executed and that the operation promotion image (small) is to be displayed, the introduction part is displayed as shown in FIG. At the end of , an operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) simulating the push button 31B and operation facilitating characters (small) urging the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" is displayed.

11-60 (B) and (C) when it is determined that the operation promotion effect B is to be executed and the operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed. , at the end of the introductory part, an image simulating the push button 31B, a button image (large) that is larger in size than the button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Press! ” is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-60(B), the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with a transparent background, unlike the case where the operation prompting image (small) is displayed. After performing the promotion introduction effect in which these plural button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), the button image (large) and the operation promotion character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Push!" to display an operation prompting image (large) consisting of .

A remaining time meter is formed on both the button image (small) and the button image (large). Or, when the remaining time of the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strongest reach production, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (D), the operation The promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) is erased, and a drop effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. Execute production, low base strongest reach production.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-60(G), a failure is notified as a result of the effect.

[Regarding operation prompting effect C]
FIG. 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect C. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect C to prompt the operation of the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect.

11-61 (A) (B), the effect control CPU 120, when the execution of the operation promotion effect C is determined, the button image (small ) and an operation prompting character (small) “Push!” prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 has decided to display the cut-in image (A), and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time of the remaining time meter reaches 0, the operation of the push button 31B is executed as shown in FIG. 11-61 ( As shown in C), after erasing the operation prompting image (small) and displaying the cut-in image (A) in which the friendly character "Nana" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F) , continue the introductory part.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is determined to display the cut-in image (B), and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time of the remaining time meter becomes 0, the As shown in 61(D), after erasing the operation prompting image (small) and displaying the cut-in image (B) in which the friend character "Jam" is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 11-61(F) is displayed. Execute the continuation of the introductory part as follows.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the remaining time meter when it is determined to display the cut-in image (A) and when it is determined to display the cut-in image (B). When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected before the remaining amount reaches 0, the operation prompting image (small) is erased while continuing the presentation of the middle stage of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-61(F), the continuation of the introductory part is executed.

[Regarding operation promotion effect D]
FIG. 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect D. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect D for prompting the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect.

When it is decided to display the operation promotion image (small), the effect control CPU 120 simulates the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (B). An operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (small) "Push!" for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part as shown in FIGS. An operation facilitating image (large), which is a simulated image and consists of a button image (large) larger in size than the button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Push!" is displayed. Let At this time, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with a transparent background, and these plurality of button images (large) are combined into one button. After performing the promotion introduction performance (see FIG. 11-60(B)) that is combined into a large image, it consists of a button image (large) and operation promotion characters (large) "Push!" to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. Display the operation promotion image (large).

The effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B before the remaining time meter becomes 0, or when the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a big hit. 11-62 (C) (H), while the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) gradually disappears, a rainbow effect is executed in which a rainbow pattern swirls over the entire display area. , as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (D) and (I), a big hit is notified as a result of the effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) as shown in FIGS. A darkening effect is executed to darken the entire display area, and then, as shown in FIGS.

[About the operation promotion image]
FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing a display mode of an operation prompting image. The effect control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation prompting image (small) and the operation prompting image (large) while alternately and continuously moving in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 11-63(A). In addition, it is displayed while continuously changing between a mode in which the button is not pressed and a mode in which the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves in the left-right direction differs from the interval at which the button image changes between the state in which the button is not pressed and the state in which the button is pressed. The motion of moving in the left-right direction is not synchronized with the motion of changing to the mode in which the button is not pressed and the mode in which the button is pressed, resulting in complicated motion.

[About the jackpot start effect]
FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in the big win mode, and then issues a big win start designation command for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big win game state. is received, a jackpot start performance is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (B) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image in which the flames flicker as a background during the big win start effect. As shown in 64 (B), first, the first half of the title characters "BIG (REG)" of the big hit title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" is displayed in an enlarged size, and then shown in FIG. 11-64 ( As shown in C), the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which the entirety is visible in the display area, and is displayed above a fixed position near the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64(D), the effect control CPU 120 causes the second half of the title characters "BONUS" out of the title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title to be displayed in an enlarged size. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-64(E), the second half of the title character "BONUS" is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which the entirety is visible in the display area, and is placed at a fixed position near the center of the display area. It is displayed at the bottom (position below the first half of the title character "BIG").

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game state of 6 rounds is started, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title character, and when the jackpot game state of 10 rounds is started, "BIG BONUS" is displayed as title characters.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (E) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 displays the entire title character "BIG BONUS" at a fixed position, and then gradually expands the title character "BIG BONUS". After that, as shown in FIG. 11-64(H), the effect during the big win is started, and the display of the image display device 5 is switched to the background of the big win game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the performance during the big hit, first, as shown in FIG. Display the hitting promotion image (small).

The right-handed promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed" (small) that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction, and effect control is performed. As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I), the CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (small) from the upper right of the display area over a period from the start of the jackpot middle effect to the end of the jackpot game state. position.

The right-handed promotion image (large) is a message prompting an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is an arrow indicating the direction, and is composed of an arrow image (large) larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. A right-handed promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a mode of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area only for the first fixed time of the period until the end of the jackpot game state after the start of the medium presentation.

In addition, when it is controlled to the big win game state, after the title characters are displayed in the big win start production, it is switched to the big win middle production, and the operation method of the big win game state (the operation method of hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). ) and a right-handed promotion image (small) and a right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, on the side of the main substrate 11, at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which the control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R is performed. The production is switched to the performance during the jackpot, and the right-handed promotion image (small) and the right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. Therefore, it is advantageous to perform an operation in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R after a predetermined period of time has passed since the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. Control will be performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, after the title characters are displayed in the big win start effect, terminates the big win start effect, erases the title characters, and switches to the next effect. To erase the title characters of a jackpot start performance in a shorter time than the case of erasing the title characters in the end period, and to switch to the next performance.

In particular, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the effect during the big win in one frame (minimum unit of image update) after the title characters are displayed in the big win start effect, and the right hitting promotion image (small) and the right hitting promotion image. (Large) is displayed. In the title display part of the super ready-to-win production, a title end period is provided instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain amount of time, but after the title characters are displayed in the big win start production, the big win middle production is performed. , and the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. In some period, there is a possibility that the game ball is hit toward the right game area 2R. The game balls are wasted because the control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting toward the region 2R has not started. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, after displaying the title characters in the big win start effect, switches to the effect during the big win in one frame (minimum unit for updating the image), and displays the right hitting promotion image (small) and the right hitting. Since the promotion image (large) is displayed, the generation of useless game balls can be suppressed.

[Regarding the display of the number of remaining rotations up to play time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 times variable display without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability control is performed. It is controlled to the time saving state B (in the present embodiment, the idle time of 1100 times of time saving) performed 1100 times.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is the number of remaining variable display times until the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). (see FIG. 11-1) can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), the production control CPU 120 executes normal reach production, low base weak reach A and B productions, low base strong reach A to C productions, and low base strongest reach production in the normal state. If not, the number of remaining times until play time is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed as "remaining XXX times" (XXX is a numerical value from 0 to 900 according to the remaining number of times). At this time, even if the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900, the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time even during execution of the normal ready-to-win effect in which the decoration pattern (large) is in the ready-to-win mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (C), the effect control CPU 120, when it develops from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A, B effect, can also play during the execution of the low base weak reach A, B effect. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the time is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. , the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is continuously displayed even after the end of the B effect.

In addition, a configuration is adopted in which a big hit can be notified as a result of the performance of the low-base weak reach A, B performance, and when a big win is reported as a performance result of the low-base weak reach A, B performance, the low base weak reach A, B is provided. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is continuously displayed until the performance ends, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A, B performance. It should be noted that the remaining number of times 131SG005Z up to the play time may be erased at the time when the big hit is determined as the effect result of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (F), the effect control CPU 120, when it develops from normal reach effect, low base weak reach A, B effect to low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect Then, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased with the start of the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time at the timing when the selected effect starts when developing from the normal reach effect, and when developing from the low base weak reach A, B effect. , If it is a low base strong reach A to C effect, in the prologue display period of the title display part, the pending display and active display and the remaining number 131SG005Z until play time are erased, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the title is displayed. At the start of the part, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the idle time is erased.

In addition, when developing from the low base weak reach A and B effects, the hold display and active The remaining number of times 131SG005Z up to play time may be erased along with the display. As a result, regardless of whether it develops into a low base strong reach A to C production or a low base strongest reach production, it is possible to share the timing of erasing the remaining display, active display, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time. .

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 is notified of the deviation as the performance result of the low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (G) (H) After the base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are finished, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed again. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when a big hit is notified as the effect result of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, as shown in FIGS. , the remaining count 131SG005Z until the play time is erased until the normal state is reached.

In addition, in the operation promotion effect A, when it is configured to develop into the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect according to the operation of the push button 31B, during the execution of the operation promotion effect A, play time The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed continuously, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased with the start of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In the case of such a configuration, in the operation promotion effect A, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed, while the subsequent low base strong reach A to C effects and the operation promotion effect in the low base strongest reach effect In C and D, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until play time is not displayed.

[Regarding play time start effect]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time reduction state B (play time) when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to a big hit in the low probability state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (C), lights the right-handed lamp 131SG132 and transmits a right-handed LED lighting notification command. As shown in FIGS. 11-66 (A) and (B), when the variable display stops when the number of times remaining until play time is 0, and a right-handed LED lighting notification command is received, FIG. 11-66 (C) 2, a right hitting promotion image (small) is displayed to prompt an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. The timing of lighting the right hitting lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right hitting promotion image (small) are almost the same, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights the right hitting lamp 131SG132 and then hits right. An LED lighting notification command is transmitted, and along with this, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (small), so that the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-handed promotion image (small) is displayed. becomes.

When the time saving state B (play time) is started, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lit until the time saving state B (play time) ends. In addition, the right-handed promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed" (small) that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. Production control CPU120, as shown in FIGS. 11-66 (C) ~ (H), when the time saving state B (play time) starts, the right hitting promotion image until the time saving state B (play time) ends (Small) is displayed in the upper right position of the display area.

The effect control CPU 120 stops the variable display in the state of 0 times remaining until the play time, and when receiving the game state designation command designating the time saving state B (play time), FIG. 11-66 (D) ~ As shown in (G), a play time start effect is executed.

The play time start effect is a title start period from when a part of the title characters "play time rush" of the play time is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to when it is displayed at a fixed position, and the title characters "play time start". It includes a title display period during which ``Enter into play time'' is displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters ``Enter into play time'' displayed at the fixed position disappears and the display is switched to play time presentation.

In the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the play time start effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title character "6" in the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect. Catch Bakuchu with a person!" is displayed in the same mode as the mode when displaying the title characters 'Enter play time'.

Specifically, during the title start period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "play time rush" as shown in FIG. to display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display area to be completely filled with a part of the title characters "Play Time Rush". Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-66(D) and 11-66(E), the effect control CPU 120 gradually shrinks the title characters "play time rush" so that all the characters of the title characters "play time rush" are displayed in the display area. The reduced size title character "Play Time Rush" that becomes visible in , is stopped at a fixed position.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "enter play time" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to the display during the title display period. During the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Play Time Rush" to remain displayed at a fixed position as shown in FIGS. 11-66(E) and (F).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 replaces the title characters "play time rush" displayed at a fixed position in a reduced size with the title characters "play time rush", as shown in FIGS. Expand until the display area is completely filled with a part of "Rush". At this time, the title characters "enter play time" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period, instead of being enlarged and displayed in a manner opposite to the case where the title characters "enter play time" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period. In a mode different from the reverse mode, the title characters "Enter play time" are expanded until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Enter play time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process of shrinking the title character "Enter the play time" during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process that the title character "Enter the play time" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "play time rush" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background of the play time effect is switched to start the play time effect.

During the play time start effect, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (large) that prompts an operation to launch the game ball toward the right game area 2R, in addition to the right-handed promotion image (small). An immersion warning image (message "Watch out for immersion!") is displayed below the display area.

The right-handed promotion image (large) is a message that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is an arrow that indicates the direction, and is composed of an arrow image (large) that is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-66 (D) to (G), A right-handed promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a mode of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period in which the play time start performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state B, and when the variable display result is out, select the variation pattern PA1-4 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms. Variable display is performed and controlled to a time saving state B, and when the variable display result is a big hit, a variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms + 15000 ms is selected and variable display is performed, and a performance control CPU 120 , when the control of the time saving state B is started, the play time start effect is executed during the period in which the variable display according to these variation patterns is performed. After controlling the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, first the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening in the variable display based on the winning of the game ball, the variable display result is out In this case, the variation time is longer than the variation pattern PA1-4, and the time reduction B start variation pattern in which the variation time corresponding to the play time start effect is determined is selected to perform variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the time reduction state. In the first variable display controlled by B, the play time start effect may be executed during the period in which the variable display by the time saving B start variation pattern is being performed. In addition, in such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100, when the variable display result is a big hit in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, to the variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500ms + 15000ms At the same time, the effect control CPU 120 may stop the decoration pattern (large) in a big win mode without executing the play time start effect.

[Title characters, etc. 1]
FIG. 11-67 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach production, the explanation characters of the explanation display production, the title characters of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion production (small), and the operation promotion production ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between operation-promoting characters (large) in (large).

As shown in FIG. 11-67 (A), the title character of the super reach effect is displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a static image (low base strong reach B, C effect, low Strongest base reach production, high base reach A to D production) or action images (low base weak reach A and B production, low base strong reach A production). In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the super reach effect is 7 to 13 characters, and the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least part of the character string is LR is the time until the display disappears, FR is the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect, and ER is the size of the display area in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the explanation characters are displayed in the state of motion, and the background image at that time is the motion image. In addition, the number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6, and the display time of the explanatory characters (one of the three explanatory characters) is until at least part of the character string disappears) is LS, the font size of the explanation character is FS, and the explanation character (one explanation character out of three explanation characters) is displayed The display area size is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed in an active state, and the background image at that time is the motion image. In addition, the number of characters of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is 8, and the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (after all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed, at least part of the character string is not displayed) LB is the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and EB is the size of the display area where the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation facilitating characters (small) are displayed in an action state, and the background image at that time is the action image. In addition, the number of characters of the operation prompting characters (small) is three, and the display time of the operation prompting characters (small) is the time when the push button 31B is not operated and the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed. period) is L1P, the font size of the operation-promoting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed in an action state, and the background image at that time is the action image. In addition, the number of characters of the operation prompting characters (large) is three, and the display time of the operation prompting characters (large) (the operation of the push button 31B in which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated is valid). period) is L2P, the font size of the operation-promoting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this form, when comparing the display time of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (B) As shown, the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the display time LR, LS, L1P, L2P of the title character, the explanation character, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large) of the super ready-to-win production. The display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P of the explanatory characters, the operation prompting characters (small), and the operation prompting characters (large), and the operation prompting characters (small), The display times LS and L1P of the operation prompting characters (large) are set longer than the display times LS of the explanatory characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompting characters (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) all constitute the description display effect. The display time is set to be longer than the display time required to display all the three explanatory characters. In addition, the relationship between these display times is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

In this form, when comparing the font sizes of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (C) As shown, the font size F2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the font size FR, FS, FB, F1P of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion character (small). is also a large font size. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach production, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion character (small), the operation promotion character ( The size is larger than the size of the largest size character among the characters that make up the large).

Also, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is a font size larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title character, the description character and the operation promotion character (small) of the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the title character "BIG BONUS" of the big hit start effect is firstly displayed in the first half "BIG" at the upper fixed position, and then the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position, and then the title character "BIG BONUS" is displayed. The display is gradually enlarged, and when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the upper fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position, the size of the characters constituting the title character "BIG BONUS" is displayed. is the smallest. In such a configuration, the size of the title character of the jackpot start effect when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the upper fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position is the size of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect. The size is larger than the character size of the character and the operation-promoting character (small). In addition, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the smallest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is Super Reach. The size of the character is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title character, the explanation character, the operation prompting character (small), and the operation prompting character (large).

Also, the font size FR of the title character of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and the operation prompting characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest sized character among the characters composing the explanatory characters and operation prompting characters (small). .

Also, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the explanation characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small).

Further, these font size relationships and character size relationships are established regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, when comparing the display area size of the super reach effect title character, explanation character, jackpot start effect title character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (D) , the display area size E2P of the operation prompting characters (large) is the display area sizes ER, ES, and EB of the title characters of the super reach effect, the explanatory characters, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and the operation prompting characters (small). , E1P. In addition, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanation characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super ready-to-win effect. Also, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is a display area size larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Also, the relationship between these display area sizes is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
FIG. 11-68 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super ready-to-win production, the title characters of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion production (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) in the operation promotion production (large). ), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times character constituting the remaining number of times until the play time.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is not displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are not displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the big win start effect is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation-promoting characters (small) (the operation valid period of the push button 31B during which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed without the push-button 31B being operated) is L1P. , the font size of the operation prompting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation-promoting characters (large) (operation valid period of the push button 31B during which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed without the push-button 31B being operated) is L2P. , the font size of the operation-promoting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the play time start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears) ) is LY, the font size of the title characters for the play time start effect is FY, and the display area size for displaying the title characters for the play time start effect is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the remaining number of times until play time character is FZ, and the display area size for displaying the remaining number of times until play time character is EZ.

In this form, the font size of the title character of the super reach production, the title character of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion character (small), the operation promotion character (large), the title character of the play time start production, and the remaining number of characters until the play time When compared, as shown in FIG. 11-68(B), the font size F2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), The font size is larger than the font size FR, FB, F1P, FY, FZ of the title character of the play time start effect and the remaining count character until the play time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the title character of the play time start effect. , is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters (remaining XXX times (X is a numerical value of 0 to 900)) constituting the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the operation prompting characters (large) constitutes the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start effect, the font size FR, F1P, The size is larger than FY and FZ. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times until the play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the character. In addition, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start effect constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900 times. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

In addition, the font size FY of the title character of the play time start effect is larger than the font size FR, F1P, and FZ of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the remaining number of characters until the play time. be. In addition, the smallest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect is the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation promotion characters (small), and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest size character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title character of the play time start effect is the remaining number of characters until the play time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the constituent characters.

Also, the font size FR of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompting character (small) and the remaining count characters until the play time. In addition, the smallest size character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is the operation promotion character (small), and the largest size character that makes up the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time. is of a larger size than In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Also, the font size F1P of the operation prompting character (small) is a font size larger than the font size FZ of the remaining count character until the play time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest size character among the characters constituting the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the operation prompting character (small) constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Further, these font size relationships and character size relationships are established regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, the size of the display area for the super reach production title characters, the jackpot start production title characters, the operation promotion characters (small), the operation promotion characters (large), the play time start production title characters, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time , as shown in FIG. 11-68(C), the display area size E2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super ready-to-win effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small) ), the display area size of the title character of the play time start effect, and the display area size of the remaining number of characters until the play time ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect, the display area size ER of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time, The display area size is larger than E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EY of the title character of the play time start effect is larger than the display area size ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. Region size. In addition, the display area size ER of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompting character (small) and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the display area size E1P of the operation prompting character (small) is a display area size larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining count character up to play time. Also, the relationship between these display area sizes is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

Comparing the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title character of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title character of the play time start effect is It is set longer than the display time LR of the title character of the ready-to-win effect. In addition, the relationship between these display times is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

Comparing the display mode of the title character of the super reach effect and the title character of the play time start effect in this form, as shown in FIG. In the ~C effect, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and the title characters are erased while moving from the center toward the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the play time start effect, the title characters are reduced from enlarged display during the title start period, and the title characters are erased while being enlarged during the title end period.

[Regarding the arrangement of LEDs]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 are provided so as to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the game area. It is provided so as to surround the right side of the game area of the game machine frame 3 . Further, the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "POWERFULII" formed on the front surface of the movable body 32. FIG. Also, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are provided at positions corresponding to the decoration portions formed in the game area 2L. Also, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. FIG.

The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 are full-color LEDs composed of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light-emitting elements, and the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit monochromatic red light. The red LEDs, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting monochromatic white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs luminance data for lighting/flashing/extinguishing one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9, Output to an LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The luminance data table includes an error luminance data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach luminance data table used during super reach, and a background luminance data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background luminance data table used during the round of the state, the ending background luminance data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the low probability high base state (time saving state), and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background luminance data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority when using each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the priority is higher when used in the order of the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into a super reach effect while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in a normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the super reach effect The SP reach brightness data table is used preferentially over the normal background brightness data table, and the brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the luminance data table for normal background and the super ready-to-win effect develops, the super ready-to-win effect is supported based on the luminance data table for SP ready-to-win. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in such a manner. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the normal state returns, luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output to

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into a super reach effect, etc., the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the super reach effect will be used preferentially over the luminance data table for the background, and the luminance data will be output to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background luminance data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super ready-to-win effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Also, for example, if an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the SP reach brightness data table during the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to the SP The luminance data table for error is used preferentially over the luminance data table for reach, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for error. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being ramp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance based on the luminance data table for SP reach, the game is played in a manner corresponding to the error based on the luminance data table for error. The effect lamp 9 is ramp controlled. While the luminance data based on the luminance data table for error is output to the LED driver, the luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but the error is canceled and the super reach effect is performed again. When returning to the middle game state, luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the super reach effect being controlled by the timer, and the LED driver However, if an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the brightness data table for SP reach even while performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data table for error, but Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

[Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, as terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, "extinguishing", "substantially extinguishing", "lit", and "blinking" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, such an LED state in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the luminance data of the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 is "0", the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 are "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 in which the R data is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for the sake of convenience.

When W (White) data defined as luminance data of the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "0", the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (data of W) of the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are turned on with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for the sake of convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps arranged in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching over time between the luminance data being "0" and "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. Blinking is different in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

[Description on game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the image data (moving image data, The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the animation data). The display control unit 123 provides an extended command (for example, an extended command BXXX (where "X" is an arbitrary Alphanumeric characters)) is set, and the extension command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123 .

FIG. 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, an extension for designating the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect Command (B421) is transmitted to CPU120 for production control. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (weak reach system common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect.

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and corresponding to the lamp to be subjected to lamp control are referenced during lamp control. and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacker lamp LA1 are used as lamp control targets. ~ LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) is specified. Also, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table. Child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to LL4, 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5. 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed by this child table. 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time during which the

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table by the specified child table. If so, the counter is decremented by 1 every 10 ms to count this 600000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is clocked. In addition, the effect control CPU120, after receiving the extension command, before timing a maximum of 600000ms (10 minutes), if another extension command is newly received, the lamp control being executed is canceled, The child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received at the time is used to perform the lamp control of the target lamp. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). Even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information designating a grandchild table to be referred to during lamp control and lamp control is performed. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, lamp control is performed by a grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE). Table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table execute lamp control execution time: 500ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table execute lamp control execution time: 230ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table execute lamp control Execution time: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, in correspondence with the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500ms, the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this Execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control is executed by these grandchild tables.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, in correspondence with decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this Execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control is executed by these grandchild tables.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and Execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, Execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, Grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, the first designated grandchild table to control the target lamp using the grandchild table designated by the child table. After performing the lamp control of the lamp of interest and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing the lamp control of the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table is performed on all the specified grandchild tables. are to be performed in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is clocked first, and then the grandchild table is controlled until 500 ms is clocked. Lamp control by table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, then ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is clocked, then ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until clocking 600000 ms. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the grandchild table specified last is 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). By setting , even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the lamp control being executed for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, when the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of the lamp control, the grandchild tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are, for example, as shown in FIG. , one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, and two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 are specified as shown in FIG. 11-75. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the one grandchild table to create the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12. The same lamp control is performed for both LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as grandchild tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to create a frame. Lamp control of LEDLWL1 to LWL12 is performed, and lamp control of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, common lamp control is performed for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12.

In the grandchild table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, luminance data referred to during lamp control and execution time for lamp control are specified. Information to be performed is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 by this data lamp, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) Execution time for control: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x0000000000000x000000, , 0x000000, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, this Execution time for lamp control based on luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms , brightness data: 0xAAAA, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x00000, this Execution time for lamp control based on luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120ms , brightness data: 0x66666, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, By this luminance data Execution time for lamp control: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the brightness data of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and No. 2 is the value of frame LEDLWL1. The values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL2 and LWR2, corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDs LWL3 and LWR3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits are the values of the frame LEDs LWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, and the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6. indicates the RGB value of the frame LEDLWL6, LWR6. The RGB values of LWR7 are shown, and the values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 show the RGB values of the frame LEDs LWL8 and LWR8.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified by frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), ), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL1, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 The values of the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2, and the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL3, The value of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicates the RGB value of the frame LED LWL4, and the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6. The second value indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL5. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 indicate the values of the frame LEDLWL8. In the brightness data of the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 2 indicate the RGB values of the frame LED LWR2. Yes, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR3, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicates the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR5. The value of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to indicates the RGB value of the frame LEDLWR6, and the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th is the frame The values of the RGB of LEDLWR7 are shown, and the values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In the luminance data of the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in FIG. The value of the R of the logo LEDLL2 is indicated, the value of the second lower digit indicates the value of R of the logo LEDLL3, and the value of the fourth lower digit indicates the value of R of the logo LEDLL4.

Also, in the brightness data of the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the lower fourth digit value indicates the W (White) value of the decoration LEDLS1, and the lower third digit value is The value of W of the decoration LED LS2 is indicated, the value of the lower second digit indicates the value of W of the decoration LED LS3, and the value of the fourth lower digit indicates the value of W of the decoration LED LS4.

In the brightness data of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 1st and 2nd are the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA1. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA2, and the lower 4 of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 The values of the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA4. is.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are composed of LEDs composed of three elements "R", "G", and "B". corresponds to the current value output for Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the element “R”, a current corresponding to the luminance data “A” flows through the element “R”, and an element “G” receives “1”. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to luminance data to flow through the RGB elements. Further, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can be lit in colors corresponding to each effect or character by light emission based on luminance data. As an example, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in red. Further, data of "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light reddish purple. In addition, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with luminance corresponding to the luminance data by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data to the R (Red) element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows evenly through the three elements R, G, and B, so that white light having a luminance corresponding to the luminance data can be emitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 outputs, for example, the first specified luminance data to the LED driver when controlling the target lamp by referring to the luminance data of the grandchild table. Then, after measuring the execution time corresponding to this luminance data, the process of outputting the next designated luminance data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated luminance data in the designated order. there is For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is sent to the LED driver for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 until the first 100 ms is measured. 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms , output 0x000000 to the LED driver, then until 120ms is clocked Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver, then 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until 40ms is clocked, Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the specified LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is displayed. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying . As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11-72 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 11-72, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time at which lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time to perform lamp control, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time to perform lamp control in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, 600000 ms is specified as the fourth lamp control time, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. ２番目及び４番目の孫テーブル：XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2においては、枠ＬＥＤＬＷＬ１～ＬＷＬ１２について、輝度データ（ＲＧＢのデータ）として「0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499」、「0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388」、「0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499」、「0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA」の順番で１００ｍｓ間隔で実行されるように指定されている。 For convenience of explanation, the brightness data in the first 100 ms is called data 1, the brightness data in the second 100 ms is called data 2, the brightness data in the third 100 ms is called data 3, and the brightness data in the fourth 100 ms is called data 4. .

The effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the second specified grandchild table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. Until reaches 500ms: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 based on 100ms intervals, data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver. If it has not reached , the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. When the clock reaches 500 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that point, and outputs luminance data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 specified by the child table. to start.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 measures 600000 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, Until the time reaches 600000ms: Based on XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at intervals of 100ms, but after data 1 to data 4 are output, the time is still measured. has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. When the time count reaches 600000 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, the output of the luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 will start, but some kind of abnormality should occur. By receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the measured time reaches 600000 ms, the parent table, child table, and table designated by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table is started.

Incidentally, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 11-74, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role in troubleshooting. responsible for That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the main board 11. However, while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, some trouble occurs and the effect occurs. Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive the effect control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp controls are performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. You can prevent it from being lost.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table. , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the timer of the parent table still remains, the lamp control is performed again by the grandchild table specified first of the child table. Play a preventative role.

Further, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the brightness data specified last. In the minute data, when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, lamp control is again performed using the luminance data specified first in the grandchild table because the timer of the child table still remains. It will play a role in preventing it from being put away. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the brightness data for 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

[Regarding the luminance data table used for super reach effect 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a luminance data table used for the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A effect. Also, when executing the low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part, a common weak reach type common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a luminance data table is used to control the game effect lamp 9 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the title color change effect in the title display part when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, and when changing the title characters to red, the low base weak reach A Whether it is the title display part of the production or the title display part of the low base weak reach B production, there is a common brightness data table that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to red in the title color change production. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title common chance-up red color, the title color change effect is executed in the title display part, and when the title characters are changed to gold, the title is displayed with the low base weak reach A effect. Whether it is a part or a title display part with a low base weak reach B effect, a common title common chance up that defines the lighting mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change effect as a luminance data table Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using gold.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, in the introduction part, the luminance data table When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and executing the low base weak reach B effect, introduction In the part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach type weak reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as the luminance data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and as shown in FIG. When executing the reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part, the low base strong reach A is used as the luminance data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach type common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display part of the ~C effect.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, In the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the strong reach type strong reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach B effect is performed. is executed, in the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach type strong reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strong reach B production as the luminance data table. In the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach type strong reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strong reach C production as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the luminance data table from the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect to the introduction part in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect, and the high base reach D effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 The title is displayed when performing the high base reach A performance, when performing the high base reach B performance, when performing the high base reach C performance, and when performing the high base reach D performance. In the part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach system common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D productions as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect and the high base reach D effect, but as shown in FIG. 11-73, the high base reach A effect When executing, in the introduction part, the high base reach system reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the high base reach A production as a luminance data table is used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9, high When the base reach B effect is executed, in the introductory part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach system reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the high base reach B effect as a brightness data table. , and when executing the high base reach C effect, in the introduction part, the high base reach system reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the high base reach C effect as a brightness data table is used. 9 lamp control is performed and high base reach D effect is executed, in the introductory part, high base reach type reach D introduction that defines the luminescence mode peculiar to the introductory part of high base reach D effect as a luminance data table is used. lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

In this way, both in the case of executing the low base weak reach A effect and in the case of executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses the common weak reach type common title as the brightness data table to achieve the game effect. Since the lamp control of the lamp 9 is performed, the storage capacity of the luminance data table can be saved. Since the ramp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction and the weak reach system weak reach B introduction, the contents of each production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production The game effect lamp 9 can be made to have a different light emission mode according to the state, and the effect of the introduction part until the effect result is introduced in the super ready-to-win effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, both when the low base weak reach A effect is executed and when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach type common title as the luminance data table. In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title starts from when a part of the title characters is displayed to when it is displayed at a fixed position. A display control unit comprising a weak reach type title start in which a light emission pattern peculiar to a period is defined, and a weak reach type title display in which a peculiar light emission pattern is defined after a title display period in which title characters are displayed at a fixed position. When 123 starts the display control of the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, by transmitting an extension command designating the start of the weak reach title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the weak reach title start, and the display control unit 123 determines the title of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects. By transmitting an extended command specifying weak reach title display when starting display control of the display period, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: weak reach title display to display frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and The frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be controlled. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, the brightness data table: either the start of the weak reach title or the display of the weak reach title A common brightness data table may be used for each, and separate brightness data tables in which individual contents are set may be used for the other.

Also, when the low base weak reach A and B effects are executed, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part, even if it is a low base weak reach A effect, it is a low base weak reach B effect. Also, since the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) is used as the brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table is common in the title display part. Since the ramp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system common title, the storage capacity of the luminance data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, the case where the low base strong reach A effect is executed and the low base strong reach In the case of executing the B performance and the case of executing the low base strong reach C performance, the game effect is obtained by using separate strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and strong reach system strong reach C introduction respectively. Since the lamps 9 are controlled, the game effect lamps 9 are made to emit light in different modes in accordance with the content of each of the introduction parts of the low-base strong reach A performance, the low-base strong reach B performance, and the low-base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect in the introductory part until the performance result is introduced in the super ready-to-win performance.

In the present embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the title display part It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach type common title as a brightness data table, but among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the prologue display period and the title character The start of a strong reach title that defines a unique light emission pattern during the title start period from when a part is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, and the specific light emission after the title display period when the title characters are displayed at a fixed position a strong reach title display defining a pattern, and an extension that specifies the start of the strong reach title when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. By transmitting the command, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Strong Reach series title start, and the display control unit 123 However, when starting the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command designating the strong reach type title display, the effect control CPU 120 Luminance data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be controlled using a strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach title A common brightness data table may be used for one of the start and strong reach type title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set may be used for the other.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the strong reach prologue that defines the light emission pattern unique to the prologue display period and part of the title characters are displayed and then displayed at a fixed position. Equipped with a strong reach-type title start that defines a specific light emission pattern during the title start period up to and including a strong reach-type title display that defines a specific light emission pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed at a fixed position. , When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command designating the strong reach prologue, the effect control CPU 120 increases the brightness Data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the strong reach system prologue, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. When the display control of the title start period is started, by transmitting an extended command specifying the start of the strong reach title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: start of the strong reach title to display the frame LEDLWL1 ~ LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, By transmitting an extended command specifying a strong reach title display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: strong reach title display to display the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Lamp control may be performed. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach prologue At least one of the strong reach title start table and the strong reach title display table may be a common luminance data table, and the remaining tables may be separate luminance data tables in which individual contents are set.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the strong reach prologue that defines the light emission pattern unique to the prologue display period and part of the title characters are displayed and then displayed at a fixed position. and a strong reach title display that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title start period until the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. , By transmitting an extended command specifying a strong reach system prologue, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: strong reach system prologue, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 lamps When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title start period of the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it transmits an extension command designating the strong reach type title display. The effect control CPU 120 may control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the luminance data table: strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach prologue , a common brightness data table for one of the strong reach type title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set for the other.

Also, when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect, In the title display part, a high base reach type common title is used as a luminance data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, so that the storage capacity of the luminance data table can be saved, while in the introductory part, high base reach A production is performed. When executing high-base reach B effect, when executing high-base reach C effect, and when executing high-base reach D effect, respectively, separate high-base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach System reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, and high base reach system reach D introduction are used to control the game effect lamp 9, so high base reach A production, high base reach B production, high base reach C In the introductory part of the high-base reach D performance, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have different light emitting modes according to the contents of each performance, and the performance effect in the introductory part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance is enhanced. be able to.

In this embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. Even in this case, the title display part uses a common high base reach system common title as a brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9, but the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is configured to control the lamp. Among them, the start of a high base reach type title that defines a unique light emission pattern for the title start period from when a part of the title character is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, and the title display where the title character is displayed at a fixed position and a high base reach type title display that defines a specific light emission pattern after the period, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the high base reach is displayed. By transmitting an extended command designating the start of a system title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: high base reach system title start to display the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, an extension command specifying the high base reach type title display is transmitted. The effect control CPU 120 may control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach title display. Further, in such a configuration, the brightness data is determined depending on whether it is a high base reach A effect, a high base reach B effect, a high base reach C effect, or a high base reach D effect. Table: A common luminance data table may be used for one of the high base reach type title start and high base reach type title display, and the other may be a separate luminance data table in which individual contents are set.

In addition, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect that does not share the execution time of the title display part with other super reach effects, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect is used as a luminance data table in the title display part and the introduction part. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the beginning to the introduction part, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both when the low base weak reach A effect is executed and when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach type common title as the brightness data table. However, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is used as the luminance data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the determined weak reach type weak reach A title and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title of the low base weak reach B effect is used as the luminance data table of the title display part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using a weak reach type weak reach B title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the display part, thereby providing a low base weak reach A effect and a low base weak reach B effect. In the title display part, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have different lighting modes according to the content of each effect, and the effect in the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the title display part It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the low base is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. A strong reach system in which a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the strong reach A effect is determined is used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach A title, and when executing the low base strong reach B effect, the title display part is performed. As the brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the strong reach type strong reach B title that defines the light emission mode unique to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect is executed. In that case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a strong reach type strong reach C title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the luminance data table of the title display part. In this way, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in different modes in accordance with the content of each effect in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, and the low-base strong reach C effect. is possible, and the effect of the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. In this case, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high-base reach type common title as a luminance data table. As the brightness data table of the display part, the high base reach type reach A title that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach A effect is used to control the game effect lamp 9 and execute the high base reach B effect. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a high base reach type reach B title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach B effect as the luminance data table of the title display part. When the reach C effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed by using the high base reach type reach C title which defines the light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. and when executing the high base reach D effect, a high base reach system reach D title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach D effect as the brightness data table of the title display part is used for the game effect. The ramp control of the lamp 9 may be performed, so that in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect, and the high base reach D effect, depending on the respective effect contents. Thus, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have a different light emission mode, and the effect of the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. The strongest reach system that defines the luminous mode peculiar to the title display part The strongest reach title is used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9, and the luminous mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strongest reach effect is defined as the brightness data table of the introductory part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach introduction.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base weak reach A and B productions, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a common weak reach type common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and is introduced. It is a configuration for performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach type weak reach A introduction and the weak reach type weak reach B introduction as the luminance data table of the part, but when executing the low base weak reach A effect , In the title display part and the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is displayed using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the low base weak reach A title display part to the introductory part as a luminance data table. When performing lamp control and executing the low base weak reach B production, in the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base weak reach B to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. The introduction of the weak reach system weak reach B title may be used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a common strong reach type common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp is introduced. It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach system strong reach A introduction, the strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and the strong reach system strong reach C introduction as the luminance data table of the part. When executing the reach A effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a strong reach type strong reach A title that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect to the introduction part as a luminance data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using introduction and executing the low base strong reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the luminance data table is introduced from the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach system strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to the part, and executing the low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part and the introduction part , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach type strong reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a luminance data table, and the low base When executing the strong reach D production, in the title display part and the introduction part, the strong reach system strong reach D that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base strong reach D production to the introduction part as a brightness data table. The title introduction may be used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a common high base reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the introduction is performed. Lump control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, and high base reach type reach D introduction as the luminance data table of the part. However, when executing the high base reach A effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach A effect to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the base reach type reach A title introduction and executing the high base reach B effect, the title of the high base reach B effect is used as the brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the high base reach system reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the display part to the introduction part, and executing the high base reach C effect, the title display part and the introduction part In the introductory part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach type reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the high base reach C production title display part to the introductory part as a luminance data table, When executing the high base reach D effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a high base reach system reach D that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach D effect to the introduction part as a luminance data table The title introduction may be used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

[Regarding the brightness data table used for super reach effect 2]
Below, the setting contents of the brightness data table used for the super ready-to-win effect will be described. As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Only the table of the table is shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
FIG. 11-74 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B421 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects: weak reach FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the system common title, FIG. Reference numeral 78 denotes a brightness data table: a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles.

When the extension command B421 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table of the weak reach system common title based on the extension command B421. In the parent table of the weak reach common titles, as shown in Fig. 11-74, it is set to perform lamp control by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600000 ms for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. When the extension command B421 is received, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the child table specified by the parent table of the weak reach system common title: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE to control the lamps of the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12. conduct.

In child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, as shown in FIG. 11-75, grandchild tables of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 and execution times are set in the order of reference.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (FIG. 11-76) set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned on in blue for 160 ms.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Fig. 11-77) set second in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue colors, and the luminance changes every 100 ms.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (FIG. 11-78) set third in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off, and the rest are turned on in blue.

After that, when 230 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Fig. 11-77) set fourth in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue colors, and the luminance changes every 100 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B effect, and newly received switch to lamp control based on the brightness data table based on the extended command. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 continue to light up in blue colors until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the luminance changes every 100 ms continues, and a new extension command is received. By doing so, the lighting mode is switched to that based on the received extension command.

In the parent table of the weak reach system common title, as shown in FIG. 11-74, a child table that also refers to the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5, and the attack lamp LA1 to LA4 is set, and these In the child table, the grandchild tables to be referred to are set in order of execution, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data to be referred to are set in order of execution. With reference to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 are displayed in the same procedure as above. Perform lamp control.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from the off state to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then remain red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. After that, it lights up in red again until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the brightness changes every 100 ms continues.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white until 500 ms have passed, then light up in white until 500 ms have passed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms, and then from white to a substantially off state until 230 ms have passed. After that, it lights up in white again until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the brightness changes every 100 ms continues.

In addition, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue until 500 ms have passed, then light up in the blue system until 500 ms have passed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. After going through the off state, it lights up in blue again, and then lights up in the blue system until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the luminance changes every 100 ms continues.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (A), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach type common title, so that the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part until 500 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue, and the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are off. state changes to red, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white (lamp control by grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). Also, during the title display period during which the title characters remain stationary at a fixed position and the title end period during which the title characters move from the fixed position toward the right (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part), the frame LEDLWL1 ~ LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms (in FIG. control), and after that, it goes from blue to nearly extinguished once before 230 ms elapses, then lights up again in blue (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then lights up in blue again. and the state in which the luminance changes every 100 ms continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) designated by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then until 230 ms has elapsed. 11-75, the light turns red once after going through a nearly extinguished state and turns red again (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then turns red again and the luminance changes every 100 ms. The state continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). Also, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white until 500 ms have elapsed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then until 230 ms has elapsed. 11-75, the light turns white again after going through a nearly unlit state (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), then turns white again, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. The state continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Thus, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach system common title is finished, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, the brightness data table based on the extended command B421: By performing lamp control based on the weak reach system common title, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 ~LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5, attack lamp LA1 to LA4 are the title start period in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position, and the title characters move from the fixed position to the right side. The light emission color and light emission mode change according to the ending period of the moving title.

[Luminance data table used in title color change effect (red)]
FIG. 11-79 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B511 transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to red: title FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common chance-up red, and FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the child table of title common chance-up red, FIGS. -83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of title common chance-up red.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing of changing the title characters (title display part The extension command 511 is transmitted at a timing 1300 ms after the start.

When the extension command B511 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the title common chance up red parent table (FIG. 11-79) based on the extension command 511, and the child table (FIG. 11) specified by the parent table. -80), the grandchild table specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-81 to 83), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDLS1. to LS5, lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, and then light up in red until 1200 ms have passed, and the brightness is maintained at intervals of 20 ms. changes, and then gradually turns off from red in 280 ms, and the off state continues until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off until 200 ms have passed, then turned on in red until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms. The light-out state continues until a command is received.

In addition, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, then light up white until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and then gradually from white at 280 ms. It goes off and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Also, when executing the title color change effect that changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed since the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in red. , and when 1200 ms elapses, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B511 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, so that the title characters will shine. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 blink in white during the period displayed in the form of The lights go out, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, until the title character changes to red and the title end period (the period from 200 ms to 1200 ms after receiving the extension command B511), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in red, and the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit in red, and brightness is changed at intervals of 20 ms, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white. and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, during the title ending period (the period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extension command B511), the title characters move to the right from the fixed position and disappear. LA4 is gradually turned off from red, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are gradually turned off from red, decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are gradually turned off from white (in FIG. control).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Thus, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red ends, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

[Luminance data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
FIG. 11-84 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B512 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to gold: title FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the common chance-up money, and FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the child table of the title common chance-up money, FIGS. 11-86 to 11. -88 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the grandchild table of title common chance up money.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing of changing the title characters (title display part The extension command 512 is transmitted at a timing 1300 ms after the start.

When the extension command B512 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the title common chance-up money parent table (FIG. 11-84) based on the extension command 512, and the child table (FIG. 11) designated by the parent table. -85), the grandchild table specified by the child table (FIGS. 11-86 to 88), the brightness data specified by the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 are displayed. to LS5, the lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have elapsed, and then light yellow at intervals of 20 ms until 1200 ms. changes, then gradually turns off from yellow in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off until 200 ms have passed, then turned on in red until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms. The light-out state continues until a command is received.

In addition, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, then light up white until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and then gradually from white at 280 ms. It goes off and stays off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing the title color change effect that changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that looks like they are shining for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed since the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in gold. , and when 1200 ms elapses, the title end period is entered.

For this reason, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money, so that the title characters will shine. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 blink in white during the period displayed in a manner that looks like The lights go out, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period (the period from 200 ms to 1200 ms after receiving the extension command B512), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1-LA4 light up in yellow, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 light up in red, and luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 light up in white. and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, during the title ending period (the period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extension command B512), the title characters move to the right from the fixed position and disappear. LA4 gradually turns off from yellow, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually turn off from red, decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (in FIG. control).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. With this, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money ends, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

[Modified Example of Luminance Data Table Used in Title Color Change Effect]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: common title of the weak reach type in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, regardless of whether or not to perform the title change effect. LEDLWL1-LWL12, frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 are controlled, and if title change effects are not performed, the brightness data table: frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 are used as they are using common titles for weak reach systems. ~LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled, and when the title change effect is performed, the title common chance up red or Brightness data table: Frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 using title common chance-up red or title common chance-up money when the color of the title character changes by receiving an extended command specifying the title common chance-up money to LWR12 and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table in which the brightness data when the title change effect is not performed is set: weak reach system common title (white) , In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table in which the brightness data for the title change effect in which the title characters change to red is set: weak reach common title (red) and title A luminance data table in which luminance data is set for a title change effect in which characters change to gold: weak reach system common title (gold); When the display control of the title display part is started, if the title change effect is not performed, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the extension command designating the weak reach system common title (white). Table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the common title of the weak reach system (white), and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A and B production titles. When starting the display control of the display part, in the case of performing a title change effect to change the title character to red, by transmitting an extension command designating a weak reach type common title (red), the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) to perform lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A, When starting the display control of the title display part of the B effect, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach common title (gold), The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the luminance data table: weak reach system common title (gold).

As a result, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold when the title change effect is not performed in the title display parts of the base weak reach A and B effects, and when the title change effect of changing the title characters to red is performed. It is possible to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 in a light emission mode corresponding to each situation when the title change effect is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base weak reach A effect]
FIG. 11-89 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B400, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A production: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, FIGS. 11-91 to 11 -95 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B400 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table (FIG. 11-89) of the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach A based on the extension command B400, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-90), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-91 to 11-95) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-90, the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production is switched, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-91 to 11-95 are set with luminance data corresponding to luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to characters appearing in scenes of production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-96 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B40F that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach B effect: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, FIGS. 11-99 to 11 -103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B40F is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-96) of the weak reach system weak reach B introduction based on the extension command B40F, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-97), the grandchild table specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-98 to 103), and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-97, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-98 to 11-98 to 11-103 are set with luminance data corresponding to the luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the characters that appear, etc. Emission color and emission mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production]
FIG. 11-104 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B517 transmitted when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects: strong reach FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the system common title, FIG. Reference numeral 109 denotes a brightness data table: a table showing setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach type.

When the extension command B517 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-105) of the strong reach system common title based on the extension command B517, and the child table (FIG. 11 -106), the grandchild table specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-107 to 109), the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 are displayed. to LS5, the lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-106, scenes of effects such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, title end period, etc. that constitute the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects are switched. The execution time corresponding to the time, the light emission color corresponding to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table of the light emission mode are set. Further, the grandchild tables shown in Figs. Luminance data corresponding to the light emission color and light emission mode are set.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attack lamps LA1 to LA4, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are the scenes of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C, the characters that appear, etc. The emission color and emission mode change accordingly.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect]
FIG. 11-110 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B500 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach A production: strong reach system strong reach 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, FIGS. 11-112 to 11 -117 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extended command B500 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-110) of the strong reach system strong reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-111), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-112 to 117) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIGS. 11-111, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-112 to 117 are set with luminance data representing luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to characters appearing in the scene of the production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the characters that appear, etc. Emission color and emission mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-118 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B504 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach B effect: strong reach system strong reach 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, and FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, FIGS. -124 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B504 is received, the effect control CPU120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-118) of the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the extension command B504, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-119), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-120 to 124) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-119 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-120 to 11-124, the luminance data representing the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the production scene are set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach C effect]
When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach C effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs strong reach system strong reach based on the extended command B505. C Specify the parent table (not shown) of the introduction, and refer to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table of strong reach system strong reach C introduction, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the light emission color and light emission mode according to the production scene A grandchild table is set, and the grandchild table with the introduction of strong reach type strong reach C has a light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the production scene in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production. Luminance data is set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in low base strongest reach effect]
FIG. 11-125 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command B600 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control for a low base strongest reach effect: the parent of the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the table, FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction child table, FIGS. 11-127 to 11-135 Luminosity data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the introduction of the strongest reach type strongest reach title. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B600 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table (FIG. 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title based on the extension command B600, and the child table ( 11-127), grandchild tables specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-128 to 135), luminance data specified in the grandchild tables, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-126, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches from the title display part of the low base strongest reach production to the end of the introduction part, the light emission color according to the production scene, and the light emission 11-127 to 11-135, a grandchild table is set as a mode, and further, in the grandchild table shown in FIGS. .

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-136 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B605 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the title display part in high base reach A to D effects: high base reach FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common titles, and FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the child table of the high base reach series common titles, FIGS. 11-138 to 11 -140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the grandchild table of common titles of high base reach.

When the extension command B605 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and the child table (Fig. 11-137), grandchild tables specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-138 to 140), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration by referring to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls the LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-137, execution according to the time when the scene of the production such as the title start period, the title display period, and the title end period that constitute the title display part in the high base reach A to D production is switched A grandchild table is set as a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the time and the scene of the production. Further, the grandchild table shown in FIGS. , luminance data for the light emission mode is set.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attack lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are used for the scenes of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production, the characters that appear, etc. In addition, the luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach A effect]
FIG. 11-141 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command B606, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach A performance: high base reach system reach A FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the luminance data table: high base reach system reach A introduction, 145 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B606 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-141) of the high base reach system reach A introduction based on the extension command B606, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-142), the grandchild table (FIGS. 11-143 to 145) specified in the child table, the luminance data specified in the grandchild table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-142 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-143 to 11-145, luminous colors and luminance data corresponding to luminous modes corresponding to characters appearing in scenes of production are set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the production scenes and the characters that appear in the introduction part of the high base reach A production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach B effect]
FIG. 11-146 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B607 transmitted when performing display control of the introductory part in the high base reach B production: high base reach system reach B FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, and FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: high base reach system reach B introduction. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B607 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-146) of the high base reach system reach B introduction based on the extension command B607, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-147), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are displayed. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-147 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach B introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of the high base reach B production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the production scenes and the characters that appear in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach C effect]
FIG. 11-148 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command B608 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach C production: high base reach system reach C FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing setting contents of a parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing setting contents of a child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach C introduction. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B608 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-148) of the high base reach system reach C introduction based on the extension command B608, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-149), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are displayed. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-148 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table for the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of high base reach type reach C introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the character etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of high base reach C production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach D effect]
FIG. 11-150 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command B609, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach D effect: high base reach system reach D FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, and FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: high base reach system reach D introduction child table. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B609 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-150) of the high base reach system reach D introduction based on the extension command B609, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-151), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-150 has an execution time according to the time when the scene of the production in the introductory part of the high base reach D production is switched, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach D introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the character etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of the high base reach D production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach D production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Effect 1]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode before the title display part in the super ready-to-win effect, and the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode in the title display part. Let By doing so, when the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect by using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally noticed, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative pattern (large) is displayed in the reach mode, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach mode is reduced to a smaller decorative pattern (small). The title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the reduced decoration pattern (small). In this way, the decoration pattern (large) is displayed in a reduced size to attract the player's line of sight, and the display position of the reduced decoration pattern (small) is used to display the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. Displaying it makes it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

Also, in the title display part in the super reach effect, at the timing when the decorative pattern in the reach mode is displayed, the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the reach mode. This makes it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base weak reach A. , B effect and the title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear in a state of being overlapped with one of the decorative patterns in the reach mode (decorative pattern on the left side). Therefore, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the super reach effect includes the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of hitting the jackpot than the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect are decorations on both sides in reach mode. Since the title characters appear overlapping the patterns (decorative patterns on both sides), it is possible to display the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C productions, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach production are the decorative patterns in the reach mode. After appearing in a state overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (decorative patterns on the left side) or both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides), it is displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in a fixed position, it is a reach mode Since it is displayed in a state where it overlaps part of the decorative patterns on both sides, it is easy to draw attention to the title characters even after the title characters are displayed at the fixed positions.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready reach mode. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Then, when the odd decorative patterns are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display positions of the odd decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach mode are used in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions are displayed as shown, and an even number of decorative patterns are displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In the part, display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B productions so as to use the display positions of the even-numbered decorative patterns in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions. When the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode, in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production is used so that the display position of the odd decorative pattern in the reach mode display, and when the even-numbered decoration patterns are displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach mode in the title display part The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so as to be used. By doing so, when the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become the ready-to-reach state. To display title characters corresponding to low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects by using display positions of decoration patterns in reach modes in title display parts in strong reach A to C effects. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the title character naturally, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 3]
In the present embodiment, after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A to C effects, and low-base strongest reach. It is possible to perform a production. Low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A-C effects, and low-base strongest reach effects have a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Both are included. Then, when the odd decorative patterns are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display positions of the odd decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach mode are used in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions are displayed as shown, and an even number of decorative patterns are displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In the part, display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B productions so as to use the display positions of the even-numbered decorative patterns in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions. When the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode, in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production is used so that the display position of the odd decorative pattern in the reach mode display, and when the even-numbered decoration patterns are displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach mode in the title display part When the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production are displayed as used, and the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach production, in the title display part , title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach mode, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low-base strongest reach effect. , the title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach performance are displayed so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach state in the title display part. By doing so, when the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become the ready-to-reach state. Strong reach A to C production, low base Strong reach A to C production, low base Strong reach A to C production, low base using the display position of the decorative pattern in reach mode in the title display part By displaying the title characters corresponding to the strongest reach effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the title characters naturally, and as a result, it is possible to suitably display the title.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 4]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode before the title display part in the super ready-to-win effect, and the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode in the title display part. Let By doing so, when the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally noticed, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low-base weak reach B effect and a low-base strong reach B effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base weak reach B effect. The low base weak reach B effect and the low base strong reach B effect include both a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B production, the ally character "Mu Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Mu Yume" informs that a big hit will be achieved, and in the low base strong reach B production, The ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" inform that a big hit will be achieved. Then, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, display is started in a manner in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" are arranged on the front side and the enemy character "Robo" is on the back side, and the low base is weak. In the introductory part of the Reach B production, the ally character "Mume" is arranged so that it is not on the front side and the enemy character "Boingo" is not on the back side (the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are on the left and right). face-to-face). By doing so, with regard to the low-base weak reach B production in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana", who are informed that a big hit will be made, are on the front side, and the enemy character "Robo" is on the front side. ' is on the far side, the player can empathize with the game, and the player can easily intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, the ally character is a character that is given a benefit if it wins the battle, and the enemy character is a character that is not given a benefit if it wins the battle. ” and “Nana” are displayed on the front side with their backs turned, the enemy character “Robo” is displayed on the back side with their backs turned, and the friendly characters “Jam” and “Nana” and the enemy character “Robo ”, and the relatively high expectation of the low base strong reach B effect is that the direction of the player and the direction of the ally characters “Jam” and “Nana” are the same direction, so the player This makes it easier for the player to empathize with the player, and makes the player more likely to recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

In addition, in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B production, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position including the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part. As a result, the player who has been paying attention to the title characters will naturally look at the friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" when the title characters disappear.

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base weak reach A and B effects, and a low base weak reach A and B effect with a longer effect time than the low base weak reach A and B effects. Strong base reach A to C effects can be executed. The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Also, the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the low-base strong reach A to C effects all use dialogue subtitles. Then, in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles displayed in the title display part are continuously displayed in the introduction part, while the low base In the strong reach A to C productions, the title characters are displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles in the title display part. By doing so, the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, and the long-running low-base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so as not to cover the title characters and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, and the expectation of a big hit is relatively high. In low-base, low-reach A and B productions, which have a low level and short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title characters overlaps, the dialogue subtitles are also paid attention to by finishing the display of the title characters first. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide the title character and dialogue subtitles to the player, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, if the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, in the subsequent introductory part, the production will continue until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title characters are finished. Since the scene does not switch, it is possible to draw attention to the dialogue subtitles after drawing attention to the title characters.

Also, when the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title characters is not output. It becomes easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performances include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is reported. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production is composed of multiple characters ("Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production, the display of the title characters is started at an enlarged size where only a part of the plurality of characters is visible, and from the enlarged size The display size is reduced step by step, and the title characters are displayed in such a reduced size that all of the characters can be seen.By doing this, the title display with the lowest base reach performance and the high base reach A to D performances. In the part, the characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which only a part of the characters are visible, and then the size is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which all the characters are visible, so that the player can pay attention to the title characters. can.

In addition, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect is started, the movable body 32 is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and after the movable body 32 is operated, the movable body 32 is initialized. A background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period in which the falling effect is executed until the movable body 32 returns to the position, and when the movable body 32 returns to the initial position, all of the characters constituting the title characters are not visible. In addition, the display of the title characters is started in an enlarged size in which the display area is filled up and the background becomes invisible, and then the reduced size title characters and the background dedicated to the title display are displayed. By doing so, the title characters can be displayed in an impactful manner, and at the same time, the background can be switched without causing a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (high base reach system common title), high base reach A ~ In the introduction part of D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for the introductory part (brightness data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect A table (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performances include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is reported. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production is composed of multiple characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production, the title display part is ended by expanding and displaying a plurality of characters from the state where a plurality of characters are displayed, The background at the start of the introductory part is displayed, so that the player pays attention to the title characters in the title display part, and the title characters are preferably used to display the background corresponding to the next introductory part. You can switch to .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (high base reach system common title), high base reach A ~ In the introduction part of D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for the introductory part (brightness data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect A table (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach AC effects. The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Also, unlike the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions (T1-1 to 2) and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production (T2-1 to 3) In both cases, the title display part consists of the title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the end of the display from the fixed position display. It consists of a title end period until In both the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions and the title display parts in the low base strong reach A to C productions, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period Display the title characters such that the is longer than the title end period. By doing so, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is maximized. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title character. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position is displayed from the fixed position display. By setting the time to be longer than the title end period until the end of , it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period is common. By doing so, you can make the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super reach effect both in the normal state and in the probability variable state which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super ready-to-win effect in the normal state and the super ready-to-win effect in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. Also, unlike the execution time of the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) and the execution time of the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state (T4) In both cases, the title display part consists of the title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the end of the display from the fixed position display. It consists of a title end period until Then, in both the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state and the title display part in the super reach effect in the variable state, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is the title end period. Causes title characters to be displayed longer than . By doing so, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable probability state, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is maximized. You can draw attention to the type of characters. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position will be displayed from the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time to be longer than the title end period of , it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the relationship between the execution time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is longer than the execution time of the title display part (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the super reach effect in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance executed in the short and variable probability state is relatively short, the game in the variable probability state can be progressed at a good tempo, while the title display in the super reach performance executed in the normal state. Since the execution time of the part is relatively long, it can be firmly agitated.

In addition, regardless of the type of the super reach performance executed in the probability variable state, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the low-base weak reach A and B performances, which have a low degree of expectation for a big hit among the super reach performances executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part is relatively short in the super ready-to-win performance executed in a variable probability state, a big win can be expected only by executing the super ready-to-win` performance.

In addition, the super reach effect executed in the variable probability state has the same execution time of the super reach effect and the execution time of the title display part regardless of the type, but among the super reach effects executed in the normal state Low base with low expectations for big hits Low reach Expectations for big hits are higher than A and B productions, and regardless of the type of super reach production executed in the variable probability state, the execution time of the super reach production and the execution time of the title display part Even if they are the same, a big win can be expected only by executing the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, among the super reach productions executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions, which have higher expectations for big hits than the low base weak reach A and B productions, is the low base weak reach. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the AB production, and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach A to C productions, is the low base strong reach. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the productions A to C. By doing so, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer in the super ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be strongly encouraged.

In addition, among the super reach performances executed in the normal state, a title display period in which the title characters are displayed at a fixed position in the low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than the low base weak reach A and B performances. is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB production, and the title display period in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach A to C productions. is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A to C effects. In this way, in the normal state, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, the longer the execution time of the super ready-to-win performance, so that the player can be strongly encouraged.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes both a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title display part includes a title start period from when the title character is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, a title display period during which the title character is displayed at a fixed position, and a display end from the fixed position display. It consists of a title end period until In the title display part, title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title character by making the title display period displayed at the fixed position the longest. Also, by setting the title start period until the title character is displayed at the fixed position to be longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to stimulate which title character is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the relationship between the execution time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effects include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and low base strong reach A to C production, the title characters are white and red, which is higher than the white form. It is possible to make it display in the form. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the corresponding expectation level suggestive display is displayed, and then the title characters are displayed in a size larger than the expectation level suggestive display. At this time, the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in a common manner in both cases of displaying the title characters in white and in red. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach production and the low-base strong reach A to C productions are larger in size than the expectation level suggestive display, and the form of the title characters suggests the level of expectation. Therefore, the attention of the player is attracted, but by displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation suggestive display is performed in a common manner whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red, attention can be drawn to the subsequent title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low-base strong reach B effect and a low-base strong reach C effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base strong reach B effect. The low base strong reach B and C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the expectation indication display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the second mode (4 stars ) to display the expectation indication. At this time, both the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect are highlighted in a common manner. By doing so, even when the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach B production, it is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach C production. Even when displaying the expectation level suggestive display, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlight display a common mode.

In addition, the expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B production, the expectation is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, In the low base strong reach C presentation, the expectation level is suggested by N+1 (4) objects, and the highlighting is performed for each star-shaped object. Even when five objects are highlighted, they are highlighted in a common manner. By doing so, it is possible to perform highlighting in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. can reduce development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, the time during which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are common. By doing so, the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects are made common, thereby reducing the development cost. can be done.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, a common expectation suggestive sound is output both when one star-shaped object is highlighted and when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. . By doing so, a common expectation suggestive sound is output whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This can reduce development costs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for title display (common title for strong base type) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C production, and control the low base strong reach In the introductory parts of the B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data tables for the respective introductory parts (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common luminance data table (strong base system common title) in the title display part, but the low base strong reach B effect In the title display part, the brightness data table for title display in low base strong reach B production (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part in low base strong reach B production (strong reach system strong reach B title )) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect (the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect It may be configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title)) composed of brightness data corresponding to the low base strong reach Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display in the title display part of the B effect and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, suitable light emission according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in this manner, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effect, and the high base reach AD effects. Low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, and high base reach A-D production are either a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters or an introduction part until the production result is announced. Also includes In addition, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effects, and the high base reach A to D effects, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects. Then, in the expectation suggestive display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the second star-shaped object is highlighted while continuing the highlighting of the first star-shaped object. After that, the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended, and the highlighting of the third star-shaped object is performed. By doing so, in the expectation suggestion display, the highlighting of the second star-shaped object starts before the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but the highlighting of the third star-shaped object ends. Since the highlighting of the objects does not start until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is completed, it is easy to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation of a big win.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, the expectation suggestive sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation suggestive sound for the highlighting of one star-shaped object is finished, the next A sound indicating the degree of expectation of highlighting for the object is output. By doing so, the emphasized sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasized sound for highlighting the next object, so that the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation can be easily recognized.

In addition, the indication indicating the degree of expectation is composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects and the character "expectation" indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation. ” in a size that overlaps. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to both the plurality of star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display and the character indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation by highlighting the star-shaped object. .

In this embodiment, when highlighting some star-shaped objects out of a plurality of star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is performed with characters indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate expectations. Although it is superimposed, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects may be superimposed on characters indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach AD effects. Low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, and high base reach A-D production are the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced. Also includes In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and multiple displays can be displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production. An expectation indication made up of star-shaped objects can be displayed. Then, in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the low-base strongest reach effects, and the high-base reach A to D effects, the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. By doing so, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production. Since the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggesting display, it is possible to prevent the pending display from being erroneously recognized as the expectation suggesting display.

In particular, the maximum number of active indications corresponding to pending indications and initiated variable indications will match the maximum number of star objects that make up the expectations suggestive indication, but the maximum number of pending indications and active indications Even if low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects are executed in the displayed situation, the pending display and active display constitute the expectation indication display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the maximum number of is displayed.

Further, by erasing the pending display when the single-color display effect in which the display area is displayed in a single color before the start of the title display part is executed, the pending display can be ended without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production and high base reach A to D production, brightness data table for title display (common title for strong base system, high base, high base reach system Common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to D production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction , strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to D production, the game is played using the brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. Since the effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the luminance data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach production A table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a structure, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to C effects. The low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to C production include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the production result is announced. . In addition, in the title display part in the low-base strong reach A production / high-base reach A production, it is possible to display the expectation indication display composed of the first number (3) star-shaped objects, and the low-base strong reach B production / In the title display part in the high base reach B production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the first number, and low base strong reach C production / high In the title display part in the base reach C production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of star-shaped objects with a third number (4), which is larger than the second number. The number difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the number difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5 ), and the expectation of a big hit when the low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the low-base strong reach corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference between the degree of expectation for a big hit when B effect/high base reach B effect is executed is when the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. is larger than the difference between the expectation level of big win in , and the expectation level of big win when the low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing so, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), the second number ( 3.5) to the third number (4), the amount of increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same, but the number is increased from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). Since the amount of increase in the expectation of a big hit is greater when the number increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than in the case of While it is possible to make the player expect to win a big win more than the number of objects, it is possible to avoid excessive expectations of a big win when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect, and the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect is greater than the third number (4). An expectation suggestive display composed of a fourth number (4.5) star-shaped object can be displayed, and the number difference (0.5 ) is smaller than the number difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and corresponds to the fourth number (4.5). is executed and the difference between the jackpot expectation degree when the low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed, is the third number (4 ) and the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the first number (3) are executed. It is larger than the difference between the jackpot expectation when By doing so, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is increased from the first number (3) to the third number (4). to the fourth number (4.5), the amount of increase in the number of star-shaped objects is smaller than the increase from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Since the amount of increase in the expected degree of jackpot increases when the number is increased from (4) to the fourth number (4.5), the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the less the number of increased star-shaped objects increases. But you can expect it to be a big hit.

The difference between the numbers (4) and (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the numbers (3) and (4) is 1. Yes, and the third number (4) is higher than when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is increased by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4) If the number is increased by 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5), it can be expected that the player will win even more.

In addition, when the high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the expectation of the big hit and the high base reach B corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference between the expectation of a big hit when the effect is executed is the expectation of a big win when the low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the second number (3.5 ) is greater than the difference from the big hit expectation degree when the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to ) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, will be a big hit when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases. can.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than the low base weak reach A and B performances. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. And the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production is longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production, and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production While the expectation level suggestive display is displayed, the expectation level suggestive display is not displayed in the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions. By doing so, the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions with relatively high expectations is higher than the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B productions with relatively low expectations. Long, and while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. It is possible to make the player recognize sensibly that the strong base reach A to C productions have a higher degree of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B productions.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production is composed of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions does not have a prologue display period, and consists only of the title character display period. is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing so, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Also, it is possible to let the player recognize sensibly that the low base strong reach A to C productions have higher expectations than the low base weak reach A and B productions.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 can execute a low-base strongest reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than a low-base strong reach A-C production in a normal state, and the title display part in the low-base strong reach A-C production is , It consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title character is displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), and the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is the prologue display period The title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production. . By doing so, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions. It is possible to let the player recognize sensibly that the strongest base reach performance is higher in expectations than the low base strong reach A to C performances.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances with a higher expectation of big hit than the low base weak reach A and B performances. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. In addition, in the low base weak reach A and B productions, there is no case where a big win is reported as a result of the performance, and there is a case where a loss is reported as a result of the performance, and a case where another super reach performance is developed. In the low-base strong reach A to C productions, there are cases where a big hit is reported and cases where a loss is reported as a result of the performance. Then, the expectation suggesting display is displayed in the title display parts in the low base strong reach A to C productions, while the expectation suggesting display is not displayed in the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions. By doing so, while the expectation level indication display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A ~ C production that may be directly notified that it will be a big hit, the fact that it will be a big hit is displayed directly. Since the expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production that is not notified, it is possible to prevent the low base weak reach A, B production from giving an excessive sense of expectation. .

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, it is possible to display the title letters in a golden mode that confirms that it will develop into another super reach production, so the expectation indication is displayed. Even the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B effects that are not displayed can attract the player's attention.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. In addition, low base strong reach A to C effects and low base strongest reach may be executed via selection effects using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach effects, and low base strong reach A to C It is possible to display the expectation indication display together with the title characters in the production, the title display part of the low base strongest reach and the selection production. Then, when displaying the expectation suggestive display in the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach title display part, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, When the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the selection effect, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed step by step. By doing so, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach title display part, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed. While it is displayed in stages, when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the selection effect, the expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so only the title display part In addition, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the step-by-step display of the expectation level suggestion display even in the previous selection effect.

The selection performance is a performance that changes step by step from a super ready-to-win performance with a low expectation of big win to a super ready-to-win performance with high expectation of big win by operating the push button 31B, and it is necessary to change one stage in the selection performance. The time, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach production, is displayed in one step in the expectation indication display of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach. , that is, the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, and the gradual change in the selection effect can be given a sense of speed.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes from the current super ready-to-win performance to a super ready-to-win performance in which the expectation of a big hit is higher by one stage than the current super ready-to-win performance, and each stage changes requires a change to the next stage. The number of times the push button 31B is operated increases. By doing so, the player can be impatient as the degree of expectation for a big hit in the super ready-to-win effect increases.

Further, when the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach are selected by the selection effects, the title display part of the super reach effect is started. By doing so, even if the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach are executed via the selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so which super reach effect is finally executed. It is easy for the player to determine whether the

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a mode with a larger movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. This is the situation after a big win has already been reported, and the control to the big win game state can be congratulated by further moving the title characters of the big win start performance.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the title characters of the big win start performance in a mode with a larger movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win performance, the control to the big win game state can be congratulated.

Also, in the title display part of the super reach effect, when the title characters are displayed, the background dedicated to the title display is displayed (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D) , and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the background of the title characters of the big-win start effect can be greatly moved to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big-win game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to the title display in the super reach effect is a still image, but the background dedicated to the title display in the super reach effect may be a moving image. The background of the title characters in the start performance is displayed in a mode with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the super ready-to-win performance, thereby congratulating the player on being controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation facilitating characters (small) are displayed in a mode with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) displayed in the introductory part prompt the player to perform an action (operation), and can be moved larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part. , the action (operation) by the player can be intuitively prompted.

In addition, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B, and the operation prompting character (small) suggests a more advantageous situation than the operation prompting character (small). Large) can be displayed, and both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, by moving the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, the player can intuitively Action (operation) can be prompted.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an operation (operation) by displaying the operation-promoting characters (small) in a mode with greater movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect. Also in such a configuration, both the operation-promoting characters (small) and the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. Regardless of whether the characters are (small) or operation-promoting characters (large), by moving the characters larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an operation (operation).

In addition, since the number of characters (3) in the operation prompt character (small) is smaller than the number of characters in the Super Reach effect title characters (7 to 13), even if the operation prompt character (small) is moved a lot, the contents of the characters will not change. can be recognized.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display explanation characters for explaining the content of the super ready-to-win effect. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. In this way, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner with greater movement than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters. can.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters by displaying the explanatory characters in a manner with greater movement than the title characters in the Super Reach effect. .

In addition, since the explanation character has a content suggesting that the super ready-to-win effect is advantageous, it is possible to further draw attention to the addition of the explanation character.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base weak reach A, B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects with higher expectations for big hits than the low-base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is notified. . Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so that the character size is larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C productions with relatively high expectations are the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions with relatively low expectations. Since the size of the characters is displayed to be larger than the title characters, you can feel that the low base strong reach A to C production is higher than the low base weak reach A and B productions. can be recognized.

Also, the number of characters (10) composing the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) composing the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, The display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing so, the display area size occupied by one character of the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C productions is larger, so the low base strong reach B and C production has a low base weak reach. It is possible to sensuously recognize that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the A and B performances.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 24]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the effect result is reported. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a ready-to-win state before the title display part in the super ready-to-win performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size to a smaller decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size larger than the size of the decoration pattern (small). By doing so, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title characters are noticed in the title display part. be able to.

Also, any character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing so, while the decorative pattern (large) can be reliably recognized when the reach mode is set, after that, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to become the decorative pattern (small), and the decoration is performed. Since each character constituting the title character is displayed in a size larger than the pattern (small), the title character can be noticed in the title display part.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start presentation are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing so, the title character of the big hit start effect is displayed while the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super ready-to-win effect is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether it is a big win or not. The situation is after the fact that a big win has already been announced, and by displaying the title characters of the big win start effect larger than the operation promoting characters (small), it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, the title character of the jackpot start production is composed of ``BIG'' or ``REGULAR'' and ``BONUS'', and after ``BIG'' or ``REGULAR'' is displayed at the upper part of the fixed position, ``BONUS'' is displayed. is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and after "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position gradually expand Is displayed. When "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the fixed position upper part and the fixed position lower part, the character size is displayed in the smallest size, and "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed. The size of characters when is displayed at the upper and lower positions of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters of the big-win start performance are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the operation-promoting characters (small), so that the control to the big-win game state is more celebrated. be able to.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, even if attention is paid to any character, the title character of the big win start presentation is displayed larger than the operation promotion character (small), so that the control to the big win game state is further celebrated. can be done.

In addition, it is possible to display a special promotion character display operation promotion character (large) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large) is larger than the title character of the jackpot start effect. By being displayed, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, by displaying the smallest character of the character strings that make up the operation promotion character (large) larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect, any character Even if the player pays attention, since the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed larger than the title characters of the big win start effect, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. It is a situation after the fact that a big win has already been reported, and it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big win game state by displaying the title characters of the big win start production larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production. can.

In addition, the super ready-to-win production includes a plurality of types of super ready-to-win production with different title characters, and the title characters of the jackpot start production are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win production, so that the big hit game is played. You can be blessed to be controlled by the state.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win effect. Therefore, even if attention is paid to any character, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance, so that the control to the jackpot game state can be celebrated more.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed after that are displayed larger than the operation-promoting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters. can be done.

Further, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A, B production is developed, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production starts. By doing this, in a series of flows, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part, and the title character that is displayed after that is displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small). You can draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings that make up the operation prompting characters (small). Therefore, it is possible to draw the attention to the title character even if the attention is paid to any character.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Also, the title characters of the big win start performance corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed after the fact that the big win will be achieved by the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). display large. By doing so, while the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B productions is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, the title characters in the big win start production are displayed. The displayed situation is the situation after the fact that the big win has already been reported, and the big win game state is achieved by displaying the title characters of the big win start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. can be blessed to be controlled by In addition, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that, are larger than the operation prompt characters (small). It is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, it develops into the low base weak reach A, B production, the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production starts, and the low base weak reach A, B production After the notification of the big win is given by , the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed. By doing so, in a series of flows, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that are displayed to promote operation. By displaying the characters larger than the characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and after that, after being notified that the low base weak reach A and B effects will result in a big hit. By displaying the title characters of the big win start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, the control to the big win game state can be congratulated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. This is a situation after the fact that a big hit has already been reported, and the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance, thereby controlling the game state to a big win game state. can congratulate.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears is one of the character strings composing the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. longer than the time from when the part is displayed to when the entire character string is not displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the big win start production with congratulatory intentions can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production aimed at arousing the possibility of winning a big win are displayed. By lengthening it, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

Further, after the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed, the title characters of the big win start performance are switched to the right-handed promotion image (small) and the right-handed promotion image (large) suggesting the operation method in the big win game state. , The operation method suggested by the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) after a predetermined period of time after switching to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) (moving the game ball to the right) Control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting toward the game area 2R) is performed, and the time to switch from the title character of the jackpot start effect to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) is shorter than the time for ending the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing so, the title character of the jackpot start production is switched to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) in a short time, and after a predetermined period of time, the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (small) are switched. Since advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the promotion image (large), changing the operation method from the period of ending the title characters of the jackpot start effect will cause inconvenience to the player. You can prevent it from becoming profitable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title character of the big win start performance is displayed for a longer time than the operation promoting character (small). By doing so, the title character of the big hit start effect is displayed while the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super ready-to-win effect is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether it is a big win or not. The situation is a situation after the fact that a big win has already been announced, and by displaying the title character of the big win start effect for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small), it is possible to control to the big win game state. can congratulate.

In addition, the operation-promoting character (small) is displayed until the prompting operation is performed or the effective time of the prompting operation has passed. After (small) is displayed, the prompt operation is not performed, and the time after which the prompt operation is valid is longer than the time. By doing so, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the time when the prompting operation is not performed and the title characters are displayed, thereby winning a big hit. It is possible to congratulate being controlled to a game state.

Also, the time from when all the character strings constituting the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed to when at least part of the character strings are not displayed is longer than the time when the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the big win start effect with the meaning of congratulations are properly visible is longer than the time during which the operation-promoting characters (small) intended to prompt the player to operate are displayed. It is possible to give satisfaction to the player.

In addition, it is possible to display operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation-promoting characters (small). The operation facilitating characters (large) are displayed to prompt the operation after the facilitating introduction effect is executed. The time during which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by the prompting introduction display are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. can give.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer time than the operation-promoting characters (small). can draw attention to.

Also, the time from when all the character strings forming the title characters are displayed to when at least part of the character string disappears is longer than the time during which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display can be seen properly becomes longer than the time during which the promotion character display is displayed for the purpose of prompting the player to take action, and the title characters can be noticed.

In addition, it is possible to display operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation-promoting characters (small). The operation facilitating character (large) is displayed to prompt the operation after the facilitating introduction effect is executed. The time during which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is displayed becomes longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by the prompting introduction display are displayed, so that the title characters can be noticed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Also, the title characters of the big win start performance corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed after the fact that the big win will be achieved by the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed as operation promoting characters ( small) is displayed for a longer period of time. By doing so, while the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B productions is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, the title characters in the big win start production are displayed. The displayed situation is the situation after the fact that a big win has already been reported, and the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. , it is possible to congratulate being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By displaying, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, and high base reach A to B in the variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. D effect can be executed. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A ~ C production, high base reach A ~ D production in the variable state are the title display part that displays the corresponding title character and until the production result is notified An introductory part and both are included. In addition, low-base strong reach A to C productions have higher expectations for big hits than low-base weak reach A and B productions, and high-base reach B to D productions have higher expectations for big hits than high-base reach A productions. The high-base reach A production has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low-base weak reach A and B productions. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, high base reach A production, and high base reach B to D production, the expectation level indication display is displayed, and the low base weak reach A and B production title display parts does not display the expectation indication. By doing so, the low-base weak reach A and B productions in the normal state have lower expectations for a big hit than the low-base strong reach A to C productions in the normal state. Although the degree suggestive display is displayed, the expectation degree suggestive display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A, B performance, so that the expectation of a big hit by the low base weak reach A, B performance is not excessively expected. On the other hand, the high-base reach A production in the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of hitting the jackpot than the high-base reach B-D production in the variable probability state, but it is a big hit than the low-base weak reach A and B productions in the normal state. Since the level of expectation is high, by displaying the expectation indication display in both the high base reach A production and the high base reach B to D production, both in the case of the high base reach A production and in the high base reach B to D production, You can also expect it to be a big hit.

[Effect 34]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super reach effect both in the normal state and in the probability variable state which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super ready-to-win effect in the normal state and the super ready-to-reach effect in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. The title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state. By doing so, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, and the game in the variable probability state can be advanced at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency of executing the super reach effect in the variable probability state is higher than the frequency of executing the super reach effect in the normal state, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is the title of the super reach effect in the normal state. By being shorter than the display part, it is possible to advance the game in the variable probability state at a good tempo.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable state, the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system, high base reach system common title) to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, Weak reach type weak reach B introduced, strong reach type strong reach A introduced, strong reach type strong reach B introduced, strong reach type strong reach C introduced, high base reach type reach A introduced, high base reach type reach B introduced, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base strong reach A to C effects. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effects include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. Then, in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and the title characters are displayed in the low base strongest reach production. In the part, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from the enlarged display, and when controlled to the time saving state B (play time), the play time start effect is performed in the play time start effect. The title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from enlarged display, as in the title display part in the low-base strongest reach performance. By doing so, when it is controlled to the time saving state B (play time), in the play time start performance, the title character of the play time start performance is replaced with the title of the low base strongest reach performance with relatively high expectation of big hit. Since it is displayed in the same display mode as the characters, it is possible to recognize that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

Also, when the title characters are erased in the play time start production, the title characters are erased while expanding in the same way as when the title characters are erased in the title display part in the low base strongest reach production. erase. By doing so, even when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect with relatively high expectations for big wins are erased. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the time saving state B (free time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. When the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed in the play time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the play time start effect is super reach. It is larger than the size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the presentation. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach effect, while it is not yet clear whether or not it will be a big hit, while the title character in the play time start effect is in the time saving state B ( play time), and the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, so the time saving state B (play time ) can be blessed to be controlled by

In addition, the super reach effect includes multiple types of super reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are more than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect. is also big. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters of the play time start production are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach production, so that the time saving state B (play time) You can be blessed to be controlled by

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the play time start effect is larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, no matter which character is focused on, the title character of the play time start effect is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so it is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). can be more blessed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. When the control is made to the time saving state B (play time), the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed in the play time start effect, and the display time of the title characters of the play time start effect corresponds to the super ready-to-win effect. Longer than the display time of the title character. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach effect, while it is not yet clear whether it will be a big hit or not, while the title character in the play time start effect is in the time saving state B ( play time), and the title character of the play time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so congratulations on being controlled to the time saving state B (play time) can do.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed until at least part of the character strings are not displayed is the number of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. It is longer than the time from when a part of the character string is displayed to when the entire character string is not displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the play time start production with congratulatory meaning can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production, which is intended to arouse the possibility of winning a big hit, is displayed. also becomes longer, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters forming the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times characters until the play time. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed in a larger size than the characters constituting the remaining count characters until the play time, so that the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect can be noticed. .

In addition, the super reach production includes low base weak reach A and B productions and low base strong reach A to C productions that have higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B productions. The count character is displayed during execution of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is not displayed during execution of the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing so, in the low-base weak reach A and B effects with low expectations for big hits, the number of remaining characters until the play time is displayed, so it is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the time-saving state B (play time). On the other hand, in the low base strong reach A to C productions with high expectations for big hits, by not displaying the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, attention can be paid to the contents of the production. In addition, in the time-saving state B (play time), a big win more advantageous than in the normal state is likely to occur, so when the number of remaining times until the time-saving state B (play time) is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when the selection performance develops to the low base strong reach A to C performances without going through the low base weak reach A and B performances, the character of the remaining number of times until the play time is not displayed even during the execution of the selection performance. By doing so, the remaining number of times until the play time characters will not interfere with the selection effect that determines the super reach effect above the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the remaining number of times until the time saving state B (play time) When there is little, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when it is notified that a big hit will be achieved in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is not displayed again, and the game is controlled to the big win game state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances are performed. Then, when it is notified that there will be a gap, the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A to C effects are finished. By doing so, when it is notified that the low base strong reach A to C production will be a big hit, by not displaying the remaining number of characters until the play time again, the time saving state B (play time) When the remaining number of times is small, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated. In addition, when it is notified that the low base strong reach A to C production will be missed, after the low base strong reach A to C production is completed, the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time are displayed again, so the time saving state B ( If the remaining number of times until the play time) is small, it can be quickly relieved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. Further, in the operation prompting effects A to D that are executed at timings related to the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters forming the operation facilitating characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times characters until the play time. By doing so, the operation-promoting character (small) is displayed in a larger size than the characters constituting the remaining number of characters until the play time. Actions (operations) can be prompted to the player.

Further, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects among the super reach effects, when displaying the operation promoting characters (small) in the operation promoting effect A executed before the title display part, play time In contrast to the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is displayed at the same time, when the characters of the operation promotion (small) are displayed in the operation promotion effect D executed at the end of the introductory part, the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is not displayed. . By doing this, before developing into a low base strong reach A ~ C production, by keeping the number of characters displayed until the play time at the same time as the promotion character display operation promotion character (small), the time saving state It can be made aware of the number of times up to B (play time), and by not displaying the remaining number of times characters up to the play time in the operation prompting characters (small) of the introductory part, it is possible to tell whether it will be a big hit or not. can draw attention.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part, the situation is more advantageous than the operation promotion character (small) and the operation promotion character (small) While only the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed among the operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest ) can also be displayed, and when the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the remaining number of times characters until the play time are not displayed at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a big win is notified, and also to display the operation prompting characters (large), suggesting a more advantageous situation.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system), and super reach effect In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 . By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. In addition, after the super ready-to-win effect is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters of the big win start effect corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). Before the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed, the remaining number of times characters until the play time are erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the big win start effect is the remaining number of times characters until the play time. is larger than the size of the characters that make up the By doing so, the situation in which the title character of the big win start production is displayed is the situation after the fact that the big win has already been announced, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time are unnecessary, so that the big win start production Before the title characters are displayed, the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time are erased, and the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time. Therefore, it is possible to congratulate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, regardless of the number of remaining times up to the time-saving state B (play time), the size of the characters constituting the characters of the remaining number of times up to the play time is the same, and constitutes the title characters of the jackpot start effect. The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of characters until the play time. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start effect constitute the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (play time). Since it is displayed larger than the characters, it is possible to congratulate being controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 first enters the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening in the time saving state B (play time). Variable display is performed using a time-saving B start variation pattern having a longer variation time than the variation pattern normally used in . By doing so, in the first variation in the time saving state B (play time), the play time start effect can be executed in the variation period corresponding to the time saving B start variation pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system), and super reach effect In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 . By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects by changing from a white mode to a red or gold mode. Then, when the title characters are changed from the white mode to the red or gold mode in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the time during which the title characters are displayed in the red or gold mode is greater. The title characters are displayed in a white manner so as to be longer than the displayed time. By doing so, when changing the title characters from the white mode to the red or gold mode in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the red or gold mode, that is, the changed mode. Since the title characters are displayed longer than the title characters in the white form, that is, in the form before the change, the change from white to red or gold can be reliably recognized.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, there are cases where the title characters are changed from white to red or gold, and cases where they remain white. to red or gold, when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white color is changed to the red or gold color, a specific sound is output, and the title characters are changed to white. If the mode is not changed, the specific sound is output without changing the white mode when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. By doing so, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from white to red or gold at a specific timing, a specific sound is output, and a white character is output at a specific timing. Since the specific sound is output even when the mode does not change, it can be expected that the output of the specific sound will change to the red or gold mode.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from the white mode to another mode, when the title characters are changed to the red mode and when the gold mode is changed, the specific sound is output, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which type of mode changes when the specific sound is output.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed by changing from a white mode to a red mode or a gold mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the red mode. is possible. In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, the white form is the same regardless of whether the title characters are changed from white to red or gold. It is displayed so as to change to a mode and then to change to a red mode or a gold mode. By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, the title characters are changed from white to red, and from white to gold. , change to the common display mode and then change to the red mode or the gold mode. Therefore, by changing from the white mode to the common display mode, the common display mode changes to the red mode or the gold mode. Until then, you can expect to change to the gold mode with a higher chance of winning a big hit than the red mode until the end.

Also, a common display mode is a mode in which the characters forming the title characters are illuminated, and change to a red mode or a gold mode when the light is clear. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the change to a red mode or a gold mode by shining the characters forming the title characters.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) , and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is made common for two different super reach effects, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is independent. By using the corresponding luminance data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will be achieved, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base weak reach A, B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects with higher expectations for big hits than the low-base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is notified. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. , Control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the brightness data for the low base weak reach A effect The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the luminance data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach system weak reach B (Introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the game effect lamp using the luminance data table for the low base strong reach A production (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the low base strong In the introductory part of the reach C effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C effect (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase and using the luminance data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably extend the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will occur, resulting in a suitable title. can be displayed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 provides low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base strong reach A to C. It is possible to execute a low-base strongest reach performance with a higher expectation of a big hit than the performance. Low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A-C effects, and low-base strongest reach effects have a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. each of which includes In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for a common title display part (common title for strong reach system), and in a title display part for low base strongest reach production, for title display for low base strongest reach production. The brightness data table (strongest reach type strongest reach title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach type weak Reach A introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the game is played using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B production (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). Control the effect lamp 9, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for low base strong reach A production (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), low In the introduction part of base strong reach B production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for low base strong reach B production (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the introduction part of low base strong reach C production , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for low base strong reach C production (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of low base strongest reach production, low base strongest reach production A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase and using the luminance data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably extend the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will occur, resulting in a suitable title. can be displayed. Furthermore, the most anticipated low-base, strongest reach presentation can be enhanced by providing dedicated luminance data tables for the title display part and the introductory part, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed by changing from a white mode to a red mode or a gold mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the red mode. is possible. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120, when the color of the title characters is not changed in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, a luminance data table in which the luminance data when the title change effect is not performed is set: When the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach type common title (white) and the color of the title characters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, the title change production Brightness data table with brightness data set when performing: Control the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach common title (red) or the weak reach common title (gold), low base weak reach A, B production Regardless of whether the color of the title character is changed in the introductory part of the game effect lamp using the brightness data table for the common introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) control 9. In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B productions, the brightness data corresponding to the introduction part is obtained even when the title characters are not changed to red or gold and when they are changed to the second mode. Using a common table prevents an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part uses a brightness data table corresponding to each. , and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is the title start period from the start of the title character display until it is displayed at the fixed position, and the title after the title character is displayed at the fixed position. Including the display period and the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 creates a luminance data table ( The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach title start), and the brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title display period is used during the title display period and the title end period. to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from the start of the display of the title characters until the title characters are displayed at the fixed position in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters are displayed at the fixed position. By using the luminance data table corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title character is displayed, and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, the luminance data table corresponding to each is used. It is possible to suitably set the period until notification of whether or not to be performed, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, a brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or a brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and the title end period One of them is a common brightness data table, and the other is a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set, so that the brightness data table corresponds to the title start period, or the title display period and title end period. By making one of the brightness data tables common, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each for the other, low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B Depending on whether it is an effect or not, a suitable effect can be produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

Moreover, it is preferable to execute not only the ready-to-win effect based on the variation pattern, but also the effect using the movable body. By outputting an effect presentation corresponding to the movable body and the sound of the movable body, it is possible to effectively execute the ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving interest.
Also, when the movable body effect is executed, as described above, it is preferable to perform appropriate control according to the circumstances such as when the effect effect and the movable body sound are output, but initialization is involved, when the power is turned on, and the like. Also, it is common for models to display a startup preparation display when the power is turned on, but if recovery screen display control and operability confirmation control are executed simultaneously during the startup preparation display, there is a possibility that each information cannot be grasped accurately. . Preferably, each control is executed in sequence to solve this problem.
The actual machine control will be explained in detail below.

(Characteristic part 132SG form)
[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The production control means is
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body presentation using the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a portion that can execute a movable body announcement in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
An effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 60, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A. part),
The sound output means can output a movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body announcement shown in FIG. 60, the part where the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 42 and By executing the operation confirmation control processing new in FIG.
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform effect movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined action (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A is moved up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed at the time of power-on with initialization, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. when the effect movement control and the output of the movable body effect sound are restricted, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body effect is executed after the predetermined period, at least the effect movement control and The display of the effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the upper movable body 32B, and the upper movable body 32B are displayed. During the initial action period of the body 132SG101, a starting prize is generated, and based on the starting prize, the movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 are activated during the initial action period. When the variable display for executing the notice is started, during the execution period of the notice of the movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the movable body and the sound of the notice of the movable body corresponding to the notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output is not executed, the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. After the initial action period of the chance button 631B and the frame movable body 132SG101, the starting winning occurs, and when the variable display for executing the movable body announcement is started based on the starting winning, the movable body will be displayed during the execution period of the movable body announcement. The operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a notice and the portion where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the effect movement control is limited, the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect sound is output, and when the movable body effect is executed after the predetermined period, the effect movement control is limited. , the effect display is displayed, and the movable body effect sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32A, and the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 start winning during the initial operation period, and based on the starting winning, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body. 132SG101, when the variable display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the initial operation period of the 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body, while the image display device 5 , the effect display 132SG407 is displayed, and a movable object announcement sound corresponding to the movable object announcement is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. When the start winning occurs after the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the variable display for executing the movable body notice is started based on the starting win. , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body notice during the execution period of the movable body notice, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movable object effect is executed with the variable display started during the confirmation movable control, the movable object effect is given to the player while the confirmation movable control is not hindered by the effect movable control. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating the execution by effect display or by outputting a movable body production sound.

The game machine of form 1-2 is
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the movable object effect is executed than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the expectation of the jackpot is set higher than if it is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the movable body effect control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed after the end of the predetermined period, while the movable body effect sound is output. is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the initial operation period of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start During the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101, based on the start-up prize, a variable display that executes the movable body notice during the initial operation period. is started, while the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body notice and the output of the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body notice. , on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and on-board movable body 132SG101. The part where the output of the moving object notification sound in response to the moving object notification is not executed),
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is performed, the movable body effect is performed during the predetermined period. When executed, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started). During the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when activated by , a start-up prize is generated, and based on the start-up prize, these on-board movable bodies 32A , the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101. While the operation of the upper movable body 32A is not executed, after the initial operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the board movable body 32A is again operated as a movable body notice. the part where the action is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the production effect is not lowered due to the restricted production movement control in the movable body production, which is highly expected to be controlled in an advantageous state. .

The game machine of form 1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally. It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control to move and (for example, the part that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in 31 and FIG. 43 for the effect control CPU 120),
The confirmation movement control ends when the movement of the second movable body ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the The initial motion of the movable body 132SG101 is completed after the initial motion of the under-board movable body 32B is completed),
The movable body presentation is a presentation using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the movable body announcement is a presentation for moving the on-board movable body 32A),
When the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed at power-on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, The effect movable control is limited, and when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control ends, the limited effect movable control is performed during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a starting prize is generated during the initial operation period of the board upper movable body 32A, the board lower movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101, and these boards are based on the starting prize. When the variable display for executing the movable body announcement is started during the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper movable body 132SG101, the movable body is displayed during the execution period of the movable body announcement. (A part where the effect action of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed as an advance notice, and the effect action of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial action of the lower-board movable body 32B is completed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movement control ends, the effect movement control using the first movable body is executed, so that the confirmation movement control and the effect movement control are indistinguishable. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not run out.

The game machine of form 1-4 is
When the power is turned on with initialization, the effect control means can execute initialization notification corresponding to the initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the speaker 8L , the part that outputs the initialization notification sound from 8R),
The execution period of the confirmation movement control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in FIGS. Initial operation period of movable body 132SG101, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g. , the portion where the initialization notification sound output period from 8R overlaps),
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIGS. The upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a mode corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R are the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, and the chance button 631B. , a portion longer than the initial operation period of the frame upper movable body 132SG101),
After the end of the execution period of the confirmation movement control, when the movable body effect is executed with the variable display started during the execution period of the initialization notification, the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification. When the body effect is executed, the effect movement control and the effect display are performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 78, the on-board movable body 32A , the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101. After the operation is completed, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body advance notice, but the frame LEDs 9a and 9b and the on-board movable body LED 9d, underboard movable body LED 9e, frame upper movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light emission in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification and output of initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the notification corresponding to initialization, if the confirmation movement control is finished, the presentation movement control is executed, and the presentation effect of the movable body presentation is not lowered. can be done.

The game machine of form 1-5 is
The effect control means can execute a look-ahead movable body effect suggesting that the movable body effect will be executed in the variable display prior to the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern in which the movable body effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading movable body notice),
When the look-ahead movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means can perform specific effect movement control for moving the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, effect control The CPU 120 can move up and down a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position by using the on-board movable body 32A as a preliminary advance notice of the movable body 32A),
The execution period of the variable display in which the look-ahead movable body effect is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach out variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the initial action period is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, the start condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, and the look-ahead movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition. in the case, when the look-ahead movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the look-ahead movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period ends, the specific movable control limited during the predetermined period is not performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 79). In the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started and execution of the advance notice of the movable body is determined due to the occurrence of variable display multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial operation control. If the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body overlaps with the period of confirmation operation of each movable body and the period of the initial action control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body. , After the end of the variable display, the effect operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed again as the advance notice of the movable body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display is straddled, the limited specific movement control is not executed during the confirmation movement control, so that the player is not confused by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movement control ends. Amusement machines can be provided.

The game machine of form 1-6 is
In one variable display, the effect control means controls, as the movable body effect, a first movable body effect (for example, the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 80) and when the first movable body effect is executed It is possible to execute a second movable body effect (for example, the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 80) in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The movable body control means is
When the first movable body effect is executed, a first effect movement control for moving the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times part), and
When the second movable body effect is executed, a second effect movement control for moving the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times part), and
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in one variable display started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is performed, the predetermined period When the first movable body effect is executed during, the first effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed,
When the second movable body effect is executed before the limited first effect movement control is performed, the second effect movement control is performed without performing the first effect movement control (for example, As shown in FIG. 80, when the initial motion of the movable body has already been executed during the execution period of the first advance notice of the movable body, the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body is executed after the initial motion of the movable body is completed. is executed, but if the movement of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice has already been executed before the movement of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice, the first movable body The part where the movement of the board movable body 32A as the body announcement is not executed and the movement of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is continuously executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation does not impede the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation, thereby preventing the performance effect from deteriorating. can.

The game machine of form 1-7 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 for the frame top movable body 132SG101). Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the second movable body by a special action for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 56). 2, the part where the production control CPU 120 can execute the decided production to raise the lower board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 120 , a portion that causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initialized;
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E5), the effect When the under-board movable body 32B is raised, the control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, the rainbow flash shown in FIG. 67(B9)),
When the special effect movement control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the effect is determined during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start , a portion that restricts light emission (rainbow flash) in a mode corresponding to the decision effect of the lower board movable body LED 9e during the execution period of the decision effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 1-8 is
The motion mode of the second movable body by the confirmation motion control and the motion mode of the second movable body by the special effect motion control are common (for example, which is the initial motion or the performance motion of the lower board movable body 32B? is also the movement between the origin position and the production position),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, FIG. 67 (B), as shown in FIG. 72, the part where the effect control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in the initial emphasis mode (red flashing)),
The light emitting means of the second movable body movable by the special effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and the first special light emission pattern is emitted in a second period after the end of the first period. can perform the special light emission control that emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different light emission mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash rainbow during operation, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit smooth rainbow light during the comparison operation of the under-board movable body 32B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 1-9 is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-board movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9d, and the below-board movable body 32B is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9e. part),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can control As shown in , the portion where the lower board movable body 32B is operated after the upper board movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 120 can A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 67(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B),
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is not subjected to the specific light emission control. Perform specific light emission control (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, during execution of the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body LED 9d emits light in the initial emphasis mode, and the under-board movable body LED 9e is initialized). The part that emits light in the notification mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, when the movable body is not placed at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 41 The part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the timing when the variable display is started. part),
When the power is turned on, if the variable display starts during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, the return control is restricted (for example, the initials of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started When a starting prize is generated during operation and the variable display based on the starting prize is started, the initial movement of each movable body is given priority over the movement to the origin position of each movable body)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The game machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, when the movable body is not placed at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 41 The part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display ends and the game standby state is entered, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 132SGS427 processing),
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, and the variable display is finished during the predetermined period, and when the game standby state is entered, the return control is performed. Restrict (for example, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started in response to the end of the variable display, the customer waiting demo effect effect of each movable body is given priority over the movement to the origin position of each movable body. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The game machine of form 1-12 is
The effect control means can execute the movable body effect a plurality of times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 81, during one variable display, a first variable display notice and a second variable display notice and are executed),
When the movable body effect is executed with variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed at power-on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, When the effect movement control is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 81, when the variable display is executed during the initial motion of each movable body, when the first notice of the movable body is executed during the initial motion, the first 1. A part where the production action of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed as a preliminary notice of the movable body),
One of the movable body effects executed a plurality of times in one variable display is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the effect movement control corresponding to the one movable body effect ends normally. If not, when the next movable body effect is executed, the effect movement control corresponding to the next movable body effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the performance action of the upper movable body 32A does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body notice comes, the action of the board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the effect movement control corresponding to one movable body effect does not end normally, the game machine is capable of retrying by the effect movement control corresponding to the next movable body effect. can provide.

The game machine of form 1-13 is
The effect control means provides, as the movable body effect, a first movable body effect (e.g., first movable body announcement) and a higher proportion of control to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body effect. It is possible to execute a second movable body effect (for example, a second movable body announcement),
The movable body control means is
When the first movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform the first effect movement control to move the movable body by the first predetermined action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A portion that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times),
When the second movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a second effect movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A portion that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in the variable display started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the When the first movable body effect is executed, the first effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, each movable body If the execution period of the first notice of the movable body comes during the initial motion, the movement of the on-board movable body 32A as the first notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the first notice of the movable body, and each movable body After the initial operation of , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again as the first movable body notice),
When the first movable body is moved by the limited first effect movement control, the first effect movement control is interrupted and the second effect movement control is performed when the second movable body effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 83, when the execution period of the second movable body notice is reached during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice for the initial movement of each movable body, the second A part where the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice is interrupted and the movement of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body notice is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation does not impede the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation, thereby preventing the performance effect from deteriorating. can.

The game machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is operable between an initial position (eg, origin position) and an advanced position (eg, rendering position),
first detection means (for example, origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is arranged at the initial position;
a second detection means (for example, production position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is arranged at the advanced position;
The confirmation movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position for a first period based on the detection that the movable body is arranged at the initial position by the first detection means. and control to move the movable body toward the initial position when it is not detected by the second detection means that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, FIG. 84). , the production control CPU 120 operates the movable body toward the origin position by the production position sensor not detecting the movable body during the first period),
The effect movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position for a second period, and the second detection means detects that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position during the second period. If not, the control is to stop the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body by not detecting the movable body by the effect position sensor during the second period). the part that stops the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movable body effect is executed during the game, the movable body is moved based on the confirmation movement control even if the movable body corresponding to the movable body effect is not normally moved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing the deterioration of the rendering effect of the movable body rendering that was not executed normally.

The game machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means is
When the movable body cannot operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that it is an operation error and perform the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, the effect control CPU 120 , the part where it is judged as an operation error when the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
When an operation error is determined a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform error movement control to move the movable body over a movable period longer than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , As shown in FIG. 86, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the movable body effect is executed, the effect movement control is limited, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect sound is output (for example, As shown in FIG. 86, the action of the movable body is not executed in the movable body presentation after the dead end is determined, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, Under-board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, light emission in a mode corresponding to the movable body notice by the chance button LED 9g, sound output according to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine which prevents a malfunction from being caused by forcibly operating the movable body in a situation in which the movable body cannot operate normally, and which does not reduce the rendering effect of the movable body rendering. can do.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process new in FIGS. 42 and 43 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101). ,
When the power is turned on, the effect control means can perform demonstration display control for displaying a demonstration display on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 87, the effect control CPU 120 can The part that displays the customer waiting demonstration in
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movement control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed when a power failure occurs and the power is turned on. As shown in 87 to 89, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started after the power is cut off, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed, and then the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means can perform the confirmation movement control over a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial movement of each movable body),
The effect control means can perform the demonstration display control after a period of at least the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed after the end of the confirmation movable control (for example, after the end of the initial movement of each movable body). The part where the customer waiting demo effect is executed after 30 seconds),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered due to the demonstration display being displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control.

The game machine of form 2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demonstration display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, each movable The period from the end of the initial movement of the body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a cold start or by a hot start),
The movable body control means is
It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control in common when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is supplied without initialization. The period until the waiting demonstration effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start or by a hot start),
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the effect control means,
When the power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the effect control means (for example, a pachinko game machine Even if the period from the end of the initial movement of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is different depending on whether 1 is started by cold start or by hot start, each movable body The part where the customer waiting demonstration is executed after the initial movement of the body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the demonstration display is hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control both when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization. It is possible to provide a game machine that will never be lost.

The game machine of form 2-4 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and an operation means (eg, selection button 132SG35),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the bottom board movable body 32B, the frame top movable body LED 9e for the frame top movable body 132SG101, Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
By operating the operation means, the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment processing shown in FIG. 39, and various lamps 9a The part where it is possible to adjust the amount of light (brightness) of ~9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform a specific light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 120 can A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 67(B)) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emission means emitting light under the specific light emission control is restricted so that the luminance is not based on the operation (for example, in FIG. 67(B) As shown, when the initial action of each movable body is executed, the portion where the light amount (brightness) of various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control is not changed, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the movement confirmation of the movable body.

The game machine of form 2-5 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and an operation means (eg, selection button 132SG35),
The movable bodies are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board top movable body LED 9d for the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body LED 9e for the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 for the frame top movable body 132SG101). Body LED 9f, Chance button 631B is provided with Chance button LED 9g),
By operating the operation means, the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume and light amount adjustment processing shown in FIG. 39, and various lamps can be 9a to 9g where the amount of light (brightness) can be adjusted),
The effect control means can display a changeable display suggesting that the luminance of the light emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, A portion of the image display device 5 where the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is restricted during the predetermined period, and the display of the changeable display is performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the image display device is 5, the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed, and the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the initial motion of each movable body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not lose attention to the confirmation movement control by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (eg, under-board movable body 32B),
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9d, and the below-board movable body 32B is provided with an on-board movable body LED 9e. part),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, A portion where the lower board movable body 32B is operated after the board upper movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation),
The light emission control means can perform specific light emission control for causing the light emission means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion where the control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (for example, red flashing shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is in the initial operation,
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed by the light emission control means for the light emission means of the second movable body (for example, FIGS. 72 and 73). As shown in , when the on-board movable body 32A performs the initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e does not emit light in the initial emphasizing mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 2-7 is
The production control means is
During the demonstration display, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the on-board movable body 32A can be positioned between the origin position and the effect position). The part that can execute the production to operate between),
an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means (for example, a portion where effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 66);
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a demonstration movement control that moves the movable body in a common movement mode with the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, a board After moving the upper movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position, the board movable body 32A is moved from the performance position to the origin position),
When the movable body cannot operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine an operation error and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the effect control CPU 120 , the part where it is judged as an operation error when the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
When an operation error is determined a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform error movement control to move the movable body over a movable period longer than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the dead end In the customer waiting demonstration effect after the determination, the motion of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top The portion where the movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine which prevents a malfunction from being caused by forcibly operating a movable body in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, and which does not reduce the performance effect of the demonstration display. be able to.

[Form 3]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game that makes it impossible to enter,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The fanfare production is
An introductory part (for example, an introductory part. See FIGS. 63 (F2) to (F6)) for informing about the advantageous state;
A shooting direction notification part (for example, a right-handed notification part, see (F7) to (F8) in FIG. 63) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the player of the shooting direction of the game medium;
consists of
The movable body control means is adapted to end the confirmation movement control before the start of the shooting direction notification part when power is turned on immediately before execution of the fanfare effect. control the body (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect, a fanfare effect accompanied by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A (right-hand hitting notification The part where the movable body is controlled so that the initial movement is completed before the part) is started (see FIG. 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 3-2 is
There are multiple types of advantageous states (for example, big hits A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state 132SG421), and before the advantageous state name display is displayed, the introduction display before the display of the name of the advantageous state (for example, the display of the introduction before the display of the jackpot type 132SG422) can be performed,
The confirmation movement control is a control to move the movable body so as to end the operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the display of the name display of the advantageous state is performed. (For example, in the operation confirmation control, the part where the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 is performed in FIG. 63 (F6).),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that allows the player to grasp which advantageous state the control will be in even if the confirmation movement control is performed during the fanfare effect.

The game machine of form 3-3 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the fanfare effect, by means of the specific light emission control and the fanfare light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-4 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasizing mode). ,
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means controls the first movable body when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control when power is turned off at the same time when the fanfare effect is executed and when the power is turned on. The light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the first movable body The LED of the movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the LED of the second movable body emits light in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the fanfare effect.

The game machine of form 3-5 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect with a first luminance,
When a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the fanfare effect with a second luminance during a predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed. It is possible to perform light emission control to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect with the first luminance, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b , Board movable body LED 9d, board movable body LED 9e, and frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance) (see FIG. 67 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is not subjected to the specific light emission control. Perform specific light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasized mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasized mode part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 3-7 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is capable of executing a movable body production using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body effect is executed,
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light emitting means of the movable body movable by the special effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and the first special light emission pattern emits light in a second period after the end of the first period. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned special light emission control that emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different aspect (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation is advanced from the origin position to the effect position. While emitting light in a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting) at times and when retracting from the production position to the origin position, the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the production operation control is illuminated when the movable body is at the origin position. It is possible to emit light in different light-emitting modes when moving forward from to the production position and when retreating from the production position to the origin position (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the special movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-8 is
light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The effect control means is capable of executing a movable body effect using the movable body in the firing direction notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the firing direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and in a mode corresponding to the right-handed notification part, and the sound output is limited when the movable body operates in the initial motion. , In the movable body production executed in the right-handed notification part, the part where the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification part is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 3-9 is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) is further provided,
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body (see FIG. 63 (F7)) can be executed in the firing direction notification part,
an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation can be displayed on the display means;
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be normally completed over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
When the confirmation movable control is performed over the specific period, when the movable body effect is executed, the special effect movable control is limited, while the effect display is displayed (for example, fanfare When executing a movable object effect in the right-handed notification part of the effect, the movable object is moved by a special action, and an effect display corresponding to the movable object effect can be displayed, and the operation confirmation control is performed normally over a specific period. It is possible to determine that an operation error occurs if the operation cannot be completed in time, and perform motion confirmation control again. If the operation confirmation control is performed over a specific period, the movable body effect is executed. When the special action is restricted, the part where the effect display is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the confirmation movement control from being hindered by the special production movement control. can.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means, when power is cut off immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means, and the power is turned on after that, the movable body control means can perform the confirmation before the end of the fanfare effect execution period. The movable body is controlled so that the control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started, it corresponds to a round game The part where the operation confirmation control ends before the round production starts (see FIG. 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is prevented from becoming difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the player can perform the confirmation movable control. It is possible to provide a game machine that can face an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body that operates by.

The game machine of form 4-2 is
The effect control means displays when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect. It is possible to display a restoration in progress display (e.g., restoration in progress display 132SG510) on the means,
The light emission control means is operated in the following cases: a case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display; It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
In the movable body control means, when a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control (for example, when power is turned off during variable display and then turned on, or when power is turned off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed, and then power is turned on). The part where it is possible to perform operation check control in the case where the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents complicated processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 4-3 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and the power is turned on thereafter,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control is turned on over the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (light off) corresponding to the display during restoration) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 4-4 is
The production control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration-in-progress display during the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to perform light emission control,
The light emission control during restoration is performed at a luminance lower than that of the fanfare light emission control (for example, during restoration from a power failure, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the success/failure button effect). A portion that may emit light (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 4-5 is
The production control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) when a power failure occurs during the fanfare production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration-in-progress display during the execution period of the fanfare effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration is a fanfare effect (a song during the big hit) is not used in a light emitting mode corresponding to a mode corresponding to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored when the power is turned on, even if the fanfare effect is being performed before the power is turned off.

The game machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are common to the action mode of moving to the production position), and the initial action ends in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled by the round game during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means is configured to end the confirmation movement control before the end of the easy-to-enter state when power is turned off immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on. Control the movable body (for example, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on just before the fanfare effect ends, the operation confirmation control is ended before the opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game ends. The part that enables this (see Figure 93),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (initial It is possible to provide a game machine where the attacker can aim for winning even after the action.

The game machine of form 5-2 is
After the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means controls a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path) in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a specified period of time. ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 5-3 is
In the round game after the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means provides a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in the specific display area and a special display area. It is possible to display the given game value display related to the game value (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
A round in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the round game when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on thereafter. It is possible to perform medium emission control,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the big hit song (round production) part (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during a round game by the specific light emission control.

The game machine of form 5-5 is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the power is turned off immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round to cause the light emission means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can be,
When the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, and the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light during the round. Light is emitted by control (for example, when the first movable body is movable by operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the second movable body is movable The part where the body LED emits light in a manner corresponding to the song (round production) during the big hit),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is moving by the confirmation movement control even during the round game.

The game machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means is
In the round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the during-round light emission control,
The light emission control during the round, which is performed when the power is turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, is performed when the power failure does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. The brightness is lower than that during the round light emission control (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that does not perform the initial action emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big hit (round production) is such that the fanfare production ends. In the round game when the Pachinko game machine 1 is not started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before, the movable body LED of the movable body which does not perform the initial operation corresponds to the music during the jackpot (round performance). The part that may be lower in luminance than the emission luminance when emitting light in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 5-7 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are common to the action mode of moving to the production position), and the initial action ends in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means can set the variable means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means is adapted to terminate the confirmation movement control before the easy-entry state ends when power is cut off at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is turned on thereafter. To control the movable body (for example, the operation check control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the large winning opening in the first round game is started, in the first round game A portion that can be terminated before the opening control of the big winning opening is terminated (see FIG. 96),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time that the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows an attacker to win a prize even after the initial action.

The game machine of form 6-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is switched off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and then power is turned on. When it is done, it is possible to display a display during restoration (for example, display during restoration 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, or when power failure occurs at the same time when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and power is turned on thereafter. In the case where it is performed, it is possible to perform light emission control during restoration to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The movable body control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state and power is switched on. It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control (for example, when power is cut off during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the big prize opening is controlled to be open). At the same time, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and it is possible to perform operation check control),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that suppresses the complexity of the processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 6-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means can display a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and then the power is turned on. is possible and
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power is cut off at the same time that the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, until the variable means is controlled from the easy-to-enter state to the non-enterable state in which the game medium cannot enter. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over a period of
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. See FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The game machine of form 6-4 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means can display a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and then the power is turned on. is possible and
The light emission control means is
In one round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state over a specified period, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round, in which the light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the one round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the restoration display for a period until the one round game is finished. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration that emits light in the light emission pattern
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a luminance lower than that of the light emission control during the round (for example, during restoration from a power outage, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is lower than the luminance The part that can be made to emit light with
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored while reducing the load on the gaming machine by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 6-5 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means displays a recovery-in-progress display (for example, recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during control of the variable device to the easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on. it is possible to
The light emission control means is
In one round game in which the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state over a specified period, it is possible to perform round-time light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the one round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the restoration display for a period until the one round game is finished. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration that emits light in the light emission pattern
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration is a round production (big hit song) A portion that is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to (see FIG. 67 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of informing that the game is being restored when the power is turned on, even if the round game is being played before the power is cut off.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-entry state ends in one round game and the power is turned on after that, before the easy-entry state ends in the next round game The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends before the first round game (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game , the opening control period and the initial operation of the large winning opening so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the large winning opening in the second round game is completed (see FIG. 63 (F10)) The part where the period is set (see FIG. 97),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately before the end of one round game is finished before the next round game is finished, and the confirmation is performed. To provide a game machine in which a player can face a round game even after the movement control is finished.

The game machine of form 7-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
After the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means controls a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path) in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a specified period of time. ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means, in the next round game that is started after the end of the one round game, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area; It is possible to display a given game value display (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.) related to the game value given to the special display area,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-4 is
The movable body control means controls the variable means in the one round game when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state of the variable means in the one round game, and then the power is turned on. Move the movable body by the confirmation movable control after the control is performed to make it impossible to enter (see FIG. 97),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control that emits light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, from the origin position The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are common to the action mode of moving to the production position), and the initial action ends in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is done, and in the effect operation control (for example, win/fail button effect), it emits light in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the retraction period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control that moves the movable body by an operation for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state ),
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
When the movable body control means is controlled to the impenetrable state in one round game, power failure occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, the movable body can be confirmed before the impenetrable state ends. The movable body is controlled so that the control ends (for example, after the power failure occurs just before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start If it is done, the opening control and round of the big winning opening so that the initial movement of the movable body ends within the period until the third special round interval period ends (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 64) A portion where an interval period and an initial operation period are set (see FIG. 98),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the load on the game machine by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, so that the motion of the movable body is dazzling. is prevented from becoming difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the next round game ends the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on at the same time when the variable means becomes an inaccessible state in one round game. It is possible to provide a game machine in which a player can face a round game even after the confirmation movable control is finished by ending it earlier.

The game machine of form 8-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is switched off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and then power is turned on. In this case, it is possible to display a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means is powered on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is switched off at the same time when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, and then powered on. In this case, it is possible to perform light emission control during restoration to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
In the movable body control means, power is cut off during variable display and then turned on, or at the same time when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, power is cut off and then turned on. It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control in the case where the control is performed (for example, when the power is cut off during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the big prize opening is controlled to be open). The part where it is possible to perform operation check control when power failure occurs at the same time and then the power is turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the complexity of the processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-3 is
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided,
The effect control means displays during recovery on the display means (e.g., recovery It is possible to display the medium display 132SG510),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to the entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the one round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over a period of up to
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of drawing attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 8-4 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means is
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state and power failure occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, a display during recovery (for example, display during recovery 132SG510) is displayed on the display means. it is possible to
An interval effect can be executed when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform an interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during an execution period of the interval effect,
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to the entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the one round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light emission control during restoration is performed at a luminance lower than that of the light emission control during the interval (for example, during recovery from a power failure, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED is lower than that of the movable body LED in the production movement control (movable body production in the success/failure button production). The part that can be made to emit light with
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored while reducing the load on the gaming machine by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-5 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means is
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, power failure occurs at the same time, power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, display during recovery on the display means (for example, recovery It is possible to display the medium display 132SG510),
An interval effect can be executed when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during the execution period of the interval effect,
In the one round game, when the variable means is controlled to an entry-impossible state and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the next round game is started after the end of the one round game. It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The light-emitting mode used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the interval production (for example, the mode corresponding to the display during restoration (lights out) is an interval production (big hit song) portion not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that the system is being restored when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 8-6 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIG. 64 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control to move the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 8-7 is
sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIGS. 64 (F21) to (F23)),
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is capable of executing a movable body production using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the result notification part, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the lower board movable body 32B as a promotion effect (see FIG. 64 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is operated by operation confirmation control It is possible to control the performance operation in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B, and the sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by operation confirmation control, and in the movable body performance A portion where a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the lower board movable body 32B operates),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 8-8 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval production is
the introduction part (see FIG. 64 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part;
consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body (see FIG. 64 (F24)) can be executed in the result notification part,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 64 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body presentation,
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a motion mode common to the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, the power failure occurs immediately before the entry-impossible state is controlled, and then the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally. when the timing for determining an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the movable body effect,
When the movable body effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the effect display is displayed while the special effect movement control is restricted (for example, the operation confirmation control is specified When it is not possible to end normally over a period of time, it is determined as an operation error, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control again, and the big winning opening is closed in one round game in which the interval effect is executed. If the power failure occurs immediately before the state is controlled, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect. However, if the promotion effect is executed during a specific period during which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body effect is restricted),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying effects while the confirmation movement control is not hindered by the special production movement control. can.

The game machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the movable body by the effect movement control are common,
The light emission control means is
The specific light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light-emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light-emitting pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light-emitting mode is different from that of the first light-emitting pattern. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned special light emission control to emit light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the movable body on board LED 9d, under board movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, chance button 631B can be operated In the confirmation control, light is emitted in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed, and in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of promotion success of the promotion effect), in the first period (for example, the advance operation period) emits light in a rainbow flash mode, and in a second period (e.g., retraction operation period), a portion that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movable control and the effect movable control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The effect control means can execute a notification effect (e.g. promotion effect) for notifying which advantageous state is in a specific round game in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
The notification effect is
an introduction part (see, for example, FIG. 64 (F21) to (F23));
a result notification part (for example, see FIG. 64 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
consists of
In the case of the first advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
In the case of the second advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, the confirmation movable control is performed before the result notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so as to end (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a hot start after a power failure occurred immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ended. In this case, the opening control of the large winning opening and the round interval period and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is finished before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round game is started. set part (see Fig. 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
After the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control means controls a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path) in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a specified period of time. ) indicates the shooting direction of the game medium (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430), and a round game-related display related to the round game in the special display area (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, number of pitches displayed 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) can be displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
In the specific round game, the effect control means provides a shooting direction instruction display (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and a special display area It is possible to display a given game value display related to the given game value (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display region with respect to the specific display region (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that can be moved by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-4 is
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is a part that is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the notification effect by the specific light emission control and the notification light emission control.

The game machine of form 9-5 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, notification light emission control is performed to cause the light emission means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance. is possible and
The light emission control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, when the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is movable by the confirmation movement control, the movable body The light emitting means of is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control (for example, when power failure occurs immediately before the third round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control. When it is on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial action are not in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), but in the initial emphasis mode ( white light) (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 9-6 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on after that, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The power cutoff occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, and the notification light emission control performed when the power is turned on after that is performed when the power cutoff occurs immediately before the specific round game is started. (For example, during the second round interval period or in the third round game, operation confirmation control is started and the on-board movable body LED 9d of the movable body that initially operates , Underboard movable body LED 9e, Frame upper movable body LED 9f, and Chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the part that emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the effect operation control (promotion effect). 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action promotion effect for prompting the player to perform an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 64 (F23)),
The action promotion effect is executed in the introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 64),
The movable body control means terminates the confirmation movable control before the start of the introductory part when the power is turned off immediately before the specific round game is started and the power is turned on. (For example, the operation promotion part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round game, that is, the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B is started. the part where the initial movement of the movable body is completed before moving),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introduction part is not hindered by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 9-8 is
light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The effect control means can execute a movable body effect using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 64 (F24)),
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in a motion mode common to the motion mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control. is possible and
The light emission control means is
performing the specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed;
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, when the initial operation is performed, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode; white lighting), but the output of the background sound (BGM) is limited and promoted. When the performance is performed in the performance, the lower board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode (for example, rainbow mode) corresponding to the promotion performance (result reporting part), while the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result reporting part) is emitted. The part where the sound effect is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily determine which of the confirmation movement control and the special effect movement control is being performed by the specific light emission control and the special light emission control.

The game machine of form 9-9 is
The production control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed in the result notification part,
A display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation,
The movable body control means is
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a motion mode common to the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
When the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again,
When the power failure occurs immediately before the specific round game is started, and the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined as an operation error is Overlaps with the execution period of the movable body production,
When the movable body effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the effect display is displayed while the special effect movement control is restricted (for example, the operation confirmation control is specified When it is not possible to end normally over the period, it is determined as an operation error, and it is possible to perform operation confirmation control again, and immediately after the third round performance in which the promotion performance is started is started. When the power is cut off and the operation check control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and the operation check control is stopped. If the promotion effect is executed during the specific period that is being performed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body effect is restricted),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating to the player that the movable body production has been executed by displaying effects while the confirmation movement control is not hindered by the special production movement control. can.

[Form 10]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a round game multiple times in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round game is completed (see (F12) to (F14) in FIG. 63),
The ending production
the introduction part (see FIG. 63 (F12) and FIG. 64 (F31));
Special state notification part that is executed after the introduction part and performs notification regarding the special state controlled after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state notification part. See FIG. 63 (F13), FIG. 64 (F32), (F34)) and,
consists of
The movable body control means, when power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state in the final round game ends and the power is turned on after that, before the special state notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth final round game, In the ending period, so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time saving state notification part (see FIG. 64 (F32), (F34)) in which information about the time saving state is notified is started, the ending period and the initial The part where the operation period is set (see FIG. 101),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 10-2 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state in the final round game ends and the power is turned on after that, the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not movable by the confirmation movement control is set to the ending effect. It is possible to perform ending light emission control that emits light with the corresponding lamp pattern,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is a part not used in the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is under the confirmation movement control even during the ending effect by the specific light emission control and the ending light emission control.

The game machine of form 10-3 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
Ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect when power failure occurs immediately before the easy entry state in the final round game ends and the power is turned on thereafter. and
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends in the final round game and the power is turned on after that, the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control. At this time, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the ending light emission control (e.g. While the body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating are the ending effect (introduction part), see FIG.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of indicating that the movable body is moving by the confirmation movement control even during the ending effect.

The game machine of form 10-4 is
light emitting means;
further comprising light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means is
When the ending effect is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends in the final round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can emit light by the ending light emission control,
In the final round game, the power failure occurs immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends, and the ending light emission control performed when the power is turned on after that does not cause the power failure immediately before the ending effect ends. (For example, when the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the frame upper movable body LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation. The movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light with low luminance in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
light emitting means;
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect movement control (for example, the movable body effect in the win/fail button effect) is performed to move the movable body by the action for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance when the confirmation movable control is performed by the movable body control means;
controlling the light emitting means so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness when the effect movement control is performed by the movable body control means;
The first luminance is lower in luminance than the second luminance (for example, the movable body that performs the initial motion LED 9d on the board, the underboard movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the initial emphasized mode (white). Lighting), but the portion that emits light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the production operation control.See FIG. 67 (B)),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a round game multiple times in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round game is completed,
The movable body control means controls the confirmation movement before the end of the execution period of the ending effect when power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started by the effect control means and the power is turned on. Control the movable body so that the control ends (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, during the ending period, The ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time saving state notification part (see FIG. 64 (F32) and (F34)) in which the information is notified is started. part, see Fig. 102),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the load on the game machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, the power is cut off at the same time as the execution of the ending effect, and the confirmation movable control when the power is turned on is performed within the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to provide a game machine in which the game ends with (the player can face the high base state without worrying about the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control).

The game machine of form 11-2 is
The effect control means displays when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect. It is possible to display a restoration in progress display (e.g., restoration in progress display 132SG510) on the means,
The light-emission control means is operated in the following cases: a case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display; It is possible to perform light emission control during restoration for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration,
The movable body control means has a power failure occurring during variable display and then turned on, and a power failure occurring simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect and then powered on, It is possible to perform the confirmation movable control (for example, when a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, or when a power failure occurs at the same time as the large winning opening is controlled to be open). , then when the power is turned on, the part where it is possible to perform operation check control),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents complicated processing when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 11-3 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode),
When a power failure occurs simultaneously with execution of the ending effect by the effect control means and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means is illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. See FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control even during restoration.

The game machine of form 11-4 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a luminance lower than that of the ending light emission control (for example, during power failure recovery, the light emission luminance of the movable body LED in the effect movable control (movable body effect in the success/failure button effect) is performed at a lower luminance. A portion that may emit light (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 11-5 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a restoration-in-progress display (for example, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the ending production and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means is
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power failure occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration over the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during restoration is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the display during restoration (turns off) is used in the ending effect (ending introduction) A portion that is not used in a light emission mode corresponding to the corresponding mode (see FIG. 67(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of notifying that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending effect is being performed before power failure.

[Mode 12]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., second special symbol),
The normal state is a state in which variable display of the first identification information is likely to be executed,
The special state is a state in which variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, in the second display area of the display means, pending information (for example, second pending storage number and second pending display 132SG002) related to variable display of the second identification information can be displayed,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display region with respect to the second display region (for example, a power failure occurs during time saving). After that, when the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed in the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012). The time during which the player becomes invisible (or impossible) due to duplication is made shorter than the time during which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with the big win information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454). 2, the portion where each movable body is set to perform the initial operation (see FIG. 103),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, is less hindered than that of the first display area.

The game machine of form 12-2 is
Information about the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while pending information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (e.g., The number of consecutive games / total number of balls displayed 132SG454 does not change during the time saving state, while the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 change the number of winnings even in the time saving state and predictive notice etc. parts whose display mode can be changed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less disturbed than information regarding an advantageous state in which the visibility of the pending information, which may change with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, does not change.

The game machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movement control overlaps the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movement control overlaps the second display area (for example, Due to the initial action, the board movable body 32A moves the board movable body 32A over the display area 5SL of the second reserved storage number and the second reserved display area 132SG012 of the second reserved display 132SG002. / The portion where the range overlapping the display area of the total number of balls displayed 132SG454 is larger),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, is less hindered than that of the first display area.

[Mode 13]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts the player to move during the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern,
The specific variable display pattern is
The first part (for example, the period of (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 61) until the action promotion effect is executed;
a second part that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action promoting effect (for example, the result notification part of (D6) and (D7) in FIG. 61);
consists of
The movable body control means is configured to perform the confirmation movable control before the start of the second part when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific variable display is started and the power is turned on thereafter. Control the movable body so as to end (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs just before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed, A portion where the movable body is controlled so that the initial action ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts (see FIG. 105),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promoting effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 13-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
Said game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command designating button announcement execution, etc.) to said effect control means,
The effect control means can perform the action promotion effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on after that. Possible (for example, if a variation pattern specification command that specifies a specific variation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (eg, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial operation being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific variation.

[Mode 14]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The production control means is capable of executing a start-time production (for example, start-time notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The production at the start is
the introduction part (see FIGS. 59 (B2) to (B6));
a result notification part (see FIGS. 59(B3a) to (B6a)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
consists of
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern is started and the power is turned on after that, before the result notification part is started. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends (for example, after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started. A portion in which the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start time notice (result notification part) is started (see FIG. 106),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start stage effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 14-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command designating advance notice execution at the start) to the effect control means, and
The effect control means is capable of performing the start time effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on after that. (For example, based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial action so that the initial action ends before the result notification part of the start time notice is started. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific variation.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The effect control means can execute variable display of the identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and once the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display of the identification information is executed again. It is possible to perform a re-variable display notification effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice) to notify
The re-variable display notification effect is
an introductory part (see FIGS. 60 (C3) to (C5))) for inciting whether or not re-variable display of identification information is to be executed;
a result notification part (see FIGS. 60 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
consists of
The movable body control means, when a power failure occurs immediately before the variable display of the identification information based on the specific variable display pattern is started and the power is turned on after that, before the result notification part is started. Control the movable body so that the confirmation movable control is completed before (for example, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 A portion in which the movable body is controlled so that the initial action is completed before the start of the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) when activated by hot start (see FIG. 107),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification effect is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 15-2 is
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) is further provided,
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command that designates pseudo consecutive notice execution) to the effect control means,
The effect control means can perform the re-variable display notification effect (for example, pseudo consecutive notice) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movement control based on the specific information when a power failure occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation is started and the power is turned on after that. (For example, based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial action so that the initial action ends before the result notification part of the pseudo continuous notice is started. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control in consideration of the start of a specific change.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to shoot the game medium to the first game area (for example, the left game area) side,
The special state is a state designed to shoot the game medium to the second game area (for example, the right game area) side,
The display means, in the normal state, displays a first game area side launch promotion display (e.g., left-hand hitting promotion display) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to prompt the user to shoot the game medium toward the first game area. 132SG530) can be displayed, and a display corresponding to the normal state can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display region with respect to the specific display region (for example, when power is cut off during variable display in a normal state). After the occurrence, if the initial motion is performed when the hot start is activated and the recovery is performed, the time period during which the player is unable (or unable) to visually recognize the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is shortened. 108 and 109),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not hindered by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a recovery-in-progress display (for example, a recovery-in-progress display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power failure occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on,
It is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) when the restoration display is displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying the shooting direction of the game medium even during recovery.

The game machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display the first game area promotion notification display (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) and output the first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the first game area promotion notification sound is output. restricted,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output. is performed (for example, while the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is limited, and after the power failure occurs, the operation is confirmed based on the hot start. When the control is performed, the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, while the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable first game area promotion notification in consideration of the situation when the power is turned on.

The game machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41) provided on the side of the second game area, the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed promotion display 132SG530) is performed. is possible and
It is possible to perform a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification based on the fact that a specific number of game media have entered the predetermined area in the normal state,
It is possible to perform the special first game area promotion notification over a period longer than the period in which the movable body is movable by the confirmation movable control (for example, in the normal state, the gate switch 21 has a specific number of game balls ( For example, it is possible to perform a special left-handed operation promotion notification with a higher priority than the left-handed operation promotion notification based on the fact that 5 pieces) has entered, and the period during which the movable body operates by operation confirmation control (for example, 20 seconds), it is possible to perform special left-handed operation promotion notification over a period longer than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control does not hinder the special first game area promotion notification.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
The game control means sets the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter during the advantageous state. It is possible to play a round game in which it is impossible to enter (for example, closed state),
The display means is
During the round game, when a power failure occurs and the power is turned on after that, a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
After that, in the predetermined display area, displays corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) are displayed. is possible and
When displaying either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, power failure during the round game in the jackpot game state). occurs, when the initial action is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the round game (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, output Pitch number display 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 94 (A)) to promote right-handed hitting displayed in the operation confirmation control. A portion that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 110 and 111),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not hinder the visibility of the shooting direction indicator, which has a high degree of influence on the game with the movable body that can be moved by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 17-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, when power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display in a normal state). The initial action is performed in a motion mode including a movable body notice production motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. After a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on is the production action in the movable body notice that overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position ), the portion performed in a mode of operation that does not include
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means is
When a power failure occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration in progress display (for example, a restoration in progress display 132SG510),
It is possible to display character information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area as the display during restoration,
Along with the display during recovery, it is possible to display a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, power failure during the round game in the jackpot game state). After the occurrence of, when the initial action is performed when the hot start is activated and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed in the operation confirmation control rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. A portion that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 110 and 111),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction instruction, which is a movable body operated by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the character information indicating that restoration is in progress. .

The game machine of form 18-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display in a normal state. The initial motion at time is performed in a motion mode including a performance motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the supporting portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. After a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the initial action when turning on the power is the production action in the movable body notice that overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating between the origin position and the intermediate position a portion performed in an operational manner that does not include an action)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 18-3 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the special movement control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movable control,
Power failure occurs during the advantageous state, and then the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control that is performed when the power is turned on is moved by the special movement control during the period in which the movable body stays in the predetermined display area. The time that the movable body stays in the predetermined display area is longer (for example, the time that the lower board movable body 32B stays in the effect position that overlaps the restoration display 132SG510 is the initial action, the effect action of the movable body effect the part that may be shorter than
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when power is cut off during an advantageous state and then the power is turned on, the movable body is not superimposed on the predetermined display area for a long period of time. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder determination of whether the game is in progress or not.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal game state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means is
When a power failure occurs during the special state and then the power is turned on, a restoration-in-progress display (for example, restoration-in-progress display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
After that, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the special state in the predetermined display area,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration-in-progress display, a shooting direction instruction display (for example, right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the shooting direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control to move the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display region with respect to the specific display region (for example, power failure during variable display in the time saving state After the occurrence, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive houses /Total pitches display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed in front of the predetermined area (see FIGS. 112B and 112C), and the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. A part that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 112 (A)). See FIG. 112),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction indication display, which is a movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the during-restoration display.

The game machine of form 19-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial action is the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the support portion 32b overlaps While it is performed in a mode of operation that includes the performance action of the movable body notice (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position), the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display during the big hit or the time saving state. The initial motion at time is a portion performed in a motion mode that does not include the effect motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body notice that overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a movable body;
movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means is capable of displaying, in the special state, a shooting direction instruction display indicating the shooting direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and displaying information regarding the advantageous state in a predetermined display area,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the predetermined display area with respect to the specific display area.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the shooting direction indication, which is a movable body operated by the confirmation movement control and has a high degree of influence on the game, is less hindered than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The game machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising production control means,
The production control means can execute a movable body production using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined action when the movable body effect is executed,
The movable body movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined effect movable control.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not hindered by the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control.

[Mode 21]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process new in FIGS. 42 and 43 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101). ,
The game control means can perform specific identification information light emission control that indicates the result of variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 controls a plurality of special symbols constituting a special symbol when the variable display is stopped). part that can be lit in combination according to the variable display result),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating deviation),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and the specific identification light emission control that has a high degree of influence on the game can be confirmed. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be confirmed without being leaked.

The game machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114B, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating deviation),
After that, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the starting condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the restoration in progress display is displayed by the display means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the part where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state where the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (obstructing the confirmation work). be able to.

The game machine of form 21-3 is
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, when the variable display executed before the power failure is not completed while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the restoration in progress display is displayed by the display means. We (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the part where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.
The game machine of form 21-4 is
Hold storage means capable of storing hold information related to variable display (for example, special figure hold storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 20) further includes,
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115B, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating the deviation),
After that, while the activation preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the variable display executed before the power failure is completed, and the variable display is changed based on the hold information stored before the power failure. When the display is started, the display during recovery is displayed by the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the portion where the display during recovery 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state in which the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (there is no hindrance to the confirmation work). be able to.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process new in FIGS. 42 and 43 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101). ,
The light emission control means can perform initialization corresponding light emission control for causing a plurality of light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the frame LED 9a , 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the initialization corresponding light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are initialized. Part that emits light in the notification mode),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the portion where the initial motion of the board top movable body 32A, board bottom face 32B, frame top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and it is possible to confirm the initialization corresponding light emission control without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the movement control. machine can be provided.

The game machine of form 22-2 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display (the confirmation work is not hindered). can provide.

The game machine of form 22-3 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116B, the portion where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, when the variable display executed before the power failure is finished while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emission control means causes the light emission means to correspond to the background display. 116B, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, A portion that causes the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display (the confirmation work is not hindered). can provide.

The game machine of form 22-4 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one round game out of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after the power outage during the round game),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, when the one round game executed before the power failure is not completed while the activation preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emission control during restoration is continued. (For example, as shown in FIG. 117A, when the round game from before the power failure is not completed while the activation preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, A portion where light emission is continued in a mode corresponding to the restoration of the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, (a game machine that does not start the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control in a state where the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (obstructing the confirmation work) can be provided.

The game machine of form 22-5 is
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one round game out of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after the power outage during the round game),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, light emission control during restoration is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light according to the pattern during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed),
After that, while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the one round game that was being executed before the power cut is finished, and the next round game of the one round game is started. When it is started, the light emission control during restoration is continuously performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g (portion where light emission is continued in a mode corresponding to restoration),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the portion where the initial motion of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started (obstructing the confirmation work) while the light emission means is emitting light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can provide.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process new in FIGS. 42 and 43 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101). ,
The game control means is
If the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal pattern hit) If this is the case, the part where the opening control is executed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period),
When a power failure occurs while the normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to put the normal variable means in the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, when power failure occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol hit, the variable winning ball device is activated based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1. The part that controls 6B to open again),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, after the power is turned off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and then restarted by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure) To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state same as before power cutoff and can be confirmed without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is turned off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, after the power is turned off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered off and then restarted by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118A, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, when the game medium enters the normal variable means that is in the easy-to-enter state by the special control during the display of the startup preparation display and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means The display during recovery is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the portion where the display during recovery 132SG510 is displayed after the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 23-3 is
When power failure occurs during variable display of normal identification information where the result of variable display is a predetermined display result, and then the power is turned on (for example, variable display of normal symbols has been executed before power failure occurs, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start s),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118B, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, control is performed to set the normal variable means to the easy-to-enter state (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the portion that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally (for example, a performance The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process new in FIGS. 42 and 43 to perform the initial movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101). ,
The game control means is
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter (for example, a portion that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When power is cut off when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, when power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again based on the hot start of the pachinko game machine 1. part to control),
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)),
When a power failure occurs during the advantageous state and the power is turned on after that, it is possible to display a display during restoration (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
During the advantageous state, the power is cut off when the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then when the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, a round game When power failure occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, the restoration in progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the part where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the power supply to the game machine has started by the startup preparation display, and when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power failure), the game can be played. To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a variable means is in the easy-to-enter state that is the same as before power cutoff and without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 24-2 is
It is possible to perform multiple round games in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, a portion that can execute 3 to 10 round games as a jackpot game),
In the round game, it is possible to control the variable means to be in the easy-to-enter state and to control the variable means to be in the non-enterable state (for example, as a round game, the special winning ball device 7 is in an open state the part that controls the closed state and the part that controls the closed state),
When the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, the power is turned off, and then when the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is turned on as a round game When power failure occurs in the open state and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start),
The boot preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the portion where the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, during the display of the start preparation display, the special control in one round game is completed, and when the control of the variable means in the next round game is performed to make the entry impossible state, the restoration display Display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, when the round game is completed while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the fence s state, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. displayed part),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the portion where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, on-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
and a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. is possible and
The display means is
When the power is turned on with initialization (for example, cold start processing), it is possible to display an initialization display (for example, initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating initialization,
When the power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control is finished, the display of the initialization display is finished (see FIGS. 120 and 121),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the game machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, and the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control can be visually displayed. It is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder confirmation of whether or not initialization notification has ended.

The game machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to confirmation movability control is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to confirmation movability control (for example, initialization is performed). The period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold-start processing) to operation check control is longer than the period from power-on without power-on (start-up with hot-start processing) until operation check control is performed. the part with the longer period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not make it impossible to visually recognize that the initialization display is displayed due to the confirmation movement control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with the initialization.

The game machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and disappears after the predetermined execution period ends,
Even if the starting condition is satisfied while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), A portion that is hidden after a predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs during the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 25-4 is
When the execution period of the variable display started based on the establishment of the starting condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, if the execution period of the variable display started based on the occurrence of the start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display is displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. continues),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

The game machine of form 25-5 is
When the execution period of the variable display started based on the establishment of the starting condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, after turning on the power without initialization (starting with hot start processing), the background display is performed based on the game state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B);
a second movable body (for example, board movable body 32A);
Movable body control means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
When the first movable body is positioned at the initial position and the second movable body is positioned at the initial position, the first movable body is positioned at the advanced position and the second movable body is positioned at the advanced position. When positioned, the distance between the first movable body and the second movable body becomes closer (see FIG. 122),
The movable body control means is
Confirmation movement control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally when the power is turned on. (for example, operation confirmation control) can be performed,
The confirmation movement control moves the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position and moves the second movable body to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap. to the advanced position, and thereafter, the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap. from the advanced position to the initial position (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the chance button 631B and the chance button 631B are controlled so that their initial operation periods overlap in operation confirmation control). The body 32A simultaneously starts moving from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 122(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position so that the respective initial action periods do not overlap. After stopping at the origin position (see FIG. 122(C)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 122(D)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can normally move to the advanced position and that the second movable body can normally move to the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work. To provide a game machine capable of simultaneously confirming the movement of a first movable body from the advancing position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advancing position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, individually. be able to.

The game machine of form 26-2 is
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect executing means can execute a movable body effect using the first movable body and the second movable body,
The movement control means moves the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap when the movable body effect is executed. and move the second movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and then move the first movable body from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap It is possible to perform effect movement control to move the second movable body from the advanced position to the initial position while moving it to the position,
The confirmation movable control is control to move the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the effect movable control (for example, For the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform an effect action in which the first movable body and the second movable body contact (or overlap), in the operation confirmation control, as shown in FIGS. A part that executes an initial action in an action mode that does not include the effect action described above (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are moved separately),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 26-3 is
It further comprises a detection means (for example, effect position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is arranged at the advanced position,
The movement toward the initial position of the first movable body arranged at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advanced position by the detection means ( For example, the motion toward the origin position of the first movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) placed at the production position in the action confirmation control is produced by the second movable body (for example, the lower-board movable body 32B). A part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG134),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

The game machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means moves the movable body to the initial position when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not arranged at the initial position when the power is turned on. Return control can be performed (for example, when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not placed at the origin position before the long initial motion control is started, the movable body Return control for moving the body to the initial position (for example, the part where the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame top movable body 132SG101 short initial operation control) is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game) capable of performing variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a big win) as a result of the variable display to bring the player into an advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state). machine 1),
a first movable body (for example, the underboard movable body 32B);
a second movable body (for example, a frame movable body 132SG101);
and a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in the game frame (for example, the opening and closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means is
When the power is turned on, confirmation movement control ( For example, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control),
As the confirmation movement control, the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position, and the second movable body operates normally while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position. (For example, in a state where the lower board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see FIG. 68(F)), the upper frame movable body 132SG101 After moving from the origin position to the production position, the part that moves from the production position to the origin position (see FIGS. 68 (G) to (I)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during confirmation movement control, the first movable body arranged at the advanced position indicates that the confirmation movement control is not completed, and when the first movable body is arranged at the advanced position, the first movable body is arranged at the advanced position. It is possible to provide a game machine in which confirmation movement control of the second movable body is not overlooked by starting the motion of the second movable body.

The game machine of form 27-2 is
Further comprising a detection means (for example, effect position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position,
The movement toward the initial position of the first movable body arranged at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means ( For example, the motion toward the origin position of the first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position in the action confirmation control is performed by the second movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B). The part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG104),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing confirmation movement control.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 12 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, back) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, in the description of each step in the flow chart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. The game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening/closing door frame 3a having a glass window so as to be rotatable around the left side thereof, and the opening/closing door frame 3a is configured to open and close the game area. The play area is visible through the glass window when closed.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scrolling display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one. The special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of a plurality of lamps (LEDs). The CPU 103 can turn on these lamps in combination according to the result of the variable display when the variable display is stopped.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 13). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an accessory having a movable piece that can move in the front-rear direction, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece moves to a retreat position where the movable piece retreats from the game board surface. It becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the piece, and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start prize winning port is entered (also referred to as the second start prize winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece protrudes forward from the game board surface, so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable piece. It will be in an open state where the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (it is also said that the second starting winning opening is in an open state). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above accessories as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 13), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at left and right upper positions of the opening/closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided on the top and left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 3a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 12), an upper board movable body 32A and a lower board movable body 32B that operate according to the performance are provided. Movable body LEDs 9d and 9e are provided for the board top movable body 32A and the board bottom movable body 32B, frame top movable body LED 9f is provided for the frame top movable body 132SG121, and chance button LED 9g is provided for the chance button 631B. It is The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attacker LED 9c may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the opening/closing door frame 3a below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

In addition, a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled forward and backward by the player and can be rotated are provided at the center of the lower portion of the opening/closing door frame 3a. An operating unit 600 is provided. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can move between the origin position and a projecting position projecting upward from the origin position. be. In addition, a cross key constituting a selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as sound volume is provided on the top plate of the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 includes a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 13) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, and an origin sensor for detecting that the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position. A position sensor 635C (see FIG. 13), a protrusion position sensor 635D (see FIG. 13) for detecting that the chance button 631B is positioned at the protrusion position, and a vibration motor 635E (see FIG. 13) for vibrating the chance button 631B. 13), an advance/retreat motor 635F (see FIG. 13) for advancing and retreating the chance button 631B between the origin position and the projecting position, and a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. and a protrusion position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is positioned at the protrusion position. Further, the selection button 132SG35 is provided with an up, down, left, and right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 13) consisting of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor for detecting each operation of the cross key of the selection button 132SG35 in the up, down, left, and right directions. ing.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The opening/closing door frame 3a includes a first effect unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second effect unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left side, and a third effect unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right side. It has three production units. The first effect unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-top movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the effect position, as will be described later.

A main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown) is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 . A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 (see FIG. 13). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in the characteristic portion 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set by operating the setting switch 52. As a change state, the big hit probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in the setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 13) is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 13) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched.
The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed by the opening/closing door frame 3a.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high-base state (time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these. . As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (period of changing the normal figure) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state continues until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and start of the next jackpot game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number cut (number cut time reduction).

The normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and a special state such as a time saving state. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the figure game is a "jackpot", is in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset). is controlled in the same way as when A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display or active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot production, in the first round of the jackpot (first hit) in the normal state, the jackpot opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the production shown in FIG. 63 (F8) is performed. In the first round of the jackpot in the time-saving state, since the jackpot is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (short-term opening and closing are repeated), the performance shown in FIG. 51 (C2) is performed. In addition, in the second round of the jackpot in the time saving state, the jackpot opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the display, various lamps, and sound modes are different in the first and second rounds. will be different.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024). ) from the game ball (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the game ball passes Or an ingress is detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a push/pull sensor 625Y, a protrusion position sensor 625C, a button sensor 635B, an origin position sensor 635C, a protrusion position sensor 635D, an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, an origin position sensor 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and an effect position sensor 132SG104. , 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134 (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and that appropriately indicates the content of the operation). be.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 outputs signals for operating the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the on-board movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to each movable body or vibration motor 635E of each movable body, forward/retreat motor 635F, It is supplied to a drive circuit that drives the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

In addition, sound output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal, lamp signal, etc.), control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG121, the chance button 631B (each movable (supply of a signal to move the body, etc.) may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 23 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process (see FIG. 23) of step S27 after the special symbol process process is finished, for example. 12.

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing section 132SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the variable display stop (confirmation) of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 .

The command 9000H indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 is being pressed down (that the recovery condition has not been established in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 23). This is a power-on designation command that designates that step S6 has been executed by )).

The command 9200H indicates that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 has not been pressed (step S4 because the recovery condition has been established in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 23). is executed) is a power failure recovery designation command.

The command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game state background designation command is also a command for designating updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the game state. In the game state background designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 15(B), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is the second game state background designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. be. Command 9502H is the third game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state C1) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. is a command. Command 9503H is the fourth game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state B) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C is a command. Command 9504H is the fifth game state background designation corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state B) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game is a command. It is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state C2) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot E jackpot game.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "10"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 132SG005D or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command for designating the variable category of the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on by passing the game ball through the second count switch 132SG024. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special figure time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a number-of-prize-balls notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) when a game ball enters the winning hole. The command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration effect).

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 16, in the characteristic portion 132SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , the random number MR4 for judging the results of the display of the general pattern, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 17 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 132SG. In this characteristic portion 132SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases such as when the display result is a "big win" and when the variable display result is a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, the variation pattern of the big hit is a special figure of 15 seconds uniformly for executing a blessing performance for congratulating that the variable display result is a big hit after the same special figure variable display time as the losing variation pattern. Display time is additionally provided.

Here, for the jackpot variation pattern and the loss variation pattern in this characteristic portion 132SG, the period until the variable display result is notified is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is notified This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss.

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern in this characteristic part 132SG, a form in which a special figure variable display time of 15 seconds for executing the blessing effect after the same special figure variable display time as the losing variation pattern is additionally provided is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variable display time for executing the blessing effect provided in the big hit variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and varies depending on the game state. good too.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 17(A) and 17(B), in this characterizing portion 132SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol for executing variable display.

As shown in FIG. 17(A), as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach α, a super reach β, and so on. There are a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance is executed, and a non-reach variation pattern in which no reach performance is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 132SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α fluctuation pattern, and super reach β fluctuation pattern in the first special pattern, a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variably displays the decorative pattern during variable display is performed 1 to 3 times. It also contains the variation pattern to execute. In this characterizing portion 132SG, which of the ready-to-win effects of normal ready-to-win, super ready-to-win ? and super ready-to-win ? For example, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, then the normal reach ready effect is executed, and if the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, then the super reach α ready reach effect is executed. is executed, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the ready-to-win effect of super reach β is executed after that.

In addition, in the ready-to-reach production that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the ready-to-win production of super reach β is set to have the highest expectation for a big hit, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach α is higher than the ready-to-reach production of super reach β. Jackpot expectations are set low. Then, the reach performance of normal reach is set to have a lower expected degree of jackpot than the reach performance of super reach α (expectation of hit performance of reach performance: super reach β>super reach α>normal reach). That is, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation for the big hit of the variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the characteristic portion 132SG includes a big hit variation pattern and a small hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol as a losing variation pattern. A non-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern (a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach γ movement pattern in which a super reach γ reach effect is executed) having different special figure variable display times are provided. ing. As the variation patterns of these second special symbols, the variation pattern of super reach γ is set with the highest expectation of big hit, and the variation pattern of non-reach is set with the lowest expectation of big hit (second special symbol Big hit expectation in: super reach γ> normal reach> non-reach).

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 132SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 30) storing a plurality of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 18A, a display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 18B, and a jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. For special symbols), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 18 (D) (for the second special symbol), the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. FIG. 25, see FIG. 30), various second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 31 to 30), general figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table 1 and the display result determination table 2. FIG. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the display result determination table 1, the variable display special figure designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying a special symbol for executing variable display) is 1 (first). A determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for the case where the first special symbol is the object of variable display. In the display result determination table 2, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for designating a special symbol for executing variable display) is 2 (second). A determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for the case where the second special symbol is the object of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 18(A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the object of variable display, a big win can be won and a small win will not occur. Incidentally, the winning probability of the big hit when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is about 1/200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18(B), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, a determination value corresponding to a big hit and a determination value corresponding to a small hit are set. Incidentally, when the variable display special figure designating buffer is the second, the winning probability of the big win is about 1/200, and the winning probability of the small win is about 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the first (when the special symbol for variable display is the first special symbol), the CPU 103 determines which one of the values of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 18(A). When the hit judgment value is matched, it is determined that the variable display result is a big win (big win A or big win B). In addition, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the second (when the special symbol for variable display is the second special symbol), the CPU 103 determines which one of the values of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 18(B). When it matches with one of the hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a big win (big win B), and when the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small wins shown in FIG. 18(B). , determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probability" shown in FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

In addition, in the characteristic part 132SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. However, a big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is made by the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used for display, and a small hit may be determined using a separate table according to the variable display special figure designation buffer.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 132SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it has been designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big win may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small win so that the small win can be won.

18(C) and 18(D) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 18 (C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) is a table of In addition, FIG. 18(D) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). is a table.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the type of jackpot to be jackpot A or jackpot B based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern. It is a referenced table. In addition, in this characterizing portion 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 18(C) and (D), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one kind of big hit, the big hit B. That is, the big win that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the two types of big wins, namely, the big win A and the big win B, while when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the big win B is generated as the big win.

FIG. 18(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small win A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the small win. This table is referenced to determine In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning C is executed. When the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning type is the big winning D or the big winning E. The game is executed, and when the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V prize big winning occurs, the big winning type is the big winning E. A game is executed. In other words, these jackpots C to E are not the jackpot types determined by the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination extracted at the time of starting winning, but are game balls during any of the jackpots A and B. is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 132SG024.

Here, when the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 132SG is described with reference to FIG. 19, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A to jackpot E in which time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is finished is set. It is

Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the interval period of each round in the jackpot A is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, the special symbol game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and at most five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Time saving control is performed as time saving state A until it is executed.

The big win B is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the interval period of each round in the jackpot B is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, until the special symbol game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special symbol as the object, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1 until a maximum total of 689 special figure games are executed.

The big win C is a big win in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot C, the interval periods of the first and second rounds are set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the third round is set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state, until the special symbol game is executed a maximum of seven times with the variable display of the second special symbol as the target, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state B until a maximum total of 11 special game games are executed.

The big win D is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot D, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. set to seconds. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, until the special game is executed a maximum of seven times with the variable display of the second special pattern as the object, or until the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed. Time reduction control is executed as the time reduction state B until a total of 11 special game games are executed targeting the variable display of .

The big win E is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. As for the interval period of each round in the jackpot E, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. set to seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot E is finished, the special game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special pattern, or the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state C2 until a total of 689 special game is executed targeting the variable display.

In this way, the interval period of the third round between the jackpot C and the jackpot E is set to 30 seconds, and the present characteristic portion 132SG suggests that the jackpot game continues up to the 9th round over the 30 seconds. As a production, it is possible to execute a promotion production described later.

It should be noted that, in each time-saving state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by increasing the probability of becoming a "per normal game", that is, the second start winning Since it becomes easy to perform the variable display of a 2nd special design when it generate|occur|produces, it becomes easy to generate a small hit rather than a normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time saving state ends, when a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the game ball is playing a small hit Since there is a case where a big hit is generated by winning a V prize at the time, a so-called continuous game state in which a big win game state is likely to occur continuously occurs.

In addition, in the time-saving state A after the jackpot game of the jackpot A, since the number of special figure games in which the time-saving control is executed for the second special symbol is set to one time, the second special Either the variable display of the pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the one-time variable display of the second special pattern results in a big hit or a small hit. (the sum of the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit when the game ball wins V) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D, since the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed for the second special symbols is set to 7 times, the 7 times of the second special symbols or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories occurring during the seven times of variable display of the second special symbol, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit or a small hit. The ratio (total ratio of occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of 11 times and the ratio of a game ball winning a V prize and a big hit) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time saving state C2 after the jackpot B or jackpot E jackpot game ends, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to 685 times, so the 685 times Either the variable display of the second special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 685 times, the variable display result is a big hit or The ratio of small hits (the sum of the ratio of occurrence of big hits or small wins in the variable display of the second special symbols for the above total of 685 times and the ratio of occurrence of big wins due to the game ball winning V) is set to approximately 100%. ing.

In this characterizing portion 132SG, four types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided. Also, three or less types may be provided.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 132SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151, a normal figure reservation storage unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, and a game control counter setting unit. 132SG154 and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 is a special figure game that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. (Special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) Suspended data and the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B Start winning Suspended data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) which has occurred (second start winning) but has not yet started is stored in the order of winning.

As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 is associated with the reservation number in the winning order of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the start opening buffer value, the passage of the game ball Random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition in (approach). is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "8"). The number of pending data stored according to the winning in the first starting winning opening and the number of pending data stored according to winning in the second starting winning opening are four at maximum.

The suspension data stored in the special figure suspension storage unit 132SG151 in this way indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and these special figures It becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in the game.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in an individual suspension storage unit. Furthermore, in this way, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing through the second starting winning hole ( In the case of storing the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by entering) in association with the hold number in a separate hold storage unit, variable based on the first hold information One of the display and the variable display based on the second reserved storage information may be executed with priority over the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 132SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 132SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 132SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure variable display corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , such as the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, the reach performance, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, etc., or the various effect display operations without the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. It is configured. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation to be the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The special figure variable display performance control patterns may include, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation, for example, a production control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The effect control data holding area 132SG190 shown in FIG. 21A includes a effect control flag setting portion 132SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 132SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 132SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 132SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section 132SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 132SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1" to " 8") and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command and number of reserved memories Three commands called notification commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, these start winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, pending storage number notification command are associated, and the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for collectively storing drawing reserve storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later, when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1") is started. In addition, the memory contents of the buffer number "0" storing the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decoration symbol variation stop processing executed when the variable display is ended. ing.

Furthermore, in the startup winning command buffer 132SG194A of the characteristic part 132SG, in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 46), a storage for setting a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of the pending display or the active display. A storage area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the variable display and the panel corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A, is secured for each buffer number.

At the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning receive command buffer 132SG194A. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, in the storage area corresponding to the end of the buffer number corresponding to the reserved storage, the starting entrance winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. It will be done.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A shown in FIG. 21(B) is an entry (buffer number " 0") is deleted, and the data stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1") and the starting variable The storage contents of entries after the pending storage of the indication are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 21(B), when the variable display of decorative patterns is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, and each command stored in buffer number "1" is deleted. The commands are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Commands stored in areas corresponding to "4", "5", . . . are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", . . Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start winning prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending memory number notification command are received. If the command is received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the empty area of the receive command buffer 132SG194A at the time of start winning as a reserved storage of each special figure.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

After executing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol process processing in the characterizing section 132SG. In the special symbol process processing in this characterizing portion 132SG, the special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and whether or not the display result is a "big hit", and the type of the big hit , determines (predetermines) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is stored, and the start condition of the special game is established in the winning order (also known as winning order digestion). say).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a plurality of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit", "minor win", or "losing". It includes processing for determining one of the types. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure variable display time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It specifies the contents of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "minor hit" or "losing", when the time-saving state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this jackpot opening processing, a processing for measuring the elapsed time from opening the jackpot, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

The small hit opening preprocessing of step 132 SGS118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit open process of step 132 SGS119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning open process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state, processing for determining whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second count switch 132SG024, and the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end processing of step 132 SGS120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, if the game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the small hit process ends. Further, when the small winning game state ends, if the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (132SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (132SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 132SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. 132SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (132SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 132SGS101 (132SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 132SGS102 (132SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (132SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (132SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. 132SGS105 When the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (132SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 132SGS103 and 132SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (132SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the big hit type/small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (132SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the process of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (132SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (132SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 132SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 132SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 132SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 26(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 132SGS 112 of FIG. 25 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 132SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 24) results in a special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) as a "jackpot". It is determined whether or not to control to the game state or whether to control to the small hit game state as "small hit". Also, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 24), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined to derive and display a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern as a special figure display result. Thus, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, whether or not a big win or a small win is determined. Before it is determined whether or not, it is determined that the special figure display result will be "big hit" or "small hit", and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc., as will be described later, Pre-reading notices such as panel display effects and pending notice effects are executed.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 132SGS121). Then, it is determined whether or not the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start buffer value is 1, select the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. B) is selected from the display result determination table 2, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table, and determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number MR1 is outside the big hit determination range, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step 132 SGS 123b).

In step 132SGS123b, when the random number value MR1 is out of the small hit determination value range, that is, when the variable display result is a loss, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command according to the loss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the starting port buffer value is 1, if the game state is a normal state, select the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. For example, the first special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 30(A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the time saving state A, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. Or if it is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. selects the second special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 29(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Further, in step 132SGS123b, when the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 132SGS127). And, when the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. In the case of variable display, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. Select the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table I shown and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Further, in step 132SGS123a, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the starting port buffer value is 1, if the gaming state is the normal state, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. , select the first special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 30(B), and proceed to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Further, if the starting port buffer value is 2, if the game state is the normal state, if the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 31 (B), the game If the state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 32 (B), the game state is the normal state or the time saving If it is the eighth or later variable display in the state C2, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG.

At step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 extracted at step 132SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and others (normal reach). Then, the variable category designation command (any one shown in FIG. 26B) according to the determination result is set to be transmitted, and the random number value determination process at the time of winning is completed (step 132 SGS132).

In addition, the commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a pending memory in the special symbol pending storage unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). When there is no reservation memory in the special figure reservation storage unit 132SGS151, the demonstration display setting such as transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and the special design normal processing is ended (step 132SGS572). The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see FIG. 23).

Also, if there is a pending memory in the special figure pending storage unit 132SGS151, read and specify the starting port buffer value and the random number MR1 to MR3 from the pending number "1" of the special figure pending storage unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). In addition, the value of the special figure reservation memory number and the total reservation memory number for variable display is reduced by -1, and the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

Also, it is determined whether or not the startup buffer value specified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the starting mouth buffer value is 1, set the variable display special figure designation buffer value to 1 (step 132 SGS544b), if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, A variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Then, the display result determination table corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set (step 132SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read at step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set at step 132SGS555 to determine whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the big hit range, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR1 is in the small hit range (step 132 SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a small hit, a small hit flag is set (step 132 SGS558). Then, the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 18 (E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small hit type is determined by comparing the selected small hit type determination table with the random number MR2 read in step 132SGS542. Determine (step 132 SGS 558b). Then, set a small hit type buffer value corresponding to the determined small hit type, and proceed to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS570.

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range at step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 18 (C) or FIG. 18 (D)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the selected jackpot type determination table and step 132SGS542 are read out. The jackpot type is determined by comparing with the random number MR1 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

At step 132 SGS570, the CPU 103 determines a fixed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process, and the special symbol normal process is terminated (step 132SGS571).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure (step 132 SGS131). Whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined by whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, for example. If it is the variable display of the first special figure, select the variation pattern determination table from the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. step 132 (SGS 132).

For example, if the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 2 or less, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 29 (A), When the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 3 or more, the first special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 29B is selected and the variable display is performed. When the result is a big hit and the game state is the normal state, the first special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 29(C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is one of the time saving states, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. If it is one of the time saving states, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 30(B) is selected.

Also, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display result, game state, the value of the time saving state variable display number counter (variable display number in each time saving state) etc. Select a variation pattern determination table from FIGS. 31 to 34 and proceed to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the time saving state A, the second special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. If so, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table C for illustration.

Also, if the variable display result is off, and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 and the 12th to 685th variable display, the second shown in FIG. Select the special figure variation pattern determination table D, the variable display result is a big hit, the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 and the 12th to 685th variable display For example, the second special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. If it is display and 12th to 685th variable display, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 32 (A) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the 8th to 10th variable display in the normal state or the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. If the game state is the normal state or the eighth to tenth variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 33 (A), the variable display result is a small hit, the game state If it is the 8th to 10th variable display in the normal state or the time saving state C2, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 33 (A) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. If it is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the second special figure variation pattern determination table K shown in FIG. If there is, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 34(C).

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read at step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In addition, in the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies the variation pattern including the random number MR3 read at step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, The specified variation pattern may be determined as the variation pattern for performing variable display.

Then, along with performing the variable display start setting of the special pattern (step 132 SGS136), perform the transmission setting of various commands for starting the variable display such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command according to the determined variation pattern ( Step 132SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the variation pattern (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). In addition, various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG.

In addition, regarding the loss variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, so the non-reach variation pattern is the most determined It is difficult to determine in the order of the fluctuation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, so the super reach β variation pattern is the most It is easy to determine, and it becomes difficult to determine in the order of super reach α and normal reach fluctuation pattern. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, normal reach, It is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special figure fluctuation time, the lower the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit, and the longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit.

Furthermore, among the plurality of variation patterns, the variation patterns for executing the common ready-to-win effect are set so that the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect has a higher degree of expectation for big win. For example, for the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach β, there are provided a variation pattern for executing pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing pseudo-continuous effect, but super reach β for executing pseudo-continuous effect is set to have a higher expectation for big hit than the variation pattern of super reach β which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect. Similarly, for the variation patterns for executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach α, there are provided a variation pattern for executing pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing pseudo-continuous effect, but super reach for executing pseudo-continuous effect The variation pattern of α is set to have a higher expectation for big hit than the variation pattern of super reach α which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect. Further, as for the variation patterns for executing the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, there are provided a variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern for not executing the pseudo-continuous effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is set higher in the case of , than in the variation pattern of the normal reach in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 132 SGS201). When the symbol determination period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 132 SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol determination command is performed ( step 132 SGS 203). Incidentally, the design determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process shown in FIG. 23 by the CPU 103 .

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). When the jackpot flag is set, if any of the time saving flags is set, the time saving flag and other game state flags are cleared (step 132 SGS205), and the value of the time saving state variable display frequency counter is cleared. (Step 132 SGS 206). Furthermore, according to the jackpot type, the transmission setting of the winning start 1 designation command or the winning start 2 designation command and the transmission setting of the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal state are performed, and the process proceeds to step 132 SGS 242 (step 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). Incidentally, the winning start designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 23 by the CPU 103 .

Further, when the pattern fixing period timer is in operation in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern fixing period timer by -1 (step 132SGS209), and determines whether the pattern fixing period timer has timed out ( step 132 SGS 210). When the pattern fixing period timer has not timed out, the special pattern stopping process is ended, and when the pattern fixing period timer has timed out, it is further determined whether or not the stopped pattern being derived and displayed is a lost pattern. (Step 132 SGS211). When the stop symbol that is derived and displayed is a missing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS212), and the derived symbol is displayed. If the displayed stopped symbol is not a lost symbol, it is determined whether or not the displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132 SGS213). When the derivation-displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214), and the derivation display is performed. If the stopped symbol is not a big hit symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing, and the special symbol stopping process is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

In addition, when the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more (step 132SGS216). In addition, the total time saving number counter is the total value of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol in the time saving state (either "5", "11", "689" ) is set.

When the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 132SGS217). Further, it is determined whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether or not the finished variable display is the first special figure variable display (step 132 SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, proceed to step 132 SGS224, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (when the finished variable display is the second special figure variable display), the second The value of the 2 special figure time saving number counter is -1 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). In addition, the second special figure time saving number counter is a counter in which the maximum number of times of time saving control of the second special symbol (one of "1", "7", "685") is set in the time saving state.

In step 132 SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time saving flags is set (whether or not it is controlled to any of the time saving states). If none of the time saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS240, and if any of the time saving flags are set, whether or not the value of the total time saving counter has become 0, that is, is controlled It is determined whether or not the variable display of the maximum number of times of time saving control has ended in the time saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time saving number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS240, and if the value of the total time saving number counter is 0, the set time saving flag is cleared (step 132 SGS226), and the value of the total time saving number counter and proceed to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132 SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the small hit flag is set, the transmission setting of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command is performed according to the small hit type, and the process proceeds to step 132 SGS242. In addition, the hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 23 by the CP 103 . In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, it progresses to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the pattern fixing period timer to the pattern fixing period timer (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of the characteristic portion 132SG), and the pattern fixing corresponding to the set value. Set the transmission settings for the period specification command. Furthermore, the transmission setting of the game state background designation command according to the game state is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 132 SGS243).

Incidentally, the symbol determination period designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 24 as the small hit open process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 first -1 the value of the open time timer (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process shifts to 132SGS293, and if the opening time timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (132SGS283). When it is time to open the large winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the opening of the large winning opening by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening set for transmission in 132SGS285 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. If it is not the time to open the big winning hole, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without going through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

At 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening (132SGS286). When it is time to close the big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the closing state of the big winning opening by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (132SGS288), and the process proceeds to 132SGS289. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening, which is set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. If it is not the closing timing of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS289 without going through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

At 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS289). When the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the processing during small hit opening is completed, and when the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 132SG024 is already turned on, That is, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS290). When the V winning flag is set, the small winning opening process is ended, and when the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS291).

And CPU103 performs the transmission setting of the V prize notification command with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 (132SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Then, at 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (132SGS293), which is a value corresponding to the small winning end processing (S120), and ends the processing during the small winning opening.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS 120 in FIG. 24 as small hit end processing. (132SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not in operation (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small win is set for the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). ). Incidentally, the hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Then, a value corresponding to the small-hit end display time is set in the small-hit end display timer (132SGS304), and the small-hit end processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is in operation, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the small winning end processing is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 132SG024 is already turned on, that is, It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS308). If the V winning flag is set, the minor winning end process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310), and ends the small winning end processing. Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Further, when the small hit end display time has passed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (132SGS311). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the big hit flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from "big win C" to "big win E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (132SGS314). In addition, as shown in FIG. 18(E), the type of big win is determined to be "big win C" when the type of small win in which the V winning is generated is "small win A", and the V winning is determined. If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "jack D", and if the type of small hit that generated the V prize is "small hit C", the type of big hit is determined as "jackpot E". Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315), the determined jackpot type Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 132 SGS316, step 132 SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (S114) ( 132SGS318), ending the small hit ending process.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the small winning game but also during the period until the small winning end display time after the small winning game ends. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the big winning hole just before the end of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024, so that the big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning end processing. It's like

In addition, when the V winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (132SGS319), End the termination process.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 103 SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is performed (step 132SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Also, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set in the big win end display timer, and the big win end processing is ended (step 132 SGS322c). .

Further, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation at step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). ). When the big win end display timer has not timed out, the big win end processing is ended, and when the big win end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not the big win type is the big win A (step 132 SGS325). . When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special figure time saving number counter is set to "1" and the total time saving number counter is set to "5" (step 132SGS326, step 132SGS327). Then, the time saving A flag indicating that the time saving state A is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E, "685" is set to the second special time reduction counter and "689" is set to the total time reduction counter (step 132 SGS329, step 132 SGS330). . Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the time saving C1 flag indicating that the time saving state C1 is controlled is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a), and when the jackpot type is the jackpot E, the time saving state C2. A time saving C2 flag indicating that it is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is set to jackpot D, and the second special time reduction counter is set to "7", and the total time reduction counter is set to "11". ' is set (step 132SGS335, step 132SGS336). Then, the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

At step 132 SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the game state background designation command according to the executed jackpot type (step 132 SGS339b). Incidentally, the game state background designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control processing. Also, the game state background designation command set for transmission is stored (step 132 SGS340), and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 39 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup preparation display process (step 132 SGS70) for displaying a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and a predetermined initialization process. Then (step S71), the clearing of the RAM 122, the setting of various initial values, and the register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12 are performed. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

In this embodiment, for example, the "startup preparation display" described in the embodiment may be described as a "startup preparation image" in the drawings. Since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may be described as "image", and "image" may be described as "display".

Further, the initialization process of step S71 does not initialize the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display display process of step 132 SGS70. In addition, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, and it is possible to confirm that the image display device 5 can normally display the display. .

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power failure recovery display process (step 132 SGS75b) for displaying a power failure recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103; An initial motion control process (step 132SGS75c) for executing the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started is executed.

It should be noted that the startup preparation display processing in this characterizing portion 132SG is the processing of setting a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start at the timing when it is determined that the power-on designation command has been received. Including, the power failure recovery display display processing in this characteristic part 132SG is the timing of determining that the power failure recovery designation command has been received, and the hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by hot start. contains.

Also, after the initial operation control process, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and each Volume/light amount adjustment processing (step 132 SGS79) for adjusting the light amount of the LED, and based on the reception of the background image designation command from the CPU 103, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to the received background. A background image update process (step 132 SGS80) for updating the background image according to the image designation command is executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect, such as a waiting timer for starting the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect can be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 40, the initial motion control process is roughly divided into movable bodies provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (board movable body 32A, board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame movable body 132SG101). to each origin position (step 132SGS100), and to confirm the operation of these movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and on-frame movable body 132SG101) and the operation confirmation control process (step 132 SGS200).

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in the origin placement control processing in FIG. In the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132 SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it is further determined whether or not the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132 SGS402). If the start-time origin placement control completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the demonstration effect (step 132 SGS403). Whether or not it is time to start the demonstration effect is determined, for example, by whether or not the process timer for the demonstration effect is in operation, or the value of the process timer for the demonstration effect is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demonstration effect. It is sufficient to determine whether or not there is.

If it is not the start timing of the demonstration effect, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether or not it is time to start variable display is determined, for example, by whether or not a process timer for variable display of decorative patterns is in operation, or whether the value of the process timer for variable display of decorative patterns is the start of variable display. It is sufficient to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the timing. If it is not the time to start variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, in step 132 SGS402, if the start-time origin placement controlled flag is not set, in step 132 SGS403, if it is not the start timing of the demonstration effect, and in step 132 SGS404, if it is not the start timing of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 controls Identify the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the target movable body (step 132SGS410), and determine whether or not there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor. (Step 132SGS411). If there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable body) is specified (step 132SG412), and the non-detected movable body is identified. By means such as driving a corresponding motor, movement control of the undetected movable body toward the origin is started (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. In step 132SGS411, if there is no movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, that is, if all movable bodies are placed at their respective origin positions, step 132SGS412 and step 132SGS413 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. .

At step 132 SGS414, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the detected movable body (the movable body arranged at the origin position). Then, the operation process data at the time of detection of the detected movable body is set (step 132 SGS415), the timer count of the operation process timer at the time of detection is started, and the operation control of the movable body (detected movable body) and the display control of the image display device 5 are performed. Then, sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8Rk and light emission control of each LED are started (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, the timer count of the origin operation period timer is started, and the origin placement control processing is ended (step 132 SGS417).

Further, when the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts -1 (subtracts) the values of both the detection time operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin operation period timer after the subtraction has timed up (timed out) (step 132SGS421). If the decremented origin operation period timer has not timed up, the operation is controlled based on the process data corresponding to the decremented detection time operation process timer value, and the origin placement control process ends (step 132 SGS422).

If the origin movement period timer is up in step 132SGS421, the movement of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103) of each movable body to be controlled are detected. , 635C) (step 132SGS 424). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS425).

If there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable body) is specified (step 132SG426), and the origin placement control at startup is completed. If the flag is not set, the flag is set and then the origin placement control process is terminated (step 132SGS427). If there is no movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132 SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

42 and 43 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in FIG. 40. FIG. In addition, as described above, the cold start in this characteristic portion 132SG means that the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch 92 is pressed down, that is, the game control at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It means that the initialization process (step S6) is executed in the main process, and the hot start in this characteristic part 132SG means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on while the clear switch 92 is not pressed down, That is, it indicates that the recovery process (step S4) was executed in the game control main process when the pachinko game machine 1 was started.

In the operation confirmation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132 SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132 SGS502). If the operation check execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation check completed flag is set (step 132 SGS503).

If the operation confirmed flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmed flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set ( step 132 SGS 504). If the start-time origin placement control completed flag is not set, the operation check control process is terminated, and if the start-up origin placement control complete flag is set, the operation check execution flag is set (step 132 SGS505), It is determined whether or not there is a memory of a non-detectable movable body (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of the non-detected movable body, the process proceeds to step 132SGS508, and if there is memory of the non-detected movable body, the motion of the non-detected movable body is restricted and then the process proceeds to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

At step 132 SGS508, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by cold start or hot start), and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the activation type. . In step 132 SGS508, it is determined which of the cold start flag and the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, the start type is specified as cold start, and the cold start is responded to. Set the operation confirmation process data (upper), specify the startup type as hot start if the hot start flag is set, and set the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the hot start. good.

Then, the timer count of the operation confirmation process timer (higher order) is started to control the operation of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED, The operation confirmation control process is ended (step 132SGS509).

If the flag during operation confirmation execution is set in step 132SGS502, the effect control CPU120, the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) -1 (subtraction) (step 132SGS510), for operation confirmation after the subtraction Identify the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer (step 132SGS511). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the specified process data is not the completion data, it is further determined whether or not the specified process data is data corresponding to the effect position (step 132 SGS513). If the specified process data is not the data corresponding to the effect position, the process proceeds to step 132 SGS515, and if the specified process data is the data corresponding to the effect position, the effect result of the effect position sensor of the corresponding movable body is stored and then stepped. 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

At step 132 SGS515, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process switching flag is set. If the process-switching flag is set, the action confirmation control process is terminated, and if the process-switching flag is not set, whether or not it is time to start variable object display in which the movable body effect is further executed. is determined (step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing of the target variable display at which the movable body effect is executed, the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are based on the process data specified in step 132SGS511. , the light emission of each LED is controlled, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS517).

In addition, when it is the start timing of the target variable display at which the movable body effect is executed, the start type (whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) is specified, and the specified start type is specified. Accordingly, the subordinate switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 44 is identified (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 44, when the specified activation type is cold start, image display control and LED light emission control in the image display device 5 are specified as the lower switching control type, and the specified activation type is In the case of hot start, image display control in the image display device 5 and sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R are specified as the lower switching control types.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower switching control type to the lower process data among the process data specified in step 132 SGS 518 (step 132 SGS 219), and sets the process switching flag ( step 132 SGS 520). Further, control based on the non-switching process data among the process data specified in step 132SGS218 is executed, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not the completion data, the effect control CPU 120 detects the detection position of each movable body origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C). While storing (step 132SGS530), the malfunctioning movable body is identified from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C). and store it as an operation restricted movable body (step 132SGS531). Further, the operation check executing flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether or not the process switching flag is set (step 132SGS533).

When the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132 SGS534), and the operation confirmation control process is executed by executing the control to switch all the control process data to the performance control process data (lower order). When it ends (step 132SGS535) and the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the same type is cold start, the control process data for sound output control is produced. Control to switch to the control process data (lower order) is executed (step 132SGS536a). In addition, the chance button and the movable body on the board are specified as the movable bodies to be operated, and the process data for the post-confirmation action (upper) are set (step 132 SGS537), and the timer count of the process timer for the post-confirmation action (upper) is performed. to start the operation control of the chance button and the board movable body and the LED light emission control (step 132SGS538). Also, the post-confirmation operation executing flag is set, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS539).

In addition, when the flag during execution of the operation after confirmation is set in step 132SGS501, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts -1 (subtracts) the value of the process timer for operation after confirmation (upper) (step 132SGS540), and after the subtraction The process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value is specified (step 132SGS541). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS542).

If the specified process data is not the completion data, it is further determined whether or not the specified process data is data corresponding to the rendering position (step 132SGS543). If the specified process data is not the corresponding data of the effect position, the operation confirmation control process is ended, and if the specified process data is the corresponding data of the effect position, the chance button 631B and the effect position sensor of the on-board movable body 32A. The detection results of (projection position sensor 635D and effect position sensor 132SG124) are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Further, when the specified process data is completion data, the effect control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the chance button 631B and the origin position sensors of the on-board movable body 32A (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) ( Step 132SGS545), it is determined whether or not the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; 132 SGS547).

At step 132SGS548, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is arranged at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process advances to step 132SGS550, and if the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation limiting movable body. Proceed to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

At step 132 SGS550, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to switch the process data of the movable body control and the LED light emission control to the effect control process data (lower order). Then, the operation confirmation in-execution flag is cleared, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and the operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in FIG. Control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the process data for operation confirmation (upper order), and display control is executed based on the process data for effect control (lower order).

Further, as shown in FIG. 45(B), in the execution period of the switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, the movable body control and the LED light emission control are based on the operation confirmation process data (upper). Display control and sound output control are executed based on the effect control process data (lower order).

Further, as shown in FIG. 45(C), during the execution period of the post-confirmation operation control, the chance button 631B and the operation control of the movable body on the board (movable body control) and the LED light emission control are the process data for the post-confirmation operation. (upper rank), display control and sound output control are executed based on the process data for effect control (lower rank).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 39 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first reads ahead based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the pre-reading notice setting process in the feature part 132SG. As a notice, a reservation display notice effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the reservation display, and a variable display of the second special pattern once in the time saving state A and four times of the second special pattern immediately after that. A panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for the variable display of , and a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit can be executed at different ratios according to the display mode of these panel images. there is In addition, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect, the value corresponding to the display mode of the determined pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending storage of the object of effect in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , when it is decided to execute the panel display effect, a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined panel display is set as a panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the effect target in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , the display of these hold display and panel display should be started (see FIG. 21(B)).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes result effect execution processing (step 132SGS162). In the result production execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and the final variable display in the time saving state (time saving state A is immediately after the time saving state ends) (variable display of 4 times) is completed and the control is performed to the normal state (during the pattern fixing period), the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are displayed on the image display device 5. A process for executing the result production is performed. In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2, exceptionally, the result production may be executed from the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special figure to the 11th variable display. be.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes rush effect execution processing (step 132SGS163). In rush performance execution processing, for example, a rush performance is executed to notify that the time-saving state is controlled from during the ending performance of the big win game to during the first variable display after the big win game.

After executing the process of step 132SGS163, the effect control CPU 120 performs any of the following steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, and step 132SGS177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example. Select and execute.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 provides a command (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command) specifying to stop display of the confirmed decoration symbol received in the variable display effect process. Based on the receipt of the confirmation command or the fourth symbol confirmation command, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped over the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state is received from the main board 11 at the end of the symbol fixing period. Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "4". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the small hit of step 132 SGS176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "7", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step 132 SGS177 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46. FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command is received. Determine (step 132SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A are stored in the buffer. It is shifted upward by one number (step 132SGS602). The content of the buffer number "0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift. If the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605), and the stop design of the decorative design according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 132SGS606).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a time saving remaining number display process (step 132 SGS608) for displaying the remaining time saving control number (time saving remaining number) in the time saving state on the image display device 5, and the remaining time saving control number is a predetermined number in the time saving state. In this case, time saving end countdown display processing (step 132 SGS609) for displaying the countdown of the remaining number of times until the time saving control ends (also called countdown effect, time saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 (step 132 SGS609), during variable display A variable display notice effect determination process (step 132 SGS610) for executing a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit is executed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game state, and variable display result (step 132SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

Each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

In addition, as will be described later, the feature part 132SG exemplifies a mode in which the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B, time saving state C2, time saving state B, time saving state C2 When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure or the like during the variable display, the power Even if is restored, the display of the remaining number of time saving is not resumed during the variable display, and the display of the remaining number of time saving is restarted at the start of the next variable display (timing when the value of the time saving number counter is updated) good. In addition, power supply is not performed in the state (during the customer waiting state) where the variable display is not executed because there is no reserved memory although it is controlled to one of the time saving state B, the time saving state C2, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2. Even if it is stopped, the display of the remaining number of time saving will not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the remaining number of time saving will be displayed from the start of the next variable display or the variable display after the value of the time saving number counter is updated. should be restarted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (chance button 631B, etc.) are controlled (132SGS613). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing section 132SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (132SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

(Flow of production)
Next, the flow of presentation in the variable display in the characteristic portion 132SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 48, when the game state is the normal state, the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win effect is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special figure, and a predetermined period elapses, then part of the ready-to-win effect. As an image display device 5, an operation prompting image prompting the user to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a big hit, the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the lower board movable body 32B operates as part of the ready-to-win performance. is executed, the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit (X6 to X10). After that, after the image display device 5 displays a notification image for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the game ball is hit toward the right game area in the big win game state for the player. A right-handed notification for notifying that these game balls are to be won in the big winning opening and a round effect during the round game are displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is the jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, when the jackpot game ends, a rush effect A is executed to indicate that control has been made to the time-saving state A through the jackpot ending effect. be. During execution of the rush performance A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure is executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A, as the rush effect A, the time-saving state A hits the game ball toward the right game area for the player, so that the game ball goes to the second start winning opening. is executed to notify that it is in the state of executing the variable display of the second special figure by winning (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the rush performance A, the variable display of the second special figure is started when the game ball wins the second starting winning hole. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player hits the game ball toward the right game area and the game ball wins the second start winning slot, the image display device 5 displays a panel corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special figure as a panel effect. Additional images are displayed. These panel images are displayed at maximum five (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of pending memories ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from the time saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory of the second special figure is displayed. be started. In the variable display, when the decorative symbols stop at the ready-to-win combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the lower board movable body 32B operates is executed. After that, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image (“Aim for V!”) is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed (B1 to B3).

When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during the small winning game according to the image, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image showing that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed (B4-B5 ).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop with a combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is a loss. is reported. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth pending storage of the second special figure, after the number of times of variable display of the remaining second special figure is notified in the image display device 5, the second special figure An image similar to that of the first reserved memory is displayed (B6-B8).

Then, when all the variable displays corresponding to the pending storage of the second special symbol are lost, the second special symbol is suspended on the image display device 5 during the design determination period of the variable display of the last second special symbol. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays corresponding to the memory have been completed is displayed. After that, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special figure is executed ten times. In addition, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed, an image is also displayed for instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In one of the time-saving states, the player hits the game ball into the right game area so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special figure is mainly executed. After the end of the big hit game via the small hit of these second special symbols, it will be controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C2.
As will be described later, when the power is cut off and restored during the periods of (A1) to (A4) in FIG. is performed. 49 (A4) immediately before the end (within 5 seconds until the end) and the power is restored, and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps the period of FIG. 49 (A5), the image display device 5 From FIG. 49(A6) onwards, the display during restoration is displayed (the timing at which the display during restoration is not displayed is shown in FIGS. 50(B3) and (B7)), and the movable body performs an initial action for 26 seconds. 49(A5), when the power is cut off and then restored, the restoration-in-progress display is displayed until the image display device 5 starts the variable display corresponding to the second panel, and the initials are displayed for 26 seconds by the movable body. An operation (the fluctuation time of the first time reduction is longer than 26 seconds) is performed. 49 (A10) (five seconds or more until fluctuation ends) and when the power is restored (disconnected pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration in progress display up to FIG. 49 (B7), , the initial motion in the normal mode is performed until FIG. 50(B6), and the initial motion in the shortened mode (in consideration of the button effect) is performed from FIG. 49 (A10) and the power is restored (hit pattern), the image display device 5 displays the image during restoration up to FIG. 50 (B3), the initial operation of the mode (considering "Aim for V") is performed.In addition, the lighting mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e during the operation of the under-board movable body 32B is as follows. The initial operation differs from FIG. 50(B1).

50 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the power is restored, and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. After the display period of the preparation display has elapsed, "Aim for V" can be visually recognized, and the movable body is based on the main command (small hit start designation command or small hit opening designation command) received in FIG. The initial action after display/hide is changed to a shortened mode. Also, the opening of the big winning opening is started during the display period of the activation preparation display. 50 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds remaining until the next round)), if the power is cut off and restored, the image display device 5 will issue an open command (second round) after V winning (round 1) ) until reception, a special mode (reporting that a small hit has been made) display during recovery is displayed, the movable body performs an initial action in a normal mode (completed by the start of the next round), and the big prize opening is activated Opening is started during the display period of the preparation display.

When it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, that is, when the variable display result is a small hit and the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B, as shown in FIG. As a variable display of the figure, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image (“Aim for V!”) is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during the small winning game according to the image, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the big-hit game via the small-hit game ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the big-hit game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after executing the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different according to the number of times that the time saving state has already been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state B is performed. be started. In the time-saving state B, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in a state where the background image of the city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state B, if the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and the 7th variable display (the 7th variable display of the second special figure) is completed, the 7th variable The result production is started during the display pattern confirmation period. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol at the start of the result production, variable display of the second special symbol a maximum of four times according to the pending memory of the remaining second special symbols (remaining pending memory). Is executed in a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) (C9-C11).

When neither the big hit nor the small hit is achieved in any of the variable displays according to the remaining reserved storage, the stage background image is started to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). An image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed. After that, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until the ten times of variable display are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after finishing the big hit game via the small hit, that is, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after finishing the big hit game of the big hit E, first, it is the same as the case of being controlled to the time saving state B. 2, a stop display with a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, a display of an image displaying "Aim for V!" , display of an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state. In a state where a part of the image displayed on the device 5 is different, the rush effect B and the second background display are displayed, and the decoration pattern variable display is executed seven times (C1 to C9 in FIG. 51).

Here, as shown in FIG. 52, when the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and the seventh variable display of the decoration pattern (the seven variable display of the second special figure) ends, the 7 The result effect is started in the pattern fixing period of the variable display for the first time. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, during the execution period of the result production, the variable display of the decoration pattern (variable display of the second special figure) is executed in a very short special figure variation time (0.5 seconds) three times. If the result of the variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit even in the three times of variable display of decorative patterns (8th to 10th variable display), further variable display of decorative patterns (11th variable display) ) is executed (D1-D3).

Then, when the variable display result in the eleventh variable display is neither a big win nor a small win, the image display device 5 emits light according to the operation of the board movable body 32A along with the movement of the board movable body 32A. An effect image is displayed. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to the standby position (upper position of the image display device 5) before the fall, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a dark display (black color). Is displayed. After the dark display ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Further, on the image display device 5, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the time saving control number in the time saving state in the image display device 5 is 685 times, that is, substantially During the time saving state, a V-stock effect is executed to notify that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win. After that, when the V-stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in FIGS. 52 (D2) to 52 (D8), in the V stock effect from the result effect in the time saving state C2, unlike the result effect corresponding to the time saving state B, the result effect is finished. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time saving control will continue to be executed, the right hitting notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. It should be noted that the right hitting notification image in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the twelfth variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
As shown in FIGS. 48 to 52, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the left side thereof corresponds to the first reserved memory. A first pending display area 132SG011 is provided. For example, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 in response to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the value of the first reserved memory number is 4. Four first suspension displays 132SG001 are displayed side by side in the one suspension display area 132SG011.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the lower left side of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above it, a second reservation display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second reservation storage is provided. (See FIG. 103). For example, in response to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 provided at the left end of the display area, and the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Correspondingly, four second suspension displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second suspension display area 132SG012.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to complete the winning order, when the second reservation memory is stored in the normal game state, the second reservation display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first reservation display area 132SG011, and the time saving state , the first pending display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second pending display area 132SG012 when the second pending storage is stored. 2 pending display 132SG002 may be displayed.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small number corresponding to the decoration pattern A display area 5SL for displaying patterns (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, the time saving remaining display 132SG201, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 For such, by displaying it on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, the effect image overlaps and the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display On the other hand, by displaying the decoration pattern on the back side (lower layer) than the production image, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the production image from being reduced due to overlapping of the decoration patterns. You may do so.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as the effect of shielding all or part of the screen, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in the state of variable display. The effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a state where the on-board movable body is positioned at the origin position, and FIG. 53B is a diagram showing a state where it is positioned at the performance position. FIG. 54A shows a state in which the under-board movable body is positioned at the original position, and FIG. 54B shows a state in which it is positioned at the performance position. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a state in which (A) the frame movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which they are located at the performance position.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, on the front side of the game board 2, an upper board movable body 32A and a lower board movable body 32B are provided. Since these on-board movable bodies 32A and lower-board movable bodies 32B are provided on the game board 2, they are also called "board-side movable bodies". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, the opening/closing door frame 3a is provided with a frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B. These frame upper movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also called "frame side movable body" because they are provided in the opening/closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is inaccessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed, and the frame-side movable body is accessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed. It is a movable body.

As shown in FIG. 53, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. and a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A so as to be vertically movable. More specifically, the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position in front of the upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It can be moved between an effect position in front of the display screen and substantially in the center, and a part (lower part) overlaps the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps the display area at the effect position.

Also, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 at the origin position, and is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 at the effect position. Further, a plurality of on-board movable body LEDs 9d are provided inside, and the front face can be illuminated by these on-board movable body LEDs 9d.

As shown in FIG. 54, the under-board movable body 32B has a shape that imitates a "fist" when viewed from the front. , and is vertically movable by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. Specifically, the under-board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position at the front lower portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It can be moved between an effect position in front of the display screen and substantially in the center, and a part (upper part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the effect position.

Further, the under-board movable body 32B is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG133 at the origin position, and is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG134 at the effect position. Further, a plurality of under-board movable body LEDs 9e are provided inside, and the front face can be illuminated by these under-board movable body LEDs 9e.

As shown in FIG. 55, the first effect unit 132SG100 includes a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes forward and upward from the upper side of the opening/closing door frame 3a, and a plate-like base member 132SG105 that extends upward and downward on the front side of the base member 132SG105. and a frame movable body 132SG101 which is movably provided in the frame. The frame movable body 132SG101 has a shape imitating a character (not shown) displayed in various effects of the pachinko game machine 1, and a frame top decoration part 132SG111L having a shape imitating the wings of the character is provided on the back side. , 132SG111R are operatively provided.

The first effect unit 132SG100 includes a drive motor 132SG102 and a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame movable body 132SG101, and the frame movable body 132SG101 is positioned at the origin position. an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the upper frame movable body 132SG101 is positioned at the production position; A driving mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member for transmitting power to the decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R; An effect position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R are positioned at the effect position, and a frame movable body LED 9f for causing the front surface of the frame movable body 132SG101 and the frame decorative portions 132SG111L and 132SG111R to emit light. and have

In this way, the frame movable body 132SG101 moves vertically between the origin position shown in FIG. 55(A) and the production position shown in FIG. You can move in any direction. In addition, the frame decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are changed into a non-expanded state in which they are housed at the original positions on the left and right sides of the back surface of the frame movable body 132SG101, and an unfolded state in which they protrude so as to expand to the production positions on the left and right sides of the back surface. The non-deployment mode changes to the deployment mode according to the upward movement of the frame movable body 132SG101, and the deployment mode changes to the non-deployment mode according to the downward movement of the frame movable body 132SG101. .

Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the chance button 631B is formed of a cylindrical member having an operation surface formed on its upper portion, and is provided so as to be vertically movable with respect to a base portion 600A formed on the upper portion of the operation unit 600. ing. Specifically, the chance button 631B is positioned between the origin position (see FIG. 55A) where the operation surface projects slightly upward from the base portion 600A and the operation detection position where the operation surface is below the origin position. It is movable in the vertical direction, and is urged upward so that it is always held at the origin position. is detected by

In addition, the chance button 631B is operated by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a forward/backward motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the forward/backward motor 635F to the chance button 631B. is movable in the vertical direction between a performance position above the origin position. That is, the chance button 631B can be changed between a first operable state located at the origin position and a second operable state located at the production position by the advance/retreat motor 635F. In any of the states, the pressing operation is possible up to the operation detection position.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, detected by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and detected by the projecting position sensor 635D at the presentation position. Also, a plurality of chance button LEDs 9g are provided inside, and the operation surface can emit light by these chance button LEDs 9g.

In the present embodiment, board-side movable bodies 32A and lower-board movable bodies 32A and 32B are exemplified as the board-side movable bodies provided on the game board 2, and a chance button is used as the frame-side movable body provided in the opening/closing door frame 3a. 631B and frame-top movable body 132SG101 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above. , forms, and operation modes can be changed in various ways.

[Various productions]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. FIG. 57 shows (A) a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the SP reach variable display period, and (B) a diagram that shows a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of effects. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "prediction of the movable body" that suggests the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before the variable display (also called target variation) targeted for the prefetching notice is started. is.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 provides “starting notice”, “pseudo continuous notice”, “movable object notice”, and “reach notice” as notice effects suggesting that the variable display will be controlled for a big win. and "button notice" can be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a "win/fail button effect" as a decision effect for notifying whether or not the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E) is controlled to the big hit game state. is executable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "fanfare effect", "round effect", "promoting effect", and "ending effect" as the jackpot effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving medium performance" and "result performance" as time-saving performances that can be executed in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C as special states.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demonstration effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state in which no game is played.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), "notice at start", "notice of movable body/notice of pseudo continuation", and "notice of reach/notice of button", for example, the variable display mode becomes the N-reach mode and the N-reach effect is performed. is executed, or before the SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the SP ready-to-win mode. Also, the "win/fail button effect" is an effect that can be executed in the second half of the SP ready-to-win effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed in a fanfare period of waiting from the start of control of the big win game state to the start of the round game in which the big winning opening is open. , the "round effect" is executed during a period in which the opening control of the big winning hole is executed in a round game in which the big winning hole is repeatedly opened and closed, and the "interval effect" is the big winning in the round game. The "ending effect" is executed during the period during which the mouth closing control is executed, and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game state. The fanfare period, the round game period, and the ending period are managed by the CPU 103 . In the first rounds of big wins C, D, and E, the big win openings are opened in a small win opening pattern (opening and closing are repeated for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promoting effect" is executed during a special round interval period from the end of the opening period of the third round of the big winning openings in jackpots C, D, and E to the start of the opening period of the fourth round. .

(Forecast movable body notice)
As shown in FIG. 56, "Preview movable body notice" is the target of the prefetch notice effect that is executed before the variable display of the reserved memory that is the target of the prefetch notice effect (hereinafter referred to as target variation) is executed. This is an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A operates in a plurality of variable displays corresponding to the pending memories that did not occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A1), when the variable display is being executed in the state where the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is "2", the starting winning prize occurs, and the starting winning prize occurs. If the execution of the forward-looking movable body notice is determined based on the fact that the variable display based on the pending memory before is non-reach out (that is, the special figure fluctuation time is 12 seconds or less), the variable display is stopped After that (see FIG. 58A2), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display is started, the board movable body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the board An effect display 132SG401 that emphasizes the upper movable body 32A is displayed and a sound effect is output (see FIG. 58 (A3)). )reference). This operation is executed before the start of the variable display (target variation) based on the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. It is executed when the variable display (target variation) based on the reserved storage that has been set is started (see FIGS. 58A5 to 58A7).

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading movable body notice is illustrated as an effect pattern that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays until the target change starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute a low-expectation effect pattern in which the advance notice of the movable body ends before the target change starts. Further, it may be possible to execute a plurality of performance patterns with different degrees of expectation for big hits depending on the moving speed when the on-board movable body 32A descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(notice at the time of start)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "notice at start" is an effect suggesting whether or not the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display is started. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the standard color, and can be changed to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the advance notice at the start suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. . In this embodiment, a production pattern ending in white, a production pattern ending in blue, a production pattern ending in green, and a production pattern ending in red can be executed, and a big hit is expected in the order of white, blue, green, and red. It is considered to be a high degree production pattern.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B1, when it is decided to execute the advance notice at the time of start along with the start of the variable display, the entire display area is extinguished or becomes low-luminance and becomes dark, A character display 132SG402 of "!!" is displayed at approximately the middle position of the display area (see FIG. 59(B2)). Then, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see FIG. 59(B3)).

In the case of the effect pattern ending in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or is enlarged, and after the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in FIG. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a character display 132SG403 of "?" is displayed above the active display 132SG003 to notify that the final display color is white (see FIG. 59(B3a)).

In the case of the effect pattern ending in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 59(B4)), and in FIG. When a predetermined time has passed since the periphery was displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 is broken and the character display 132SG404 of "!?" is displayed to notify that the final display color is blue (Fig. 59 ( See B4a)).

In the case of the production pattern that ends in green, the display colors of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually change to white, blue, and green in order and are enlarged (see FIGS. 59(B4) and (B5)). At 59(B3), when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 is broken and the character display 132SG405 of "heat" is displayed, and the final display color is green. Something is reported (see FIG. 59 (B5a)).

In the case of the effect pattern ending in red, the display colors of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings change step by step in the order of white, blue, green, and red, and after being enlarged and displayed (see FIGS. 59(B4) to (B6)). ), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in FIG. (See FIG. 59 (B6a)).

In this way, the "notice at the start" is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether the pending display will change (see FIG. 59 (B2) to (B6)), and a period to notify the change result of the pending display and a result notification part (see FIGS. 59(B3a), (B4a), (B5a), and (B6a)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, by changing the display mode such as the display color and size of the active display 132SG003, the degree of expectation for a big hit is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by changing the display mode other than the display color and size. Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by changing the display modes of not only the active display 132SG003 but also the first suspension display 132SG001 and the second suspension display 132SG002. Moreover, the change pattern of display color and size is not limited to the above, and other change patterns may be executed.

(Movable body notice)
As shown in FIG. 56, "Movable body advance notice" means that the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position before the pseudo-continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed in the variable display. At the same time, the chance button 631B vibrates. The production pattern of the movable body notice is a "vibration (small) pattern" with a small vertical vibration width, and a "vibration (large) pattern" with a large vertical vibration width and a high probability of hitting the jackpot. Yes, and one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined according to the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (C1), when it is decided to execute the movable body announcement along with the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the pseudo continuous effect, The body 32A vibrates vertically a plurality of times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see FIG. 60(C2)). Further, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A, and the speakers 8L and 8R output sound effects.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the movable body notice is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable The movable body announcement may also be executed in the display (for example, the non-reach fluctuation pattern).

Further, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern A) before starting the operation of the chance button 631B in the initial operation described later or along with the advance operation. In addition, the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern B) to suggest the degree of expectation as an effect during fluctuation, and the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern C) as a decoration (enjoyment) at the time of a big hit or when the movable body is operated (pattern C). Is possible. Each of pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C has a different vibration mode (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, movement time) and a lamp mode (pattern A: initial emphasis, pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, pattern C: rainbow color, lighting in the color corresponding to the effect displayed when the movable body moves) and sound output mode (pattern A: initialization notification or silence, pattern B: changing BGM, pattern C: blessing sound at the time of a big hit , moving body production sound) are different.

As will be described later, the initial emphasis mode is a light emission pattern (luminance, light emission time, etc.) dedicated to the initial operation, and is therefore a light emission pattern that is not used in all effect operation control (FIG. 67(B) reference).

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "pseudo continuous notice" indicates whether or not the variable display resumes after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols. It is a production that encourages whether or not to make it look like multiple variable displays. The pseudo-continuous effect includes a double pattern in which the variable display is restarted twice and a triple pattern in which the variable display is restarted three times and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the double pattern, and the variable display results. Either a double pattern or a triple pattern is determined according to .

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (C1), when the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is started, and when the execution of the movable body notice is determined, the movable body notice is executed. (See FIG. 60 (C2)). After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 60 (C3)), and the number that is one larger than the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is displayed. is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 60 (C4)). Deceleration is displayed before the stop display position in the symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 60 (C5)).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed, the decoration symbol having the same number as the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 60 (C6)), the variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the left decorative design display area 5L, the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 60 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is not executed, a decoration symbol with a number one larger than the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. is displayed, and the variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 60 (C10)).

In addition, in FIG. 60 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of the pseudo consecutive notice of the two-continuous pattern, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left decorative symbol display area 5L is variably displayed. 60 (C8)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. It becomes a ready-to-win state (see FIG. 60 (C9)), and develops into an SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, in FIG. 60 (C7), after the variable display of the decoration pattern is resumed, in the case of the pseudo consecutive notice of the triple pattern, after the flow of FIGS. At 60 (C8) and (C9), it becomes a reach mode and develops into SP reach production.

In this way, the "pseudo continuous notice" is an introductory part as a period for prompting whether or not the variable display will be resumed (see (C3) to (B5) in FIG. 60), and the result of whether or not the variable display is resumed. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 60(C6), (C10), and (C9)) as a period for notifying of.

(Reach notice)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "ready-to-reach notice" starts the variable display of decorative patterns, and after the decorative patterns that have been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are stopped and displayed, the left decorative patterns are displayed. This is an effect to arouse whether or not the decorative pattern of the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the area 5L is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not the ready-to-win mode is achieved.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1), after the variable display is started, after the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stopped and displayed (FIG. 61 ( (See D2)) Before the stop display position in the variablely displayed right decorative design display area 5R, the deceleration display of the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design stop-displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is started. (See FIG. 61 (D3)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, if the ready-to-win mode is not established, the left decoration is performed. A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see (D4), (D5) and (D7) in FIG. 61), In the ready-to-win mode, the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are stopped and displayed at the stop display positions (see (D4), (D5), and (D6) in FIG. 61). ).

In addition, the reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, "333" etc.) that constitutes the big hit display result from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed. ), except for one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) (for example, left pattern and right pattern, etc.) are displayed in a stopped state, and the one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) is variably displayed. It is a mode (also referred to as reach effect) to perform.

(button notice)
As shown in FIG. 56, "button notice" is a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L in the right decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win notice is executed. This is an effect that is executed during a period from when the deceleration display is started until a predetermined operation effective period elapses, and promotes the button operation that determines whether or not the ready-to-win mode is set.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61(D4) to (D5), the operation of the chance button 631B is urged from the start of the deceleration display of the decoration pattern until the predetermined operation effective period elapses. This is an operation prompt effect, which is started by displaying an operation prompt display and a button image simulating the chance button 631B. First, when the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display and the button image are hidden and the process ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice includes a "long press pattern" that encourages a long press operation of the chance button 631B for a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that prompts the chance button 631B to be repeatedly pressed for a predetermined operation period. and a "single-hit pattern" that prompts the chance button 631B to be pressed once. Depending on the result of the variable display, non-execution, "long-press pattern", "continuous-hit pattern", and "single-hit pattern" are available. one is determined. Incidentally, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation-promoting display is "long press!" for the "long press pattern", "successive hits!" for the "continuous hit pattern", and "press!" for the "single hit pattern".

In this way, the "button notice" has an operation promotion part as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 61 (D5)), and a period for notifying the result of whether or not the reach mode has been entered by the operation. and a result reporting part (see (D6) and (D7) in FIG. 61).

(Accept/fail button effect)
As shown in FIG. 56, "win/fail button effect" promotes button operation to decide whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, It is an effect that notifies the result of whether or not it becomes.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E1), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the reach title, which is the type of SP reach production, is notified, and the SP reach production (for example, a friend character and an enemy character 62 (E2), (E3)), the operation of the chance button 631B is prompted to "Press !!” and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B are displayed (see FIG. 62 (E4)).

Then, when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, the operation prompting display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 are hidden and the process ends. . Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position while the movable body LED 9e is illuminated in a predetermined luminescent color, and effect display 132SG413 that emphasizes the underboard movable body 32B. is displayed, a predetermined effect sound is output, and it is notified that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 62 (E5)). After that, after an image (not shown) showing that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the combination of symbols for confirming the big win is stopped and notified that the big win has been achieved (see FIG. 62 ( E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a failure, the lower board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and after the display 132SG414 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. , it is notified that the variable display result is a miss (see (E10) to (E12) in FIG. 62).

The production patterns are one in which the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position and the operation promotion display is displayed, and the other in which the chance button 631B is moved from the origin position to the production position and the operation promotion display is displayed, and the operation promotion display is displayed. A performance pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that in the case is executable. Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/fail button presentation" includes an operation promotion part (see FIG. 62 (E4)) as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and whether or not the result of the variable display by the underboard movable body 32B is a big hit. and a result reporting part (see FIGS. 62(E5) and (E10)) as a period for reporting the result of .

(Fanfare production)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "fanfare effect" is a effect for announcing information about the controlled big win after the game is controlled to the big win game state and before the round game is started. In addition, the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the number of balls put out, the game state after the jackpot (time saving state A, B, C1, C2), etc., and other information is included. may be

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F1), when the big win game state is started after the combination of the big win confirmed symbols is stopped and the variable display result becomes the big win, the big win is started. A display 132SG420 is displayed to indicate that (see FIG. 63 (F2)). In addition, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIGS. 65 (A1) and (A2), the frame movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot game state ends. , It is maintained at the production position until the time saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 constituting "BIG BONUS!!" It is moved and displayed to the center of the screen (see (F3) to (F6) in FIG. 63). Further, in the case of a 3-round big hit, the character image forming "SMALL BONUS!!" It will be displayed (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after displaying the right-handed promotion display 132SG431 for promoting the player to hit the game ball into the right game area (see FIG. 63 (F7) ), the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position, and displays a right-handed promotion display 132SG432 indicating that the player is aiming for the big winning opening (see FIG. 63 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part as a period for informing information about the big hit (see (F2) to (F6) in FIG. 63), and the operation direction of the hitting operation handle, that is, right-handed operation. and an operation direction notification part to be notified (see FIGS. 63(F7) and (F8)).

(Round production)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "round effect" is a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state after the fanfare period is over and the big winning game state is controlled. This is an effect in which winning information and the like are announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63(F9) to (F11), during the round game, a character display 132SG450, a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds, and the number of winning balls in the round game are displayed. a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453 that has been paid out from the start of the big win game state to the present time, and the number of consecutive big wins and the total number of balls played during the consecutive game. A display 132SG454 and a right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 for promoting a right-hand hitting operation are displayed.

Incidentally, when a big hit is made in the time-saving state, an effect of "Aim for the V!" Also during the round effect period of FIG. 63 (F9), the effect of "Aim for V!!" is continuously performed.

In addition, the images displayed in the round effects may be moving images, and the character explanation effects, "FINAL BATTLE" explanation effects, and story effects may be performed in the form of a picture-story show for each round. For example, when the explanation effect of character A is performed in the first round, the explanation effect of character B is performed in the second round. The display during recovery is displayed until the round ends, and after that, when the second round starts, the explanation performance of the character A performed in the first round is performed again. When the power is cut off, the effect control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power cut off. be considerate of others.

Also, in the round effect, a PV effect corresponding to the selected music may be performed. For example, in the first round, if the PV effect (until the chorus) is performed according to the selected song A, in the second round, if there is no change in the song, the PV effect (the chorus part) will continue in accordance with the selected song A. However, after the power is cut off in the middle of the 1st round, when the power is restored, the restoration in progress display (& no sound) is displayed until the 1st round ends, and then when the 2nd round starts , the PV production (A melody) corresponding to the selected music piece A is performed again. Further, when the selected song A is changed to the selected song B in the first round, the PV production corresponding to the selected song B is performed in the first round, and thereafter, the PV corresponding to the selected song B is continued in the second round. A performance will be performed, but after the power is cut off in the middle of the 1st round, when the power is restored, the restoration in progress display (& no sound) will be displayed until the 1st round ends, and then the 2nd round will start. At that time, a PV production corresponding to the selected music piece A is performed. In the event of a power failure, the effect control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power failure. When the ball display "150" is displayed during one round game and the power is restored after the power is cut off, the ball display displayed during the next round game becomes "0").

(promotion performance)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "promoting effect" is a big hit in which the variable display result of the second special symbol is a big hit display result, that is, in the round interval of the third round game in the big hits C to E, the round game is performed. It is a round promotion performance in which whether or not to continue (round promotion) (whether or not the relevant big win is promoted to big wins D and E (10 rounds) having a larger number of rounds than big win C (3 rounds)) is notified.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the scheduled output representing the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. The number-of-balls counter display 132SG351 is displayed, and promotion effect is started.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional number-of-balls display 132SG353 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the number counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 64 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number-of-balls counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B and, for example, "Press!!" An operation prompting display 132SG355 and a gauge display 132SG356 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting the single-press operation of the chance button 631B is executed (see FIG. 64 (F23)).

Next, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D or the jackpot E, the timing at which the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the operation valid period elapses without the pressing operation being detected. At the same timing, the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 64 (F24)), the teammate character attacks, and the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 132SG351 is variably displayed (see FIG. 64 (F24)). 64 (see F24)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 70 (F25)). Then, the expected number of put-out balls counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", which is the expected number of put-out balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is stopped and displayed. , the promotion to the 10-round jackpot is announced (see FIG. 64 (F26)).

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, at the timing when the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period passes without the pressing operation being detected. , an image (not shown) in which the lower board movable body 32B did not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character could not be defeated was displayed, indicating that the 10-round jackpot was not achieved, that is, the 10-round jackpot was not reached. It is notified that promotion has failed (see FIG. 64 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" consists of an introductory part (see Fig. 64 (F21) to (F23)) as a period for inciting whether or not to be promoted, and a result notification part (Fig. 64 (F24) to (F27)).

(ending production)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "ending effect" is a effect in which the end of the big win and the information about the game state to be controlled after the end of the big win are announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (F12) to (F14), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round game ends, after the jackpot ends, " FINAL BATTLE effect" is started (controlled to the time saving state A), and the right hitting promotion indicating that the game ball is launched to the right game area and aimed at the variable winning ball device 6B. Display 132SG430 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, when the third round game is finished, it is notified that the "BATTLE RUSH presentation" is started after the jackpot is finished (controlled to the time-saving state C1). (Refer to FIG. 63 (F32) and (F34)). In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, when the promotion performance (promotion failure) is completed, it is notified that the "BATTLE RUSH performance" is started (controlled to the time-saving state B) after the completion of the jackpot. (See FIG. 64 (F32) and (F34)). In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the 9th round game is finished, the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is started after the jackpot is finished (controlled to time saving state B or time saving state C1). (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 64).

In this way, the "ending effect" is an introduction part as an introduction period (see FIG. 63 (F12) and FIG. 64 (F31)), and a time saving state notification part (FIG. 63 (F13), in which information about the time saving state is notified). 64 (F32) and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part (see FIG. 63 (F14)) for notifying the operation direction of the hitting operation handle, that is, performing a right-handed operation.

(short time production)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "time-saving medium effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, is controlled to the time-saving state ( 49 and 51).

(result production)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "result effect" is an effect for notifying that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or "BATTLE RUSH effect" ends, that is, the end of the time-saving state control (FIG. 50, See Figure 51). Further, when the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 65 (B1) and (B2), the frame movable body 132SG101 descends from the production position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position. be done.

(Customer waiting demonstration)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game standby) state is notified. , and a variable display start designation command, which is started when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (G1), after the initial operation is started in the initial operation control process accompanying power-on, when the initial operation ends (FIG. 66 (G2 )), and the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 66 (G3)). Then, in FIG. 66 (G1), when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is hidden, A customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 66 (G4)).

In the customer-waiting demo production, a plurality of allied characters A to D appearing in various productions (images of enemy characters may be included) and moving images introducing the content in order are displayed (Fig. 66 ( (G4) to (G7)), while the image of allied characters A to D is displayed (see FIG. 66 (G8)), the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position, and a predetermined time elapses. After the lapse of time, it rises to the origin position (see (G9) to (G10) in FIG. 66), and the first background display 132SG310 representing the daytime city corresponding to the normal state is displayed as a background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 66 ( G11)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 66 (G12)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times.

Also, in the present embodiment, the form in which various effects shown in FIG. 56 can be executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than the above may be executed. Moreover, the effect mode in each effect can be changed variously, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than the above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the mode of sound will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67A is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and FIG. 67B is a diagram showing the mode of the lamp/sound according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), the effect control CPU 120, when the power is turned on (during the cold start process or the hot start process), the movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, Initial operation control for initial movement of the upper frame movable body 132SG101), and production of movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) in various effects Effect operation control to operate in a corresponding mode can be executed.

"Initial motion control" includes non-detection time motion control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is positioned other than the origin position, and once leaves the origin position when the movable body is positioned at the origin position, "Origin placement control (short initial operation control)" including non-detection operation control for returning to the origin position from a position away from the origin position, and confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally. and "action check control (long initial action control)" for moving the movable body from the origin position to the performance position and then moving it from the performance position to the origin position.

Specifically, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable body has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on the game island). If the return to the origin could not be performed during the previous operation (for example, during the execution of the performance, the return to the origin of the movable body could not be confirmed or could not be performed due to the motor going out of step, malfunctioning, or being caught). (e.g., when an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs), or when it moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine, etc.). If there is, non-detection operation control is executed to return to the origin. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is at a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the motion control at the time of detection when the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial motion processing is executed. For example, in order to ensure that the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, it is possible to perform a predetermined movement from when the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor to when the movement of the movable body in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When a range (for example, play) is set, the robot may return to the origin and stop at a position further shifted to the rear side than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection-time operation control is performed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, but it is not necessary to move it to the effect position. Therefore, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating motion is performed in a shorter distance than the long initial motion.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation check control process after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the initial operation process. Since the operation confirmation control process is an operation control for confirming that the movable body operates normally, after moving each movable body from its origin position to the most distant effect position from the origin position, the origin Operation control is performed to return to the position. In other words, the movement to the production position is the maximum advancing motion. In addition, the operation confirmation control processing for the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described later, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body is not always performed. It does not have to be the same operation as the effect operation control of .

The "effect motion control" is motion control of a movable body in various effects, and includes a plurality of types of motion control with different types and motion modes of target movable bodies. For details, see 1. "Prefetching" is operation control for vertically vibrating the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position before target fluctuation such as advance notice of the movable body is started. 2. "Relevant" is operation control in which the on-board movable body 32A is vertically vibrated between the origin position and the intermediate position and the chance button 631B is vibrated by the vibration motor 635E in the relevant fluctuation such as the movable body advance notice. 3. "Big win notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control for moving the underboard movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position and then returning to the origin position in the big win notification, round promotion, V promotion, and the like. 4. "Fanfare right-handed, customer-waiting demonstration effect" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position and then returning it to the origin position in fanfare right-handed, customer-waiting demonstration performances, and the like. 5. "Jump game state shift" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Promote operation" is operation control for moving the chance button 631B from the origin position to the presentation position in the win/fail button presentation.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120, when performing the non-detection time operation control and the detection time operation control as the short initial operation control, the minimum control speed (low speed) that is set in the operation check control Control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed based on. These minimum velocities are the minimum velocities in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable bodies, and are not common operation velocities when there are a plurality of movable bodies.

Specifically, since the first movable body and the other second movable body are different in size, weight, motion mode, motion distance, and drive mechanism including a drive motor, even if the same control speed is set, The actual movement speed of the moveable body will vary. Moreover, even when different control speeds are set for the respective movable bodies, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies differ. In this way, the minimum speed is the operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable body. It is possible to reliably detect the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the movable body that operates the movable body in various effects such as the effect operation control (for example, the read-ahead effect shown in FIG. Since it is the same speed as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the motion control when performing the body effect), the maximum speed in the motion confirmation control is the same speed as the maximum speed in the effect motion control, As long as it can be confirmed whether or not to confirm that the movable body operates normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the effect operation control may not necessarily be the same speed.

(Operation check control (Long initial operation control))
Next, an operation example of operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 68A to 68J are diagrams showing an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the initialization processing (cold start processing) of step S6 by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined activation preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5 .

When a power-on designation command is received from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification indicating that the cold start process has been executed starts. At the same time, when a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed since the start of the initialization notification, the movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) is started (see FIG. 68(B)). In the initialization notification, which will be described later, each lamp (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a predetermined initialization notification mode. At the same time, output of a predetermined initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started (see FIG. 72).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control of each movable body (upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper frame movable body 132SG101) is performed, and then operation confirmation control is performed. will be Hereinafter, illustration of the operation mode by the short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation mode by the operation confirmation control will be described.

In the operation confirmation control, first, after the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the effect position and stops (see FIG. 68(B)), the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the effect position. to stop (see FIG. 68(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the effect position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 68(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the effect position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 68(E)). Next, after the lower board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 68(F)), the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See FIG. 68(G)). Next, after the upper frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 68(H)), the lower board movable body 32B moves downward from the production position and returns to the origin position. It stops, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 68(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation check control (initialization operation control) ends.

Thus, in the operation confirmation control, the initial motion of each movable body is started in the order of the chance button 631B, the board top movable body 32A, the bottom board movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101. , the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A overlaps part of the initial operation period of the lower-board movable body 32B, and the initial operation control of the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps part of the initial operation period of the lower-board movable body 32B. It is possible to shorten the body movement confirmation control period.

Also, when the motion control of another movable body is performed during the initial motion control of one movable body, while the one movable body (for example, the chance button 631B, the lower board movable body 32B) is stopped at the production position In addition, other movable bodies (for example, the board movable body 32A, the frame movable body 132SG101) are designed to move to the performance position or the origin position, so the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies is executed in parallel. Even if it does, it is possible to check each movement of the movable body.

In the above, an operation example of operation confirmation control at the time of cold start processing was explained based on FIG. For , the same operation check control as during the cold start process is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the movable body LED of the stopped movable body that is not operating in the operation confirmation control blinks in "red" during the cold start process (during initialization notification), During the hot start process (during restoration), it is "turned off", and during the hot start process (while the variable display is stopped), it is turned on "in a manner corresponding to the background image". On the other hand, the movable body LED of the stopped movable body that is not operating in the effect operation control lights up in a "mode according to the background image". As for the background image (background display), for example, there are background images A and B, and when background image A is displayed and power is cut off and restored, background image A is always displayed, and background image A is always displayed. Lamp emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the image A.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED during the advance operation of moving from the origin position to the production position and the retraction operation of moving from the production position to the origin position is hot during cold start processing (during initialization notification). Lights up in "white" both during the start process (during restoration) and during the hot start process (while the variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of the movable body moving from the origin position to the production position in the production operation control (for example, the operation control of the lower board movable body 32B in the win/fail button production) is in the first light emission mode (for example, seven colors Various colors corresponding to (rainbow color) light up in sequence at predetermined intervals while turning off (rainbow flash mode)), while the movable body moves from the production position to the origin position during the retraction operation. The LEDs are lit in a second light emission mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) sequentially emit light at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the action mode of each movable body is common to both the action confirmation control and the performance action control, the movable body LED of each movable body has the same mode (white lighting ), (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are the same), and in the effect operation control, the light is emitted in different modes (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) in the advancing action and the retreating action (the first light emission mode and the second light emitting mode), it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine 1 that can easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed. In particular, in the operation confirmation control, unlike the rainbow flash and the smooth rainbow, the emission color and lighting mode do not always change, so the operation of the movable body can be easily confirmed.

In FIG. 67B, rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are described as examples of the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode of the movable body LED in the effect operation control, but these light emission modes depend on the effect type. A different light emission mode may be used.

In addition, since the light emission brightness in the operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness in the effect operation control, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed, the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced, and the brightness of the movable body LED is reduced. is set to a low luminance, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67B, during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation check control, predetermined initialization notification sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R over an initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound indicating that the initialization notification is being executed, and is different from the effect sound outputted in other control of the effect operation. Also, during the hot start process (during restoration or during suspension of variable display), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (no sound).

Further, the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 (see FIG. 66 (G3)) is displayed during the operation effective period in which the menu display and sound volume/light intensity adjustment operation are effectively accepted, and the menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion is displayed. By operating the selection button 132SG35 when the display 132SG480 is displayed, a predetermined menu screen (not shown) can be displayed, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps 9a to 9g can be displayed. ) can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, during the execution period of operation check control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), control is not performed during the effective period of operation for menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment. Even if the adjustment operation is performed, the light amount of the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change, and the light emission at the luminance being executed is continued. More specifically, in operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of the movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" and "white" (initial emphasis mode).

In addition, during the hot start process, it may be possible to adjust the sound volume and the amount of light during the execution period of the operation confirmation control. become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment cannot be performed during the execution period of operation confirmation control, but menu/sound volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed after the end of operation confirmation control. Thus, when the selection button 132SG35 is operated in the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not the brightness adjustment has been performed by the operation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a jackpot start designation command, a big winning opening start designation command, or the like is received, a display layer lower than the restoration display 132SG510 , the display of the fanfare effect and the round effect is started, and when the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the display of the fanfare effect and the round effect may be visible from the middle in the lower layer. .

In addition, when the jackpot start designation command or the big winning opening designation command is received during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed until the next command (command related to the start of the round game) is received. You may make it

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a game standby state with the variable display stopped, when the variable display is being executed, and when a jackpot game is being executed. Power outages may occur at certain times. Although not shown in particular detail, the pachinko machine 1 may be started by cold start processing or hot start processing at any timing when power failure occurs, but each movable The mode of motion of the body, the mode of light emission of each movable body LED, the mode of background sound, and the like may differ.

[Initial operation control at cold start and hot start]
Next, a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start and a case where it is activated by hot start will be described. Note that the hot start will be described assuming that the game state is the normal state.

Mode 1 (initial operation control at cold start)
As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the timing of the startup. When 3 seconds (3000ms) elapses from the start of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start lighting, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the reception of the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer-waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103, the reception timing of these power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer-waiting demonstration designation command. Empty frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, chance button LED 9g, and on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode, respectively, and initialization is performed from speakers 8L and 8R. The output of the notification sound is started.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in the characteristic part 132SG are turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as light emission in the initialization notification. After the light is turned off for one second from the timing of receiving the designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, red lighting (light emission) and turning off are repeatedly executed.

Two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the image display device 5 displays the activation preparation display 132SG500. is completed, and the display of the background image during variable display stop according to the normal state is started in place of the activation preparation display 132SG500. After that, as the initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the movement of the button 631B from the origin position to the effect position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts to emit light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the movement of the button 631B. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 remains at the performance position for a predetermined period. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, a withdrawal operation from the effect position of the chance button 631B to the origin position is executed. The flashing of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the chance button 631, and returns to the flashing in the initialization notification mode (see FIGS. 74A to 74C).

At the end timing of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B, the advancing motion from the origin position of the on-board movable body 32A to the effect position is started. When the movement of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. After stopping for the predetermined period of time, a retraction operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is executed. It should be noted that the light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

At the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the movement of the lower-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the movement of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light (white lighting) in an initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the under-board movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, during the stop period at the production position of the board lower movable body 32B, along with the movement of the frame movable body 132SG101 from the origin position to the production position and the withdrawal movement from the production position to the origin position, the frame movable body LED 9f Light emission (white lighting) in the initial emphasis mode is executed. The light emission of the frame movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

It should be noted that the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 at the time of cold start in the characteristic portion 132SG is 20 minutes from the start of the advance operation of the chance button 631B. It ends when seconds (20000ms) have passed. Furthermore, after completion of the operation (confirmation operation) of these board top movable body 32A, bottom board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame top movable body 132SG101, the top board movable body 32A, bottom board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, when 4 seconds (4000 ms) have passed since the completion timing of the operation (confirmation operation) of the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, When the chance button LED 9g emits light in the initialization notification mode and the output of initialization notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R ends, all initial operation control ends. In other words, the initial operation control at the cold start in this characteristic portion 132SG is control that is executed over 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 72, after the initial operation control of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, and the lower board movable body 9d. The movable body LED 9e and the frame upper movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light). there is Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state of stopping sound output.

In the above state, when the starting prize is generated and the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body announcement, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body announcement. Further, the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A is executed a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B is continuously vibrated. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the advance notice of the movable body. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

In the example shown in FIG. 72, as the advance notice of the movable body, an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body is displayed on the image display device 5. , vibration of the chance button 631B, output of sound corresponding to the notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R (prediction sound of the movable body), frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the upper movable body LED 9f emits light in accordance with the movable body notice, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the display of the effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the position and the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A may be executed. In addition to the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body on the image display device 5 and the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A as the advance notice of the movable body, , vibration of chance button 631B, output of sound corresponding to movable body notice (movable body notice sound) from speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body One or more may be executed from light emission in a mode according to the advance notice of the movable body of the LED 9f.

Next, a description will be given of a case where a starting prize is generated during initial motion control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 73, when a starting prize occurs during the initial motion control of the board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the board movable body 32A remains at the performance position), the starting prize occurs. Variable display of the special design and decoration design is started from the timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and BGM output corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the start of the variable display, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is continuously executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial motion control is performed.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice is reached during the initial operation control period of the board top movable body 32A and the board bottom movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial operation control of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is continuously executed (see FIGS. 74(D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emitting modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the advance notice of the movable body.

Then, when the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body in the variable display ends and the movement of all the movable bodies ends, it should be executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body from the timing when the movement ends. The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B are executed (FIGS. 74(F)-(J) and FIGS. 75(K)-( L)). During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are activated in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body. Light emission is executed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable object notification (movable object notification sound) is output. There is no

(Initial operation control at hot start)
As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the activation preparation display 132SG500 from the activation timing. After 3 seconds (3000ms) from the start of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, chance button LED 9g, and on-frame movable body LED 9f are displayed from the reception timing of these power failure recovery designation command, first game state background designation command, and customer waiting demonstration designation command. In each case, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state. No sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing of receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command (silence).

It should be noted that the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in the characteristic portion 132SG are light emission corresponding to the background image in the normal state, and the effect control CPU 120 After receiving the power failure restoration designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the light is extinguished for one second, and then the light is emitted in a light emission color (for example, white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is hot start in the time saving state (low probability high base state) and probability variation state (high probability high base state), light emission according to the background image of these time saving state and probability variation state , the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may emit light in different colors and patterns than in the normal state. .

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 is completed, and the display of the background image during variable display stop according to the normal state is started in place of the activation preparation display 132SG500. After that, as the initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the movement of the button 631B from the origin position to the effect position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts to emit light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the movement of the button 631B. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 remains at the performance position for a predetermined period. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, a withdrawal operation from the effect position of the chance button 631B to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasized mode ends at the end timing of the retreat operation of the chance button 631, and the chance button LED 9g changes to light emission in the default mode (for example, white light emission).

At the end timing of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B, the advancing motion from the origin position of the on-board movable body 32A to the effect position is started. When the movement of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light (white lighting) in the initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. After stopping for the predetermined period of time, a retraction operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

At the end timing of the withdrawal operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the movement of the lower-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the movement of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light (white lighting) in an initial emphasized mode from the start timing of the advancing movement. Then, after the stop for the predetermined period, the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the performance position to the origin position is executed. The emission of the under-board movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasizing mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the under-board movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in the mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, during the stop period at the production position of the board lower movable body 32B, along with the movement of the frame movable body 132SG101 from the origin position to the production position and the withdrawal movement from the production position to the origin position, the frame movable body LED 9f Light emission (white lighting) in the initial emphasis mode is executed. The light emission of the frame movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasized mode ends at the end timing of the retraction operation of the frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

It should be noted that the operation (confirmation operation) of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 at the time of hot start in this characteristic portion 132SG is 20 seconds from the start of the advancing motion of the chance button 631B. It ends when (20000ms) has passed. When the pachinko machine 1 is activated by hot start, unlike the case of activation by cold start, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are displayed. Light emission in the form of initialization notification by , and output of initialization notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the initial motion control at the hot start in this characteristic portion 132SG consists of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, the upper-frame The control is such that the operation (confirmation operation) of the movable body 132SG101 is executed.

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 76, after the initial operation control of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, and the lower board movable body 9d. The movable body LED 9e and the frame upper movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light). there is In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped (no sound).

In the above state, when the starting prize is generated and the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body announcement, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body announcement. Further, the reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A is executed a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B is continuously vibrated. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the advance notice of the movable body. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

Next, a description will be given of a case where a starting prize is generated during initial motion control, and a variable display is started in which the advance notice of the movable body is executed based on the starting prize. First, as shown in FIG. 77, when a starting prize occurs during the initial motion control of the board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the board movable body 32A remains at the performance position), the starting prize occurs. Variable display of the special design and decoration design is started from the timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and BGM output corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the start of the variable display, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is continuously executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial motion control is performed.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice is reached during the initial operation control period of the board top movable body 32A and the board bottom movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial operation control of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, and the frame top movable body 132SG101 is continuously executed.

In addition, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emitting modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the advance notice of the movable body.

Then, when the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body in the variable display ends and the motion of all the movable bodies ends (the initial motion control ends), the notice of the movable body is normally started from the timing when the motion ends. The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which should have been executed during the execution period, are executed. During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are activated in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body. Light emission is executed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable object notification (movable object notification sound) is output. There is no

As described above, in this characteristic portion 132SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the board top movable body 32A (and the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101) , chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a starting prize is generated during the confirmation operation of each movable body during initial operation control, and a variable display for executing a movable body notice based on the starting prize starts. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body notice and the period of the confirmation action overlap, the movement of the on-board movable body 32A and the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed as the effect action of the movable body notice. Regulates the sound output. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start, a start prize is generated during the confirmation operation, and a variable display for executing a movable body notice is started based on the start win, the movable body notice is produced. As for the operation, only the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted.

By doing so, when the movable body notice is executed by the variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body under initial motion control, the on-board movable body 32A is displayed as the effect action of the movable body notice. While the initial motion control is not hindered by the motion, the player is notified that the movable body notice has been executed by displaying the movable body effect on the image display device 5, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body The LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) can be lit up in accordance with the movable body notice.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 77, in this characterizing section 132SG, the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electrical stage occurs during execution of variable display including execution of advance notice of the movable body is started by hot start, and after the hot start, In the case where the period for executing the advance notice of the movable body comes during the initial movement of each movable body, the action of the on-board movable body 32A as the advance notice of the movable body is not executed during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 in which the electric stage occurred during the execution of the variable display including the winning effect (that is, the variable display of the big win) is started by hot start, and the hot start is performed. When the execution period of the determined effect is reached during the initial motion of each movable body after the start, the operation of the lower board movable body 32B and the determined effect of the lower board movable body LED 9e are performed as the determined effect during the execution period of the determined effect. You may restrict|limit light emission (rainbow flash) in the aspect according to. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial motion or is operating as a final effect, depending on the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 132SG, as shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 executes origin placement control processing at the start timing of the variable display, thereby exemplifying a mode in which each movable body is placed at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a starting prize is generated during the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting prize is started, The initial motion of each movable body may be executed with priority over the motion of each movable body to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial motion of each movable body from being interrupted by the motion to the origin position of each movable body.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, the characterizing section 132SG has a form in which each movable body is placed at its respective origin position by the production control CPU 120 executing the origin placement control process at the start timing of the customer waiting demonstration production. Although this is an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and after starting winning occurs during the initial motion of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and variable display based on the starting winning starts. When the variable display ends during the initial operation period and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started in accordance with the end of the variable display, the customer waiting demonstration effect of each movable body is preferred to the movement to the origin position of each movable body. , may be preferentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the customer waiting demonstration effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to the origin position.

(Initial motion control modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 73, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and the variable display for executing the movable object announcement during the operation of the movable object as the initial operation control is started. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body announcement overlaps with the movement period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body announcement, and the initial movement control ends. After that, the operation of the target movable body of the movable body notice (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in case of this characteristic part 132SG), frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame Although the form of executing light emission in a manner corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body by the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification shown in FIG. Even if the variable display for executing the advance notice of the movable body is started during the movement of the movable body as the initial action control, if the execution period of the notice of the movable body is after the end of the movement of each movable body, the movable body The target movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the notice.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the movable body notice, the control period of the initial operation (operation control of each movable body, light emission of each LED in the initialization notification mode, output of initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) ends. In this case, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, from the timing when the control of the initial motion ends to the timing when the advance notice of the movable body ends, as shown in FIG. The chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body, and sound may be output in accordance with the advance notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the control period of the initial operation, the motion control of each movable body has been completed, but the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g. When the movable body announcement is executed while the light emission corresponding to the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R continue, the on-board movable body 32A corresponding to the movable body announcement While the operation of the chance button 631B is executed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light according to the movable body announcement mode, By not outputting the sound corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the advance notice of the movable body from being lowered.

(Initial motion control modification 2)
In addition, in the present characteristic part 132SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and during the checking operation of each movable body as initial operation control, a movable body announcement is executed to suggest that the variable display result will be a big hit. When the variable display is started, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), display of movable body effect on image display device 5, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, and under-board Light emission from the movable body LED 9e, frame upper movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R have been described. , When it is decided to execute the advance notice of the movable body due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial action control, the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body If it overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body, and the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and Chance button 631B) operation, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to advance notice of movable body, speakers 8L, 8R It is only necessary to prevent sound output in a mode corresponding to the advance notice of the movable body from the beginning. Further, when the variable display to be the target of the pre-read movable body notice is executed after the initial action control is completed, the movable body effect image on the image display device 5 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body notice during the variable display. Display, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light according to the notice of the movable body, and from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the notice of the movable body It is only necessary to execute sound output in the same manner.

By doing so, even if the execution period of the advance notice of the movable body comes during the confirming operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B as the advance notice of the movable body is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessively operating the on-board movable body 32A or the chance button 631B after the initial motion control is finished.

(Initial motion control modification 3)
In addition, in this characterizing portion 132SG, as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, a mode is exemplified in which the on-board movable body 32A can be moved between the origin position and the intermediate position to execute a movable body announcement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, after the movable body notice (first movable body notice), the movable body is displayed again. It is possible to execute the notice of the movable body (second notice of the movable body), and the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit differs according to the number of times the notice of the movable body is executed during the variable display (for example, only the notice of the first movable body is executed The ratio of the variable table result to be a big hit is higher when the second movable body notice is executed in addition to the first movable body notice than when the first movable body notice is executed.

In addition, in the case where it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notices of the movable body (the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body) during the variable display, as shown in FIG. When the starting prize is generated during the period and the variable display for performing the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body is started based on the winning of the start, the execution period of the first notice of the movable body is the execution period of the initial operation control. , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body may be executed (re-executed the first advance notice of the movable body) after the end of the initial operation control. However, if the second advance notice of the movable body has already started during the re-execution period of the first notice of the movable body, as shown in FIG. The first movable body advance notice may not be re-executed.

In this way, when the second advance notice of the movable body is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first advance notice of the movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A by the second advance notice of the movable body is prioritized as the first notice of the movable body. Since the movement of the board movable body 32A is not executed again, the movement of the board movable body 32A by the second movable body notice is hindered by the movement of the board movable body 32A by the first movable body notice. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the production effect of.

In the example shown in FIG. 80, the form in which the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body can be executed during the variable display of 1 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these The operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first and second movable body notices are the same (for example, the first and second movable body notices both have the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position). and an intermediate position), or the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice is different (for example, the first While the 1st movable body notice is an effect that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, the second movable body is an effect that the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the effect position. ) may be used to produce an effect that operates multiple times.

(Initial motion control modification 4)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 80, in the case where it is possible to execute a plurality of times of movable object announcement (first movable object announcement and second movable object announcement) during variable display, as a modification shown in FIG. Secondly, when a start prize is generated during the initial motion control and the variable display for performing the first notice of the movable body and the second notice of the movable body is started based on the prize of the start, the execution period of the first notice of the movable body is set to the initial period. If it overlaps with the execution period of motion control, control is performed so that the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the first notice of the movable body is not executed, and only the second notice of the movable body after the initial motion control is executed. may be controlled to Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 82, when a starting prize occurs after the initial motion control and the variable display for performing the first and second movable body advance notices is started based on the start prize, that is, the variable When the movement of the board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice during the display, the movement of the board movable body 32A occurs due to the occurrence of step-out or the like during the execution period of the first movable body notice. is stopped on the way, control may be performed so that the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is started as the second movable body notice during the execution period of the second movable body notice.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first advance notice of the movable body does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second advance notice of the next movable body. is executed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial motion control modification 5)
Further, in FIG. 80, when a starting prize is generated during the initial motion control and the variable display for performing the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice is started based on the start prize, the first movable body notice is started. overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the notice of the first movable body can be executed after the initial motion control ends, while the first movable body In the above example, when the re-execution period of the advance notice of the body is within the execution period of the second advance notice of the movable body, the execution of the second advance notice of the movable body is given priority and the first advance notice of the movable body is not re-executed. As a modification, as shown in FIG. 83, when the execution period of the second advance notice of the movable body comes during the re-execution period of the first notice of the movable body, the second advance notice of the movable body is executed. At the start timing of the execution period, the re-execution of the first advance notice of the movable body may be interrupted, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second advance notice of the movable body.

In this way, when the execution period of the second movable body notice comes during the operation of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice, the operation of the board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice is interrupted to start the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second advance notice of the movable body. It is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to the obstruction of the action of 32A.

(Initial motion control modification 6)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 132SG, the board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position as the initial motion control, while the board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the intermediate position as the effect motion of the movable body advance notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial motion control and the rendering motion of the movable body advance notice. You may make it operate|move by.

Further, in the case of moving the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the effect position in both the initial motion control and the effect motion of the movable body advance notice, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial motion, While the initial motion is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 and the origin position sensor 132SG123, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the effect motion of the movable body advance notice, Regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped according to process data for advance notice of the movable body. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B) as a modified example, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation control, the effect control CPU 120 controls the position on the board by the origin position sensor. Based on the fact that the movable body 32A is detected, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven forward to rotate the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over the first period (1000 ms). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops forward rotation driving of the drive motor 132SG122 on condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 (that the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the effect position). Let Then, based on the effect position sensor 132SG124 detecting the on-board movable body 32A, the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Further, the reverse driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped under the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (that the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(B), for example, when the on-board movable body 32A is moving toward the performance position, a step-out or the like occurs, and the on-board movable body 32A shifts between the origin position and the performance position. If the game stops in between, the effect control CPU 120 allows the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 to continue beyond the first period because the effect position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the effect position sensor 132SG124 has not detected the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period after starting the initial action control), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is not detected. It is determined that there is an operation error in the body 32A, and the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven from the timing of the determination of the operation error, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms. When the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 85A and 85B, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as an effect motion for the advance notice of the movable body, the effect control CPU 120 operates based on the process data for the advance notice of the movable body. By driving the driving motor 132SG122 in the normal direction, the on-board movable body 32A is moved toward the presentation position over a second period longer than the first period. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the effect position by stopping forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body advance notice. At the same time, the effect position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, the performance control CPU 120 reversely drives the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the advance notice of the movable body in a state where the board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, thereby moving the board movable body 32A to the origin position. move towards. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse driving of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body advance notice. At the same time, the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85(B), for example, during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position, a step-out or the like occurs, causing the on-board movable body 32A to move between the origin position and the performance position. If it stops in between, the effect control CPU 120 continues the normal rotation drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body announcement until the timing when the second period elapses. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG124 at the end timing of the second period. stop the rotation drive.

When the effect position sensor 132SG124 has not detected the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period of time (a period longer than the second period after starting the initial action control), the effect control CPU 120 detects the on-board movable body. 32A is determined to be an operation error, and the drive motor 132SG122 is reversely driven from the timing of the determination of the operation error, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms. When the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, when the movable body notice is executed during the game after the initial motion control is finished, the initial motion control is performed even if the board movable body 32A corresponding to the movable body notice is not normally performed. Since the motion of the on-board movable body 32A as the (confirmation motion) is not executed, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the rendering effect of the movable body advance notice that has not been performed normally.

(Initial motion control modification 7)
Further, in the above-described modification 6, when the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the on-board movable body 32A by the effect position sensor 132SG124 as the initial operation control, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error of the on-board movable body 32A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation control, the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed during the movable body notice execution period during variable display. Effect display on image display device 5 without operating 32A, lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), speaker 8L , 8R may perform only sound output corresponding to the notice of the movable body.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 as a seventh modification, the effect control CPU 120 can move the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position over 1000 ms as the initial motion control. , the on-board movable body 32A can move from the performance position to the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as the initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 once determines that there is a motion error, and then executes the initial motion control a plurality of times. Assume that it is executable.

Here, if the effect control CPU 120 performs the initial motion control four times and makes an error determination in all cases, the fourth initial motion control stores the on-board movable body 32A as the motion limited movable body (dead end judgment). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position over 3000 ms as special initial operation control, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A to the origin position over 6000 ms. operate toward

After that, when a starting prize is generated and a variable display for executing a movable body advance notice is started based on the starting prize, the effect control CPU 120 stores the on-board movable body 32A as an operation limited movable body. Based on this, in the movable body notice execution period, without operating the on-board movable body 32A, the display of the effect on the image display device 5, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body Only the lighting of the LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g) and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice should be executed.

As described above, while the on-board movable body 32A that has been determined to be dead end is not operated as a movable body advance notice, the display of the effect on the image display device 5, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body By turning on the body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g), and by executing the sound output according to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the board movable body 32A is operated as the movable body notice. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect of the advance notice of the movable body while preventing the malfunction from occurring.

It should be noted that the configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may be changed to at least one of the modifications 1-7. In other words, one of the plurality of modifications 1 to 7, or a combination of a plurality of them, can be added to or changed in the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment.

Mode 2 (Initial motion control modified example 8)
In addition, in the characterizing section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 27, when the variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the customer waiting state. Although the form in which the demonstration effect is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability/low base state (normal state), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a high base state (time saving state), the pachinko game is played. While the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the machine 1, the customer waiting demonstration production itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation ends.

By doing so, the image of the customer waiting demonstration effect (demonstration shown in FIGS. 87, 88, and 89) displayed on the image display device 5 by the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) that operates as the initial motion control. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demonstration effect from being lowered due to obstruction of the movie).

87, 88, and 89 exemplify a mode in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each movable body The period from the end of the initial motion to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is after 30 seconds, which is the period required for the initial motion of each movable body, has passed, so that the initial motion of each movable body and the customer waiting demo effect are performed. A sufficient period may be provided between and to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Furthermore, the period from the end of the initial motion of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is set to be different between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start and when it is started by hot start. good too. It should be noted that depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by cold start or by hot start, the period from the completion of the initial motion of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be different. However, by executing the customer waiting demonstration effect after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being hindered by the movable body acting as the initial motion. good.

(Initial motion control modified example 9)
Further, in the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the effect control CPU 120 performs the dead end determination of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, Display of effects on the image display device 5, lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), notice of movable body from speakers 8L and 8R However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a ninth modification shown in FIG. When the determination is made, when the customer-waiting demonstration effect is executed after the special initial action is finished, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated, while the image display device 5 displays an effect corresponding to the customer-waiting demonstration effect. , the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demonstration effect.

In this way, in a situation where the on-board movable body 32A does not operate normally, the customer-waiting demonstration can be performed while preventing the on-board movable body 32A from being forced to operate as a customer-waiting demonstration. It is possible to encourage the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance.

Form 3 (power outage just before the end of the big hit fluctuation)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the big hit variation.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the variable display based on the big hit variation pattern is started, the combination of the big hit fixed symbols is stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and just before the variable display ends (for example, the big hit After the fixed symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display is resumed and the re-lottery effect is executed, or after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the next variable display. Approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period until the start of the pachinko game machine 1, starts up with a hot start after a power failure occurs (when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). ), the variable display of the big win is restarted, but the variable display ends immediately, and the control of the big win game state is started.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the jackpot start designation command is issued. A fanfare effect is started based on the reception by the effect control CPU 120 .

Specifically, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable LED 9d, on-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable Light emission from the body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g and the output of the background sound (BGM) are restricted. That is, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g correspond to the fanfare production (introduction part). Along with the light emission, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introductory part) is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000ms) has passed since the jackpot start designation command is received, the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 is ended, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is started. . Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introductory part) is displayed on a black screen until a predetermined time (for example, 1500 ms) elapses from the start.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is finished, the fanfare effect (introduction part) is ended, and the fanfare effect (right-hand hitting notification part) is started.

In the right-handed notification part in the fanfare effect, as shown in FIGS. 63(F7) and (F8), right-handed promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to prompt the player to launch the game ball into the right game area. Since the hitting operation promotion effect is performed, if the initial motion of the movable body is executed when the right-hand hitting notification part is started, the movable body that moves according to the initial motion will be displayed in the fanfare effect such as the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG431. The visibility of the right-handed informing part is obstructed, and there is a risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage without performing the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 63 (F7), when the right-handed promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position. is executed, if the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the right-hand hitting notification part is started, it is difficult to determine whether the movable body is moving with the initial motion or the right-hand hitting operation promotion effect. Become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect, a fanfare effect (right-handed notification) accompanied by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is performed. Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial movement ends before the start of the part), the visibility of the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production is hindered by the movable body that performs the initial movement, and the initial movement and It is possible to prevent difficulty in determining in which of the right-handed operation promotion performances the player is operating.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when power failure occurs immediately before execution of the fanfare effect, the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-handed promotion effect (FIG. 63 (F1) to (F6 ))), the introduction part period of the fanfare effect and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period.

In addition, in the introductory part of the fanfare production, when notifying which one of a plurality of types of jackpots A to E is a jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type to be controlled and the jackpot type display 132SG421 are displayed. It is possible to display the introduction display 132SG422 before the display of the big hit type before it is displayed, and in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is performed before the display of the big hit type display 132SG421 is performed in FIG. 63 (F6). By the end of, even if the operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare production, it is possible to grasp which type of jackpot will be controlled.

Further, when the fanfare effect is executed, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are in the initial operation, emit light in an initial emphasizing mode (white lighting). On-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame-on movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of movable bodies that are not operating in operation confirmation control emit light corresponding to fanfare production (introduction part) (for example, 3R big hit is blue-based color, 10R big hit is red-based color, etc.), but the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part). Therefore, even during the fanfare effect, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control.

Further, when the first movable body is moved by the initial action, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasizing mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits a fanfare effect. By emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to (introductory part), it is possible to indicate that the movable body is in the initial motion even during the fanfare production.

Further, when the fanfare effect is executed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light with the first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, The lower board movable body LED 9e and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance), thereby suppressing power consumption and lightening the load when the power is turned on. is possible.

From the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), the duty ratio of all the movable body LEDs is reduced or set to a predetermined value. The duty ratio may be reduced until the time expires.

Further, when the first movable body is operated by the initial motion, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasizing mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasizing mode. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the moving movable body by the action confirmation control.

In addition, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial movement has a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting ), the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control emits light differently when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when the movable body retreats from the performance position to the origin position. It is possible to emit light in various ways. Specifically, during the advance operation, the movable body LED is in the first mode (for example, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the attacker LED 9c, the movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc.), and at a predetermined cycle from one side to the other side. The movable body LED may emit light in a second mode (for example, a flash mode in which it blinks at a fast cycle (30 ms, etc.)) when retreating. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the effect operation control is being performed by the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) and the mode corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in the movable body effect executed in the right-handed notification part in the fanfare effect, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same motion mode as the initial motion (down from the origin position to the effect position), and in the initial motion, the movable body 32A The body LED emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and in the movable body production, it emits light in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and in a mode corresponding to the right-handed notification part, and can be moved by the initial action. The sound output is limited when the body moves, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting notification part is output in the movable body presentation executed in the right-handed hitting reporting part. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed by the initial emphasis mode and the mode corresponding to the right-handed informing part.

In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the motion mode of the board movable body 32A in the movable body presentation executed in the right-handed informing part and the motion mode of the board movable body 32A in the initial motion are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the mode of operation of the board movable body 32A in the movable body presentation and the mode of operation of the board movable body 32A in the initial action are common. or all of the operation modes may be common. Furthermore, both operation modes may be different modes.

In addition, when executing the movable body effect in the right-handed notification part of the fanfare effect, the movable body is operated by a special action, and an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect can be displayed. It is possible to determine that it is an operation error and perform motion confirmation control again if the operation cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time. When executed, the effect display should be displayed while the special action is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the effect display to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed while preventing the initial action from being hindered by the special action.

Mode 4 (Electricity cut immediately after the start of the fanfare production)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the variable display based on the jackpot variation pattern, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols is stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after the variable display ends, the symbol confirmation display period ends. A big hit fanfare effect is started based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the big win start designation command. Immediately after the fanfare effect is started, the power is cut off, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on)), and the jackpot game state is entered. Control is resumed.

Immediately after the fanfare effect is started is, more specifically, immediately after the CPU 103 starts control of the big win, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the big win start designation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 and starts the fanfare effect. Although it is the timing immediately after starting (introduction part), since only the power failure restoration designation command is transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 after starting with the hot start, the effect control CPU 120 receives the designation command during the opening of the big winning opening. It is not possible to specify what kind of state the game state is (whether it is a fanfare period or not, etc.) until it is done. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is being restored. corresponding to (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. is displayed (see FIG. 108), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the remaining period of the fanfare informing that the power failure is being restored, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the fanfare period ends and the round game starts. It's becoming In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) during the initial operation, but the effect operation control is performed. It emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light at .

After that, when receiving a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the first time has started, so that the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the jackpot output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the tune during the jackpot is output. be started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started, the initial operation is performed in the operation confirmation control started during the remaining period of the fanfare. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

In addition, based on the reception of the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening, which indicates that the big winning opening is open, the production corresponding to the round game (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music during the big winning) is started. Specifically, during the round game period, the big winning opening is open for a long period of time and a large amount of game balls can be won. A more lively round effect is provided, but by ending the operation confirmation control before the round effect corresponding to this round game is started, the round effect can be enjoyed without worrying about the movable body that initially operates. be able to

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started, the period until the fanfare effect ends (Fig. 63 The fanfare effect period and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within (F2) to (F6)).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can be used when power is turned on after a power failure occurs during variable display, and when power is turned on after a power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed. While displaying the display 132SG510 during restoration on the image display device 5, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with white light), and when power failure occurs during variable display, power failure occurs at the same time when the power is turned on and at the same time as the fanfare effect is performed. After that, when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform operation check control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, in the case where the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs during variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, the image display device 5 Although it is displayed in the common restoration display 132SG510, for example, when power failure occurs during variable display in the low base state and the power is turned on after that, while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed Although the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 is not displayed, if the power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on after that, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 will be displayed while the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences such as display, as long as at least the display mode of the in-restoration display 132SG510 is common, the display modes of the other displays may not be common.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the variable display in the high base state or during the big hit, and then the power is turned on, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, it is determined whether or not to display only the restoration display 132SG510 when the power is turned on after the occurrence of power failure, and to display the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 according to the game state. It doesn't have to be. In addition, when the restoration display 132SG510 is in the state of variable display in the low base state, the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on, or the power is cut off during the variable display in the high base state or during the big hit, After that, the display mode of the restoration in progress display 132SG510 may differ between when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode promotes the right-handed operation when power failure occurs during the variable display in the high base state or during the big win, and then the power is turned on.

In addition, when power failure occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is turned on after that, the performance control CPU 120 displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and also displays the board of the movable body in initial operation. The upper movable body LED 9d, the board lower movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be illuminated in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the power failure occurs at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed, and then , when the power is turned on, over the execution period of the fanfare effect, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not in initial operation are being restored. It is possible to emit light (turn off in this embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the indication, and the initial highlighting manner (white lighting) is not used in the manner (turning off) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-on movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B to emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). , During fanfare performance (performance operation control), the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies are controlled to emit light at a luminance lower than that corresponding to the music during the big hit. (see FIG. 67B), it is possible to suppress the power consumption at power-on and reduce the load.

In addition, since the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (turning off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare production (music during the big hit), even if the fanfare production is being performed before the power failure, the power supply It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of power-on.

In addition, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by production operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the production position) are common, and the on-board movable body of the movable body The LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed in the operation confirmation control, and the effect operation control (for example, the success button In the production), light is emitted in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (e.g., advance operation period), and light is emitted in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (e.g., retreat operation period). . By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the action confirmation control and the performance action control is being performed.

Mode 5 (Electricity cut just before the end of the fanfare production)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an operation example when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare effect. FIG. 95 shows (A) a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 93, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect of the big win started based on the reception of the big win start designation command ends. When the hot start process is executed (when the power is turned on), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

The timing just before the fanfare effect ends is, more specifically, the timing just before the fanfare effect (right-handed notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command, that is, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot. The timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period waiting from the start of control to the start of control of the round game (for example, timing about 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after being activated by hot start, based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the power failure restoration designation command transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 and the large winning opening open designation command corresponding to the first time, Over the round game period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the song during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c in a mode corresponding to the opening. Light is emitted, and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a music selection suggestion mode, and a background sound (BGM) is output in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit.

If there is a remaining time (for example, about 1000 ms) in the fanfare period when the hot start is started, the remaining time of 1000 ms is reached after the power failure recovery designation command is received based on the recovery of the CPU 103. After the elapse of the first time, the command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening is received. The upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output. Note that the movable body LED may emit light in a mode corresponding to the restoration.

Further, after the operation confirmation control of each movable body is started with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation is performed before the opening control of the big winning opening in the first game is finished and the next round game is started. Control ends. In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in the production operation control.

After that, after receiving a designation command after the opening of the big winning opening in the first round, a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is received in the second round for effect control. When received by the CPU 120, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f emit light in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then the middle jackpot music output during the jackpot. , and output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the middle hit song is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the board of the movable body that performs the initial operation in the operation confirmation control started during the round game period. The upper movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). The movable body is dazzling by reducing the load on the pachinko game machine 1 by suppressing the power consumption at the time of turning on the movable body and setting the movable body LED provided on the movable body to have lower luminance than when performance operation control is executed. It is possible to prevent the operation from becoming difficult to confirm.

In addition, it is possible to end the operation confirmation control when the power is turned off and turned on immediately before the fanfare effect ends before the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game ends. Even after the initial motion is finished, the player can aim to win a prize at the big prize opening without being disturbed by the movable body.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the opening control of the big winning hole in the first game ends. The opening control period and the initial operation period of the big winning opening are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period (see (F8) to (F9) in FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 94(A), in a round game in which the big winning opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the end of the fanfare effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a round game. An image for effect is displayed, a right hitting promotion display 132SG430 indicating the launching direction of the game ball is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the number of rounds as a round game related display related to the round game is displayed on the upper side of the display screen. A display 132SG451, a display of the number of winning balls 132SG452, a display of the number of balls played 132SG453, and a display of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454 are displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 94A, when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , and the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by a chain double-dashed line. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at a position where only the supporting portion 32b can be overlapped, and the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 are partially overlapped with the directing portion 32a and the supporting portion 32b. The number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of put out balls display 132SG453 are displayed at positions where the effect section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. 95(A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 95(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, Since it does not overlap with any of the number of games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of the displays (see FIG. 94(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the front side of the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls played display 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played display 132SG454. Due to the overlap of the effect section 32a, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays. In addition, since the supporting portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (see FIG. 94(B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the consecutive game/total number of balls display 132SG454 is produced on the front side. Due to the overlap of the portion 32a, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played display 132SG454. Since the number-of-balls display 132SG453 overlaps neither the effect part 32a nor the support part 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 94(C)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 95(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), when the initial action is performed in the round game, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B overlap the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. ), the board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (eg, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive games/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.). Since the time is shorter than the time required to perform the initial action, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a high degree of influence on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action.

In other words, in a round game in which the large winning opening is open to the advantage for the player, if the right-handed prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation, the large winning opening is closed. During the open state, the player may miss an opportunity to win the game ball by the right-handed operation, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Visibility is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95(B), when the underboard movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, and the number of balls played display 132SG453. , the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of the displays (see FIG. 94(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, right-handed promotion display 132SG430, round number display 132SG451, winning ball Since it does not overlap with any of the number display 132SG452, the number of played balls display 132SG453, and the number of consecutive games/total number of played balls display 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of these displays (see FIGS. 94(D) and (E)). . Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 95(A), when the initial action is performed in the round game, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize. The time when the board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) , the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a high degree of influence on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action.

In addition, regarding the under-board movable body 32B, during the initial operation, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the big hit information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the consecutive Since it does not overlap with any of the number of shots/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.), it can be visually recognized by the player.

In other words, in a round game in which the large winning opening is open to the advantage for the player, if the right-handed prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation, the large winning opening is closed. During the open state, the player may miss an opportunity to win a game ball by hitting to the right, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Compared to the big hit information display, the time during which the visibility is difficult due to the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation is short, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is in the initial motion emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion is in the middle of the jackpot (round production). Light is emitted in a corresponding mode, but the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (round production), so that the movable body that performs the initial movement even during the round game is focused. It is possible to

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing the initial action emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing the initial action emits light during the big hit ( round effect), but when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), By causing the movable body LED of the second movable body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big win (round effect), it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that performs the initial motion even during the round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs immediately before the fanfare effect ends, the movable body LED that is not in the initial operation is turned on. The light emission brightness when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the music during the big hit (round effect) is the same as that in the round when the pachinko machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after the power failure occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. In the game, the embodiment has been exemplified in which the emission luminance is the same as that when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion emits light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (round effect), but the present invention is limited to this. In the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare presentation, the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial operation is a big hit. The light emission brightness when emitting light in a mode corresponding to the music (round effect) is the same as that in the round game when the pachinko game machine 1 does not start with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the fanfare effect ends. , the light emission brightness may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in the initial motion emits light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round effect). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of the first round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately after the start of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 96, after the end of the big win fanfare effect, the round effect is started based on the reception of the special prize opening open specification command indicating that the first round game (first round) has started. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after a power failure occurs immediately after (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

"Immediately after the start of the round effect" means, in more detail, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the first round game has started. Immediately after the timing, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts the control of the first round game (for example, the timing immediately after starting the opening control of the large winning opening in the round game (for example, after about 1000 ms)) including.

In this case, since only the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted with the restoration of the CPU 103 after being started by the hot start, the effect control CPU 120 determines how the game state is until the designation command is received after the first opening of the big winning opening. It is not possible to specify whether it is in a state (whether it is a round game period, etc.). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is being restored. corresponding to (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. The restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and the power failure is being restored until the next command, that is, the designated command after the opening of the first big prize mouth is received, that is, until the first round game period ends. is reported.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the first round game period in which it is notified that the power failure is being restored, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the first round game period ends. there is In the operation confirmation control, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) during the initial operation, but the effect operation control is performed. It emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light at .

After that, after receiving a designation command after the opening of the big winning opening, which designates the period during which the big winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state, it is determined that it is the period during which the big winning opening changes from the closed state to the open state. Since it can be specified that the second round game has started after the first round game has ended when the designated command for the large winning opening opening is received, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the jackpot output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the tune during the jackpot is output. be started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the round performance is started, the initial operation is performed in the operation confirmation control started during the round game period. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control when the power is turned off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game is started, and the opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game ends. Since it is possible to finish the game before the initial action is finished, the player can aim to win a prize in the big prize slot without being disturbed by the movable body even after the initial action is finished.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately after opening control of the big winning hole in the first round game is started, Opening control of the large winning opening in one round game so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the large winning opening in the first round game is completed (see FIG. 63 (F9)) A period and an initial operation period are set.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the power is turned off during the variable display, and when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to be open, and then the power is turned on. In this case, the display 132SG510 during restoration is displayed on the image display device 5, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f that are in operation correspond to the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510. (For example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting) It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, and when power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and the big prize opening is open. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is cut off at the same time as the control is performed, and when the power is turned on after that. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the electric power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning hole is controlled to be opened, and then the power is turned on, displays the restoration in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the initials. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the moving movable body in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the big prize opening is opened. Power failure occurs at the same time as being controlled to the state, and after that, when the power is turned on, the large winning opening is in the open state over the control execution period. The LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be caused to emit light (in this embodiment, they are turned off) in a mode corresponding to the display during restoration, and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode (extinguishing) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, since the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (turning off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round effect (music during the big hit), even if the round effect is being performed before the power failure, the power It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of power-on.

In the above-described form 6, when power failure occurs immediately after the second and subsequent round games (2R to 10R) are started, control of the first round game (opening of the big winning opening) is started. Since the operation is the same as that in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the operation, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power outage just before the end of the first round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 97, a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the round effect started based on the reception of the designation command during the opening of the big winning opening indicating that the first round game (first round) has started. After that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the round effect, more specifically, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the first round game has started ends. The timing just before, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the first round game (for example, the timing just before the opening control of the big winning opening in one round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before) or , the timing when the number of winning balls becomes one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) which is the closing condition of the big winning hole, the round interval period in the first round game, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving a power failure restoration designation command and a designation command after opening the first big winning opening with the restoration of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the first round interval period Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. Restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and the power failure is being restored until the next command, ie, the second round interval period, is received. is reported.

After that, when the second big prize opening open specification command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round performance), and the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big win is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the operation confirmation control is started during the second round game period, and the second round game is started. The operation check control ends before the round game period ends. Incidentally, the operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the first round game. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. Light is emitted at a lower luminance than when light is emitted during operation control.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the operation is confirmed during the second round game following the round game. Control is started, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial action emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the effect operation control ( The movable body LED provided on the movable body reduces the load on the pachinko game machine 1 by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on because it emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). is set to a lower luminance than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the first round game, the large winning opening in the second round game The opening control period and the initial operation period of the big winning opening are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control is completed (see (F10) in FIG. 63).

In the above form 7, if the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the second round game (2R to 10R), immediately after the control of the first round game (opening of the big winning opening) is started. Since the operation is the same as that in the case where the power is cut off in the second case, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Mode 8 (power outage immediately after the start of the special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the special interval.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot types are jackpot A and jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot opening in all round games is completed is 0.5 seconds. In the case of jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot opening in the third round game is completed is set to 30 seconds (see FIG. 8), and in this special round interval period, A promotion effect (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 64) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in FIG. 98, after a power outage occurs just before the third round effect of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the hot start occurs). When the start process is executed), the control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the third round effect of the jackpots C to E is, in detail, the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special prize opening open designation command indicating that the third round game has started. The timing just before the end of the round production started, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in the third round game (for example, the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game including the timing just before the end (for example, about 5000 ms before) and the timing when the number of winning balls is one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole.

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the designation command after the opening of the third big winning opening are received along with the recovery of the CPU 103, so that the effect control CPU 120 performs the third special round interval. During the period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and the power failure is restored until the next command, ie, the third special round interval period ends. You will be notified that you are inside.

After that, when the fourth big prize opening open specified command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the music during the big win (round performance), and the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big win is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of pieces of music can be selected during the big hit, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the operation confirmation control is performed during the third special round interval period. is started, and the operation confirmation control ends before the third special round interval period ends. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. Light is emitted at a lower luminance than when light is emitted during operation control.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, during the third special round interval period The operation confirmation control is started at 10:00 a.m., and the on-board movable LED 9d, the lower-board movable LED 9e, the on-frame movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are initially operated, emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Since it emits light at a lower brightness than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation), power consumption at the time of power-on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness of the movable body LED to be lower than that when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the third round game ends, the third time During the period until the special round interval period ends (see FIG. 64 (F21) to (F29)), the opening control of the large winning opening and the round interval period and the initial operation period so that the initial action of the movable body ends and are set.

In addition, in the above-described form 8, the form in which the special round interval is set after the end of the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third round game A special round interval may be set after the opening control of the big winning opening in the round game other than the game ends.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the power is turned off during the variable display, and when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to be closed, and then when the power is turned on. In this case, the display 132SG510 during restoration is displayed on the image display device 5, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f that are in operation correspond to the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in (for example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting), and when power failure occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the big prize opening is closed It is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is cut off at the same time as the control is performed, and when the power is turned on after that. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when a power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510, and displays the initials. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the moving movable body in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting), and the big prize opening is closed. Power failure occurs at the same time as being controlled to the state, and when the power is turned on after that, the large winning opening is closed over the control execution period, the movable body on the board that is not in the initial operation. The LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B can be caused to emit light (in this embodiment, they are turned off) in a mode corresponding to the display during restoration, and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode (extinguishing) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the electric power failure occurs at the same time when the big winning opening is controlled to the closed state, and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a restoration in progress display 132SG510, and temporarily When the big winning opening is controlled to be closed in the round game, an interval production can be executed, and in the interval production, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e below the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance The button 631B and the attacker LED 9c can emit light in a mode corresponding to the music during the big hit (interval performance), and the movable body that is in the initial operation is an upper-board movable LED 9d, a lower-board movable LED 9e, and an upper-frame movable LED 9f. , the chance button 631B can be illuminated in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting). Then, in the third round game, when the big winning hole is controlled to be in a closed state (special round interval) and at the same time power failure occurs, and then the power is turned on, the third special round interval control is executed. Over a period of time, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c of the movable bodies that are not in initial operation are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the display during recovery (this In the embodiment, it is possible to turn off the light), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval production (music during the big hit). By doing so, it is possible to notify that the system is being restored when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the power failure restoration designation command and the designation command after the third big winning opening are received with the restoration of the CPU 103, the image display device 5 is restored during the third special round interval period. While the middle display 132SG510 is displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c correspond to restoration (for example, turning off). , the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, silence), and this restoration mode is exemplified as continuing until the fourth large winning mouth open designation command is received. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the interval effect is executed after the introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 64) and the introductory part, and the results of the introductory part are reported. If it is composed of parts (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64), it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the start of the result notification part. By doing so, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of the result notification part in the interval rendering by the movable body that performs the initial motion.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a movable body effect using the lower board movable body 32B as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see FIG. 64 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, It is possible to perform effect operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B operated by the operation confirmation control, and the sound output is limited when the underboard movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control. , When the under-board movable body 32B moves in the movable body presentation, it is preferable that a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily determine which of the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body production in the result notification part, it is possible to display an effect display (see FIG. 64 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body production, and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by operation confirmation control The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) is common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again, and in one round game in which the interval effect is executed, power failure occurs immediately before the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, and then the power supply. When the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and the promotion effect is during the specific period during which the operation confirmation control is being performed. is executed, the effect display may be displayed while the movable body presentation is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the player that the movable body production has been executed by the effect display while preventing the action confirmation control from being hindered by the promotion production.

In addition, the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B in the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the movable body On-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B emit light in an initial emphasized mode (white lighting) until the initial action is completed in operation confirmation control, and effect operation control ( For example, in the case of promotion success of the promotion effect), light is emitted in the rainbow flash mode in the first period (eg, advance operation period), and the rainbow flash mode is emitted in the second period (eg, retreat operation period). It emits light in a different smooth rainbow manner. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which of the action confirmation control and the performance action control is being performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the end of the opening control of the big winning mouth in the third round game, the lower board movable body 32B rises, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a promotion effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the 3-round jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is the above-mentioned promotion. Various movable body effects can be applied as well as effects.

For example, in a specific round game during the big hit, based on the detection that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, the game state after the big win is a probability change state (the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) In the case of a pachinko game machine that is in a state that becomes a state), as shown in FIG. A V promotion performance may be performed to inform the player that the probability variable jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot where the game state after the end does not change to the probability variable state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 99, when this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result reporting part that is executed after the introductory part and reports the result of the introductory part, the big prize opening is closed. When power failure occurs at the same time as the state is controlled, and then the power is turned on, the operation check control is preferably finished before the result notification part of the V promotion effect is started.

Form 9 (Electrical interruption immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the start of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 100 . FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the end of the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game, promotion effects (see (F21) to (F29) in FIG. 64) are performed as special interval effects. ) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect as described above is performed during a specific round game period (for example, the third round game may be executable during the period during which the opening control and closing control of the big winning opening are performed.

In this case, the promotion effect includes an introductory part (see (F21) to (F23) in FIG. 64) and a result reporting part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. )), and when the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the fact that jackpot A is promoted in the result notification part is reported in a promotion failure mode, and the jackpot type is higher than jackpot A (3R jackpot). When the jackpot B (10R jackpot) is advantageous to the player, the jackpot B is reported in the promotion success mode in the result reporting part. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect can be executed when the variable display result of the first special symbol results in a big hit (first hit).

Then, as shown in FIG. 100, after a power failure occurs immediately before the start of the third round effect of the jackpots A and B in which the promotion effect is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (at the time of power failure recovery). When the hot start process is executed (when the power is turned on), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed is, in detail, the effect control based on the reception of the special prize mouth open designation command indicating that the second round game has started. The timing just before the round effect started by the CPU 120 ends, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in the second round game (for example, the opening of the big winning opening in the second round game The timing just before the control ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, or the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving a power failure restoration designation command and a designation command after opening the second big winning opening with the restoration of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the second round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. Restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and the power failure is being restored until the next command, ie, the second round interval period ends. is reported.

After that, when receiving the third big prize opening open designation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part) is started to be output. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that one of a plurality of background sounds (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introductory part) can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light during opening. It emits light in a corresponding manner.

In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period (during recovery) or The operation confirmation control is started during the third round game, and the operation confirmation control is finished before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game is started. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period or Operation confirmation control is started in the third round game, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e under the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Although it emits light, it emits light at a lower luminance than when it emits light in the performance operation control (promotion performance), so that the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness of the movable body LED to be lower than that when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the opening control of the big winning hole in the second round game ends, the third time The opening control of the big winning opening and the round interval period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the round game is started. .

In the above-described form 9, the form in which the promotion effect is executed in the third round game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed in the round game other than the third round game. You may do so.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initializing emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initializing corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasizing mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), so that attention is drawn to the movable body that performs the initial motion even during the promotion performance. becomes possible.

In addition, when power failure occurs immediately before the third round game is started and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body on the board that performs the initial operation is moved. The body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), so that when the power is turned on It is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption of

Also, if power failure occurs immediately before the third round game is started, and then the power is turned on, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the third round game will be executed. Since the initial action of the movable body ends before the operation promoting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect, that is, the operation promoting effect prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is started, the movable body is operated by the operation confirmation control. , the visibility of the operation promotion effect in the introductory part is not hindered.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has the same operation mode (a mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) when the lower board movable body 32B performs the initial motion and when performing the performance motion in the promotion effect, and performs the initial motion. When the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the restoration indication 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode; white lighting), but the output of the background sound (BGM) is limited, and the performance is performed in a promotional performance. , the lower board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode (for example, rainbow mode, etc.) corresponding to the promotion effect (result reporting part), while a sound effect corresponding to the promotion effect (result reporting part) is output. . By doing so, it is possible to easily determine which one of the initial action and the promotion effect is being executed.

In addition, in the movable body production in the result notification part, it is possible to display an effect display (see FIG. 64 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body production, and the operation mode of the lower board movable body 32B by operation confirmation control The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) is common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again, and when a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed, and then the power is turned on. When the operation confirmation control that is started does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and if the promotion effect is executed during the specific period during which the operation confirmation control is performed, The effect display may be displayed while the movable body presentation is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to show the player that the movable body production has been executed by the effect display while preventing the action confirmation control from being hindered by the promotion production.

Mode 10 (Electricity cut just before the end of the final round game)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round game.

As shown in FIG. 101, the round production started based on the reception of the designation command during opening of the big winning opening indicating that the 10th round game (final round) in the jackpots B, D, and E has started is completed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after the power failure occurs immediately before (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately before the end of the round effect means, in detail, the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the special winning opening open specification command indicating that the 10th round game has started. The timing just before, that is, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the tenth round game (for example, the timing just before the opening control of the big winning opening in the final round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), and the winning Including the timing when the number of balls becomes one before the upper limit number (for example, 10) which is the closing condition of the big winning hole, the round interval period in the 10th round game, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, by receiving the power failure recovery designation command and the tenth big winning opening opening designation command along with the recovery of the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is the tenth round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turning off), and the background sound ( BGM) will be in a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. 132SG510 is displayed during restoration (see FIG. 108), and until the next command, the jackpot end designation command, is received, that is, until the 10th round interval period ends, it is notified that the power failure is being restored. be.

After that, when a jackpot end designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part). , the output of the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) is started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c emit light in a mode corresponding to the default (for example, white light or light off).

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth round game, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and before the end of the ending period Operation confirmation control is terminated. Incidentally, the operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the tenth round game. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation).

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately before the tenth final round game ends, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the initial operation is performed. On-board movable LED 9d, under-board movable LED 9e, on-frame movable LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production) Since the light is emitted at a lower luminance than when the light is emitted in the state, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed to reduce the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is controlled to perform the performance operation. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the tenth final round game, the information about the time saving state is displayed in the ending period. The ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the time saving state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 64) is started.

In the tenth form described above, an example of the operation of the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final rounds are 10 rounds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final rounds are the jackpots A, 3, and 3 rounds. In the case of C, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs just before the end of the third final round game, the time saving state notification that information about the time saving state is notified in the ending period. The round game period and the initial action period may be designed so that the initial action of the movable body ends before the part (FIG. 63 (F13)) starts. Also, the final round is not limited to the above 3 rounds or 10 rounds, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initializing emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initializing corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending production (introduction part), so that the movable body that makes the initial action even during the ending production is focused. becomes possible.

In addition, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving by the operation confirmation control, the board LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation and the board bottom LED 9d While the movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating correspond to the ending effect (introductory part). By emitting light in this mode, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is moving under the operation confirmation control even during the ending effect.

In addition, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving by the operation confirmation control, the board LED 9d of the movable body that performs the initial operation and the board bottom LED 9d Movable body LED 9e, frame upper movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light with low brightness in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introductory part). It is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the electric power.

In addition, not only the movable body LEDs, but also the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are designed to emit light at a lower luminance during the operation confirmation control period than when they emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending effect (introductory part). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on without deteriorating the decorative effect.

Mode 11 (Electrical interruption immediately after the start of the ending effect)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 102, after the round interval production in the tenth round game (final round) in the jackpots B, D, and E is completed, the ending production is started based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command. When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after power failure occurs (hot-start processing is executed at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately after the ending effect is started, more specifically, the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the ending effect based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command, that is, the CPU 103 controls the ending period. Including the timing immediately after the start (for example, the timing immediately after closing control of the big winning opening in the final round game (for example, after about 1000 ms)).

In this case, after being activated by the hot start, only power failure recovery specified command is received along with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the effect control CPU 120 is in the game state until it receives the next command (eg, customer waiting demo specified command, etc.) It is not possible to specify what kind of state is (whether it is an ending period or not). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a corresponding mode (eg, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. is displayed (see FIG. 108), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received.

After that, when receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board top movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f correspond to the high-base music (time-saving medium performance). Along with the light emission, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to high-bass music (production during short working hours) is started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, white lighting or extinguishing), and the attacker LED 9c extinguishes.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after a power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started, the operation check control is started during the ending period, and the operation check control is started before the ending period ends. It is supposed to end. In the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body on the board, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the LED 9g of the chance button emit light in the initial emphasized mode (white lighting) during the initial operation. It is designed to emit light with a lower luminance than when it emits light in operation control (movable body presentation in win/fail button presentation).

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable body on the board that performs the initial operation is started. Movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but more than when they emit light in the effect operation control (movable body effect in win/fail button effect). Since the light is emitted at a low luminance, the power consumption at the time of turning on the power is suppressed and the load on the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced, and the movable body LED provided on the movable body is set to have a lower luminance than when the performance operation control is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body from becoming difficult to check due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, the information about the time saving state is notified during the ending period. The ending period and the initial motion period are set so that the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) in FIG. 64) is started.

In the tenth form described above, an example of the operation of the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final rounds are 10 rounds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final rounds are the jackpots A, 3, and 3 rounds. In the case of C, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after the power failure occurs just before the end of the third final round game, the time saving state notification that information about the time saving state is notified in the ending period. The round game period and the initial action period may be designed so that the initial action of the movable body ends before the part (FIG. 63 (F13)) starts.

Also, in the above, the ending periods of the jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpot) have been described as an example, but the same operation is performed during the ending periods of the jackpots A and C (3-round jackpot), so a detailed explanation will be given. omitted.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can be used in the case where the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the variable display, and when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect is started. While displaying the display 132SG510 during restoration on the image display device 5, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restoration display 132SG510 (for example, the initial emphasis mode ; It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with white light), and when power failure occurs during variable display, power failure occurs immediately after the power is turned on, and immediately after the start of the ending production, After that, when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when power failure occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect and the power is turned on after that, displays a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and at the same time, the movable body in initial operation. It is possible to illuminate the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the power failure occurs immediately after the ending effect starts. After that, when the power is turned on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not in the initial operation are displayed during restoration over the ending period. (in this embodiment, it is turned off), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during restoration. By doing so, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted at a lower luminance than the emission luminance of the movable body LED in the production operation control (movable body production in win/fail button production). good too.

In the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g exclude the movable bodies that are in the initial operation during the recovery from the power failure. However, this light emission mode (extinguishing) is not used for effect operation control (movable body effect in success/failure button effect). By doing so, even if the ending effect is being performed before the power failure, it is possible to notify that the restoration is being performed when the power is turned on.

Forms 12, 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial action and various displays during time saving will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation confirmation control is started based on power failure occurring during the time saving and then power being turned on. FIG. 104A is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 104B is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), when it is time saving state B, C1, and C2, "BATTLE RUSH effect" is performed as time saving medium effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, a second background display 132SG320 showing a nighttime city landscape corresponding to the time-saving state and an image in which a friendly character and an enemy character are facing each other are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . At the top of the screen, an effect mode display 132SG221 consisting of characters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX remaining times", XX= 0 to 685) are displayed, and on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the characters “Right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, A number of consecutive jackpots/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of pitches during consecutive games is displayed.

In addition, in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the screen, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and small patterns corresponding to the decorative patterns are displayed. A second reserved display area 132SG012 corresponding to memory is provided in the vertical direction, and for example, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, corresponding to the value of the second reserved memory number being 4. Four second suspension displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second suspension display area 132SG012.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the second reservation display area 132SG012 in which the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 and the second reservation display 132SG002 are displayed is displayed at a position where only the support portion 32b of the on-board movable body 32A can overlap, and the second reservation storage number The display area 5SL where the display is displayed is displayed at a position where the production section 32a and the support section 32b can overlap, and the production mode display 132SG221 is displayed at a position where the production section 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 and the remaining time display 132SG201 are displayed at positions where part of the effect portion 32c and the support portion 32d of the lower board movable body 32B may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, in FIG. 104 (A), (B), description is abbreviate|omitted about production|presentation mode display 132SG221 and time saving remaining display 132SG201.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved storage number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (the 2 reservation display area 132SG012), the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, the remaining time display 132SG201, and the production mode display 132SG221, so that the player can visually recognize all of the displays (Fig. 104). (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect part 32a overlaps the front side of the second reserved memory number display (display area 5SL), so that the player cannot visually recognize the display. It becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 103(B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the display of the second reserved memory number becomes visible, the supporting portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can hit right-handedly. Visual recognition of the promotion display 132SG430 becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 103(C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012) becomes visible. Due to the overlap of the effect part 32a on the front side, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the second reservation display 132SG002, but the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reservation memory number display, the number of consecutive games/total output Since the ball number display 132SG454, the time saving remaining display 132SG201, and the production mode display 132SG221 do not overlap the production section 32a and the support section 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 103(D)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 104(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(B), when the lower board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved storage number (display area 5SL), and the second reserved display 132SG002 are displayed. (Second holding display area 132SG012), the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, and the short-time remaining display 132SG201 do not overlap, so the player can visually recognize all of the displays (Fig. 103 (D) reference).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012), and production mode display 132SG221. Due to the overlapping of the effect part 32c and the support part 32d on the front side of a part of the ball number display 132SG454 and the time saving remaining display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays (Fig. 103 (D) , (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after a power failure occurs during the time saving, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is set to the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second The time when the player is difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize the reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is the time when the underboard movable body 32B displays the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played) regarding the jackpot. Since each movable body is set to perform an initial motion so as to be shorter than the time overlapping the display 132SG454), the degree of influence on the game by the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B that perform the initial motion is reduced. The visibility of the high second reserved storage number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is less likely to be hindered.

That is, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed operation, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second If the pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered, the player misses the opportunity to generate the second start winning by the right hand operation during the period when the second start winning can be generated. , Since the player may suffer a disadvantage, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other big hit information displays. It is preferable that

In addition, while the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 does not change during the time saving state, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 show changes in the number of winnings and advance notice even in the time saving state. For example, the display mode can be changed. Therefore, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory that may change from being hindered by the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 that does not change. can.

Further, the initial action causes the on-board movable body 32A to move beyond the range in which the board-on movable body 32A overlaps the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012). It is preferable that the range overlapping the number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 is larger. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which has a property, from being hindered more than the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 which does not change.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), when an initial operation is performed when a hot start is performed after power failure occurs during a time saving operation and recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A hits to the right. The time during which the player cannot (or is not) visually recognizable due to the promotion display 132SG430 is longer than the time during which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with the big win information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454). Since each movable body is set to perform an initial action so that the distance is shorter, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 that has a high degree of influence on the game with the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial action is less likely to be hindered.

In other words, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed operation, the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is overturned by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation. If it is broken, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by the right-handed operation during the period when the second start winning can be generated, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. It is preferable that the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is maintained as compared with other big hit information displays.

It should be noted that when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined effect operation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the effect position) in the operation confirmation control, power is cut off during time saving. After the occurrence of , when the initial action is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the time when the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and the player cannot see it (or is not possible). , When the time that the lower board movable body 32B overlaps with the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454) is almost the same or longer, the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B are moved. , The time when the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 and becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is the time when the lower-board movable body 32B displays the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played). It may be operated in a manner that is shorter than the time overlapping the numerical display 132SG454).

For example, the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are not moved from the origin position to the position overlapping the second reserved memory number, the second reserved display 132SG002, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 in the initial operation, and are not moved to the halfway position. It is sufficient to return to the origin position after moving. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory number, the second reserved display 132SG002, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 from being hindered by the movable body that operates in the initial motion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), when an initial operation is performed when a hot start is performed after power failure occurs during a time saving operation and recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A hits to the right. The time when the player is difficult to see (or impossible) overlapping with the promotion display 132SG430 is the second suspension memory number (display area 5SL) or the second suspension display 132SG002 (second suspension display). By setting each movable body to perform an initial operation so as to be shorter than the time during which it is difficult (or impossible) to be visually recognized by the player overlapping the area 132SG012), the number of second reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are set. The visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, which has a higher degree of influence on the game than the display 132SG002, is less likely to be hindered.

In addition, in forms 12 and 20, the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B, the right hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reservation memory number (display area 5SL), and the second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012) and the big hit information display (for example, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454) have been described, but in the present embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the display is actually performed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether or not the various displays are displayed, the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial action. It is sufficient that the time overlapped with the above relationship is satisfied.

Mode 13 (power failure just before the end of the variation before the variation in which the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when power failure occurs immediately before the fluctuation before the button announcement is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 105 . FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the fluctuation before the button announcement is completed.

As shown in FIG. 105, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, the combinations of losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R immediately before the variable display ends (for example The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. ), the pachinko machine 1 is hot-started (hot-start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and if there is a pending memory, the variable display is resumed. However, the variable display ends immediately, and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, in the variable display notice effect determination processing (step S132SG610), the ready-to-win announcement to incite whether or not to enter the ready-to-win mode, and to enter the ready-to-win mode. Execution of a button notice prompting button operation is determined, and variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided notice effect, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board movable body LED 9d, board bottom The movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) output corresponding to the variation (background) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command is received, the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the variation (background) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, the result notification part for notifying the results of the button advance notice is started.

In the button notice (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. 61(D6) and (D7), as a result of the player's operation of the chance button 631B, the result of whether or not the ready-to-win state is reached is notified. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the reporting part is started, the movable body that moves according to the initial motion hinders the visibility of the result reporting part, such as the reach mode, and the player is unable to obtain the result. There is a risk of misidentification.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start after power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the button notification is executed, the button notification (result notification part) is performed. Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion ends before it starts, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the button notice (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notification is executed, the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (Fig. 61 ( D1) to (D5)), the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the button notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within the period.

In the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is set, the execution of the button notice is determined in the variable display, and if the execution of the button notice is decided at the start of the variable display, the result notification part of the button notice after the start of the variable display is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds) until the button is executed, so that the power is cut off immediately before the fluctuation before the button notice is executed. has occurred, the initial action of the movable body is completed before the button notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start winning occurs 2, when the CPU 103 determines that the button notice is a specific variation pattern to be executed, a specific effect control command that designates specific information related to the specific change pattern (for example, a prize-winning effect designation command that designates the execution of the button notice) ) is transmitted, and based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial motion so that the initial motion ends before the start of the result notification part of the button advance notice. You may do so.

For example, when a start winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a button notice is executed, the specified variation pattern (with button notice) Winning time An effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the production design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved storage number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command specifying a specific variation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (about 20 Seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action with a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

For example, just before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, it is possible to perform a light gathering effect (light gathers in the center of the screen to form the button image) effect, and the light gathering effect is a effect that uses a large screen ), it may overlap with the execution period of the initial action, and it is possible to suitably notify that the button image is displayed.

For example, it is possible to cause the LED of the button to emit light (red ⇔ extinguished 150 ms cycle) when the button image is displayed in the action promoting effect, and the light emission mode in the light emission pattern emphasizes the movable body that performs the initial action. not included in the pattern.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial action (confirmation of the vibration motor 635E and notification of the start of the initial). At least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration during button image display. .

Mode 14 (Electrical interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the notice at the start is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the start notice is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 106 . FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the start notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 106, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, immediately before the variable display ends (for example, a The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. , about 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and the pending memory is In some cases, although the variable display is resumed, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, in the variable display notice effect determination process (step S132SG610), execution of the start notice is decided, and the change pattern and the decided notice effect are determined. and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g correspond to the predetermined display change in the advance notice at the time of start. At the same time, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the advance notice at the time of start is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start notice (introduction part) is started. be.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the advance notice at the time of start is notified.

In the advance notice at the start (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the reporting part is started, the visibility of the result reporting part, such as whether or not the pending display has changed, is hindered by the movable body that moves due to the initial motion. may misinterpret the results.

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the start notice (result notification part ) is started, the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start of the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the period until the start notice (result notification part) starts (Fig. 59 (B2) to (B6)), the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within 59 (B2) to (B6)). there is

In the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is started, the execution of the advance notice at the start is decided in the variable display, and if the execution of the advance notice at the start is decided at the start of the variable display, the advance notice at the start will be given after the variable display starts. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the start time notice (result notification part) is executed. In the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the previous variation, the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the start notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which the notice at the start is executed when the start winning is generated, a specific effect control command that specifies specific information related to the specific variation pattern (for example, Winning production specification command for specifying execution of advance notice at start) is transmitted, and based on the specific production control command, the production control CPU 120 controls so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the advance notice at start is started. Moreover, the execution period of the initial operation may be changed.

For example, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a notice at the start is executed when a start winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, it is specified that it is a specific variation pattern (with a notice at the start) A win effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the performance design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command that specifies a specific variation pattern (with notice at the start) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action having a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

Further, for example, the chance button 631B can be vibrated at the start of the initial action, and the chance button 631B can be vibrated when the active hold changes to red in FIG. 59 (B6) (for lively purposes). It is possible, and at least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration during the red color change. If the button vibrates when the color changes to red during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

Further, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial action, and it is possible to give a button vibration notice (an expectation level suggestion different from the start notice) in FIG. 59 (B1). At least one of the vibration period, period, and button LED light emission mode during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration notice. When button vibration advance notice is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration advance notice is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the end of the initial operation.

Mode 15 (Electrical interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed)
Next, operation confirmation control in the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the change before the change in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 107 . FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 107, after the variable display based on the predetermined losing variation pattern is started, immediately before the variable display ends (for example, a The period during which the combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the next variable display, etc. , about 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), the pachinko machine 1 is activated by a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and the pending memory is In some cases, although the variable display is resumed, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure restoration designation command and the pattern confirmation command transmitted based on the restoration of the CPU 103, the next command Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, board top movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a mode corresponding to restoration (for example, turned off) until a certain variable display start designation command is received. , and the background sound (BGM) becomes a mode (for example, silence) corresponding to the restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing of startup disappears, characters "Power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power failure is being restored. 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108), and it is notified that the power failure is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol fixed display period.

After that, based on the receipt of the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation pattern (pseudo-continuation) in which the pseudo-continuous notice that suggests whether the variable display is to be resumed is executed and the determined announcement effect Variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the (preview of movable body), and frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g correspond to the background (variation). In addition to emitting light in such a manner, output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (fluctuation) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has passed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the background (fluctuation) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has passed since the power failure restoration designation command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the pseudo continuous notice is notified.

In the pseudo consecutive notice (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. 60(C6), (C10), and (C9), results such as whether or not the variable display has resumed are notified, so the result notification part starts. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the initial motion is performed, the visibility of the result reporting part such as whether the variable display has resumed or not is hindered by the movable body that moves due to the initial motion, and the player misunderstands the result. there is a risk of

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed, the pseudo-continuous notification (result notification part ) is started, the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion is completed before the start of the initial motion.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the variation for which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed, the period until the pseudo-continuous notification (result notification part) is started (Fig. 59 (B2) to (B6)), the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the simulated continuous notice (result notification part) and the initial action period are set so that the initial action of the movable body is completed within 59 (B2) to (B6)). there is

In this embodiment, since the execution of the movable object advance notice is determined together with the execution of the pseudo-continuous advance notice, the movable object advance notice is executed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display. is being executed, as described in the first embodiment, the effect operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B at the execution timing of the movable body notice is restricted, and effect display corresponding to the movable body notice is performed. Only sound effects may be output (see FIG. 77). Further, in the first embodiment, after the initial action is finished, the effects of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B are executed. Although restricted, the effect operation of the advance notice of the movable body may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pending memories when a power failure occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display is 1 or more. When the variable display is started, the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice is determined, and if the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice is decided at the start of the variable display, the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed after the variable display is started. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the variation in which the pseudo continuous notification (result notification part) is executed In the case where power failure occurs immediately before the end of the previous variation, the initial motion of the movable body is completed before the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) is started, but the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive notice is executed when the start winning is generated, a specific effect control command that designates specific information related to the specific variation pattern (for example, Winning effect designation command for designating execution of pseudo consecutive notice) is transmitted, and based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 controls the initial action to be completed before the result notification part of the pseudo consecutive notice is started. Moreover, the execution period of the initial operation may be changed.

For example, if it is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice is executed when a starting prize occurs during a predetermined variable display, the specified variation pattern (with pseudo-continuous notice) is specified. A win effect designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power failure occurs just before the end of the predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (special figure information), a first reserved memory number notification command, a second reserved memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the design is stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the performance design confirmation designation command, and after the design confirmation display period has passed, when the next variable display is started, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second 2 A pending memory count notification command, a game state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a pattern determination command, and a variation pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a variation pattern specification command specifying a specific variation pattern (with pseudo continuous notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power failure recovery specification command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial action having a shorter action period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial action being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body (reciprocation between the origin position and the effect position) are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retraction motion of each movable body are performed. An operation (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position) may be performed at the same time. Further, the switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is, for example, when one movable body is in the maximum advance motion, the motion is interrupted to perform the retraction motion, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the one movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the can be performed at the same time. If the timing of switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion is just before the end of the initial motion (for example, 5 seconds before the end), even if the specific variation pattern designation command is received, it should not be switched to the shortened initial motion. Just do it.

Also, for example, if the power supply is turned on after a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation before the movable body notice/pseudo continuous notice is executed, the movable body notice executed/restricted during the initial operation The effect action is performed during the introductory part of the pseudo-continuous effect (the short initial action is performed in FIG. 60 (C4), and the effect action in the restricted movable body announcement is performed in FIG. 60 (C5)).

Form 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays in restoration during normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays in recovery from normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation check control is started based on power failure occurring during normal fluctuation and then power being turned on. FIG. 109A is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 109B is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal game state, the start preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing is displayed. After the display 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, and the next command is received. It is notified that the power failure is being restored until

Then, during the period in which the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection switch provided in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5 such as the gate switch 21, When it is detected that the player is playing a right-handed game, the effect control CPU 120 displays a left-handed promotion display 132SG530 consisting of characters "Return to left-handed" and a leftward arrow on the upper right side of the display screen. is displayed, and an operation to launch a game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5 is promoted.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS. 109(A) and (B). 109(A) and (B) show the relationship between the upper-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (Fig. 95, (see FIG. 104)).

As shown in FIG. 109(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the display 132SG510 during restoration and the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed hitting. All of the display becomes visible (see FIG. 108(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, a part of the effect part 32a and the support part 32b overlap on the front side of the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, so that the player can promote left-handed hitting. Visual recognition of the display 132SG530 becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 108(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 can be visually recognized. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration (see FIG. 108(C)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the moving speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower, the overlap time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 109(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109(A), when the underboard movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, it overlaps with any of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530, the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510, and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. Therefore, the player can see all the displays (see FIG. 108(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration, but since it does not overlap with the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed throwing, the player can visually recognize the display 132SG530 promoting left-handed throwing ( See FIGS. 108(D) and (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, when the initial operation is performed when the power is cut off during the variable display in the normal state, and the hot start is activated and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530. It is set so that the time during which the player is difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and is stopped at the production position or the origin position. Since they do not overlap, the visibility of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 is less likely to be hindered by the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B that perform the initial movement of the left-handed promotion display 132SG530.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430. The hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a time-saving state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Since an opportunity to generate a prize may be missed due to a hitting operation, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 preferably maintains visibility compared to the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can display a left-handed operation promotion display 132SG530 and output a left-handed operation promotion notification sound as a left-handed operation promotion notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on the fact that it has been started up, the left-handed operation promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, while the left-handed operation promotion notification sound is limited, and after the power failure occurs, hot start When the operation confirmation control is performed based on the activation in , it is preferable that while the left-hand hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, the left-hand hitting operation promotion notification sound is output. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable left-handed operation promotion notification in consideration of the situation when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 or the like provided on the right game area side in the normal state, it is possible to perform left-handed operation promotion notification, and in the normal state, the gate switch 21 has a specific number of game balls. (For example, 5 pieces) can perform a special left-handed operation promotion notification with a higher priority than the left-handed operation promotion notification based on the entry, and the period during which the movable body operates by operation confirmation control (for example , 20 seconds). It is possible to prevent the movable body operated by the action confirmation control from interfering with the special left-handed operation promotion notification.

Form 17, 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays in recovery during jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial action and various displays in recovery from a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation check control is started based on the fact that power is cut off during the jackpot and then the power is turned on. FIG. 111A is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 111B is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, the startup preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing After the display 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, and the next command is received. It is notified that the power failure is being restored until

In addition, along with the power failure recovery designation command, when receiving a control command indicating that it is in a jackpot game state, such as during opening designation command or after opening designation command, during the period when the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, the right side of the display screen A right hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed above, and the operation of hitting the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5 is promoted.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B perform the initial motion will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the recovery display 132SG510 and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. All of the display becomes visible (see FIG. 110(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the supporting portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the left-handed promotion display 132SG530 ( or impossible) (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 can be visually recognized. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display 132SG510 during restoration (see FIG. 110(B)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, as shown in FIG. 111(A). Since it becomes longer, the time during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(A), when the lower board movable body 32B is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-handing prompting display 132SG430 or the restorative display 132SG510. , all displays can be visually recognized (see FIG. 110(A)).

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display during recovery 132SG510, but since it does not overlap with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the player can visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 ( See FIG. 110(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after the power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by the hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A receives information corresponding to the round game ( For example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of pitches displayed 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 94A). Rather, it operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, so the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. In other words, a predetermined area where information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) is displayed (Fig. 94 (A ))), it is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

In addition, after power failure occurs during the round game in the jackpot game state, when the initial operation is performed when it is activated by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is superimposed on the front side of the restoration in-progress display 132SG510. Since it operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. That is, it is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side of the display 132SG510 during restoration.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

Also, the time during which the under-board movable body 32B stays at the effect position overlapping the restorative display 132SG510 may be shorter in the initial motion than in the motion of the movable body effect. For example, when power is turned on after a power failure occurs while variable display is not being executed, the stay time T1 of the movable body at the production position in the initial action and the stay at the movable body production position in the movable body production are shown. It is preferable that the time T2 is longer than the stay time T3 of the movable body at the presentation position in the initial operation when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs during execution of the variable display (T1=T2>T3). . By doing so, the power failure occurs during the advantageous state, and then the movable body that operates by the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on is not superimposed on the restoration display 132SG510 for a long period of time. , it is possible to provide a game machine which does not hinder determination of whether or not it is under restoration.

Form 19 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays in recovery during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays in restoration during time saving will be described with reference to FIG. 112 . FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body when the operation confirmation control is started based on power failure occurring during the time saving and then power being turned on.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a hot start after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the activation preparation display displayed on the image display device 5 at the activation timing After 132SG500 disappears, a restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed in which characters "power supply is being restored, please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background to indicate that the power is being restored, until the next command is received. It is notified that the power is being restored.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the rendering position, the rendering section 32a can move up and down in a hatched area E1 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. , the support portion 32b can move vertically in a hatched area E2 surrounded by two-dot chain lines. Further, when the under-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the effect position, the effect part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the oblique line area E3 surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect portion 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect portion 32c of the lower-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A portion of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b are displayed at positions where they may overlap (see FIG. 112(C)).

As shown in FIG. 112(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is positioned at the origin position, it does not overlap with either of the display 132SG510 during restoration and the display 132SG430 promoting hitting to the right. All displays are visible.

Next, when the initial motion of the on-board movable body 32A is started, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of the pattern confirmation command, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is finished, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. When displayed, when the board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can visually recognize the left-handed promotion display 132SG530. becomes difficult (or impossible) (not shown). After that, the area where the on-board movable body 32A passes and the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the production position, the production section 32a is displayed on the front side of a part of the restoration display 132SG510. overlap, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the in-restoration display 132SG510 (see FIG. 112(B)).

When returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same. Since the movement speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time of the retracting motion is longer than that of the advancing motion. It will take longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(A), when the lower board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it overlaps neither the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 nor the recovery-in-progress display 132SG510. , all of the displays can be visually recognized.

Next, while the lower board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the display during restoration 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. As a result, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the display during recovery 132SG510, but since it does not overlap with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430, the player can visually recognize the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 ( See FIG. 112(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the performance position to the origin position, the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, when the initial operation is performed when it is started by hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A outputs information corresponding to the time saving state (for example , production mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive games/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIGS. 112B and 112C). In order to operate so as not to overlap on the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 112 (A)) where the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the confirmation control is displayed, the display of the restoration in-progress display 132SG510 is completed. When the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. That is, information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive homes / total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed in a predetermined area (see FIGS. 112 (B) and (C)) It is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-handing promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period superimposed on the front side.

In addition, after a power failure occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the production operation of the movable body notice that the support portion 32b overlaps the right-handed promotion display 132SG430 (the movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power after the power failure occurs during the variable display during the big win or the time saving state overlaps with the right-handed promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the action is performed in an action mode that does not include the performance action (the reciprocating action between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the advance notice of the movable body.

In addition, when the round game movable body production is performed at the start of the round game, the initial operation at the time of turning on the power is the operation that does not include the production operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body production It is preferably performed in a manner.

Also, in forms 17-19, on-board movable body 32A and under-board movable body 32B, right-handed promotion display 132SG430, restoration display 132SG510, information corresponding to time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive games/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.), but in the present embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the above various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial movement and Although the form of comparing the total overlapping time has been exemplified, regardless of whether or not the various displays are displayed, when the movable body performs the initial motion, the time overlapping the display area where the various displays are displayed is the above. As long as they are related.

Forms 21 to 24 (Startup order when executing initial motion control)
In the characteristic portion 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started or hot-started), the special symbol display device 4A, 4B and a special lamp, each LED (frame LED9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, under-board movable body LED9e, on-frame movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g) was exemplified form to light at the same time, The present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the special figure lamp and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) , the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) may be lit at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 113A to 113G, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 first starts displaying the activation preparation display 132SG500. At the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds similar to FIG. 72 and FIG. 73) has elapsed from the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is started. (See FIGS. 113(A) and (B)).

Also, at this timing, the power supply to the solenoids 81 and 82 is resumed, so that the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the power-off state. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the power is cut off in the state where no hits occur, and then it is started by hot start. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started by a hot start after being cut off during the interval period, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are closed again. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the power is cut off during the occurrence of a normal game, and then started by hot start, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is opened and the power is cut off and then started by a hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. becomes.

After lighting these special lamps, and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in a state of power failure, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e , frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) start to light up.

After that, as the initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g ), after the lighting in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are started, initial operation control is performed by the board upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, The confirmation operation of the chance button 631B is executed (FIGS. 113(D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is not executed and the power is cut off and the cold start is performed, as shown in FIG. After that, first, when 3 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5, a power-on designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 (power supply by the effect control CPU 120). Receipt of input designation command) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are started to be lit, and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized and the variable winning ball device is activated. 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 will be in the initial state (closed state).

In addition, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time emit light in the mode when the variable display result is lost as the initial light emission mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time may emit light in a variable display result other than a loss or in a manner different from any variable display result.

In addition, after the lighting of these special lamps and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the initial state, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, Lighting of the frame upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g) is started.

Then, when 2 seconds have passed since the effect control CPU 120 received the power-on designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 replaces the startup preparation display 132SG500 with the initial The display of the change notification display 132SG600 is started. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts to be displayed, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) emits light in an initialization notification mode. is started, as an initial operation, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed.

By doing so, the power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily recognized by the player and the store clerk of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, and the game A player or a store clerk of a game parlor where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed can confirm the lighting of the special lamp which greatly affects the game without being distracted by the confirming operation of each movable body. .

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed and the power is cut off and the hot start is performed, as shown in FIG. After that, first, when 3 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was started to be displayed on the image display device 5, a power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 (power failure by the effect control CPU 120 Receipt of recovery designation command) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking of the special symbol lamps) is started. , the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the state before power cutoff. In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the production control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 is restored instead of the start preparation display 132SG500. The display of the middle display 132SG510 is started. After that, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is turned on, and the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32A are turned on as an initial operation. 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and confirmation operation of chance button 631B are executed.

When the variable display that has been executed before the power failure is stopped during the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display is started, the new variable display is started as shown in FIG. 114(B). At the stop timing of the variable display, the display of the display during restoration 132SG510 ends.

That is, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed while the boot preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 with the number of pending memories being 0, and the resumed variable display is during the display of the boot preparation display 132SG500. In the case of stopping, when a new variable display is started due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the restoration display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the restoration in-progress display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in FIG. 114(B), during the display of the display 132SG510 during restoration, which is the execution of the variable display, as the initial operation, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are activated. A confirmation operation is initiated.

As in FIG. 114(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. 5, when the variable display that has been executed since before the power failure is not stopped while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. After the display of the middle display 132SG510 is started, the variable display is stopped (at the same time, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is finished).

Also, as in FIG. 114 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being performed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. 5, even if the variable display that has been executed since before the power failure is stopped while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the case where the pending memory exists when the variable display is stopped is shown in FIG. 115(B). As shown, a new variable display is started based on the pending memory after the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the variable display is stopped. In this case, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 ends at the timing when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 114(A), (B) and FIGS. 115(A), (B), the background image and effect image corresponding to the variable display are displayed on the image display device 5. state, the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not started. It is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by this.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. does not stop during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up and the initial operation is performed. As an example, the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is not stopped during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 when starting up by hot start. LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and board movable body 32A and lower board movable body 32A as an initial operation. 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B may be started at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. is not stopped during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, two seconds after the CPU 120 for effect control receives the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103) each The LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) are started to light up in a manner corresponding to the state of restoration, and display 132SG510 during restoration. During the display period of (1), confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial actions may be started.

It should be noted that each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the restoration being performed, indicating that preparation for start-up is performed. 132SG500 may be continued even after the display of 132SG500 is finished, for example, when the confirmation operation of each movable body is finished.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 116(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start. is stopped during display of the boot preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display is not started, as shown in FIG. While starting to display a background image corresponding to being stopped, each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) Lighting may be performed in a mode corresponding to the image.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, that is, in the state where the variable display can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, after the power failure occurs, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may experience a power failure even in a jackpot game state in which variable display is not executed.

Regarding the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot game state and activated by hot start, the power is cut off when the special variable prize winning ball device 7 (big prize winning opening) is in the open state during the round game. If it occurs, as shown in FIG. 117(A), after the power failure, the CPU 103 performs the effect control at the time when three seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was started to be displayed on the image display device 5. Transmission of a power failure restoration designation command to the use CPU 120 (reception of a power failure restoration designation command by the effect control CPU 120) is performed. When the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized at the timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking of the special symbol lamps) is started. , the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into the state before power cutoff. That is, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the production control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), the image display device 5 is restored instead of the start preparation display 132SG500. The display of the middle display 132SG510 is started, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) corresponding to being restored Lighting in the mode is started.

After that, during the restoration display 132SG510, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, the board bottom movable body 32B, the frame top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed as initial actions.

After the initial action is finished and the round game is finished, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the open state to the closed state according to the end of the round game. Then, when the next round game starts, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the image display device 5 starts displaying an image corresponding to the round game, and each LED ( Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) start to light up in a mode corresponding to the round game.

In the example of FIG. 117(A), power failure occurs during the round game, and when the pachinko game machine is started by hot start, the round game before the power failure ends after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed. Although the case has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. Regarding the case where the previous round game ends while the activation preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the next round game is started (the special variable winning ball device 7 is once closed from the open state and then opened again). , even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, until the operation of confirming the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as the initial action is completed. , LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) may be lit in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery.

As shown in FIGS. 117(A) and 117(B), when power failure occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during the round game) as a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, on-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in a manner corresponding to the round game Since the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not executed when the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit in a mode corresponding to the round game, so that upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, It is possible to prevent troubles in confirming whether the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B is normally performed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, and described the case of starting the pachinko game machine 1 by hot start after the power failure occurs, but FIG. 118 (A) As shown in , the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the power failure occurs, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 118A, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command. to the end of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500), when a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, that is, during the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the second start In the event that a prize is won, after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the image display device 5 displays the restoration display 132SG510 until the variable display stop timing corresponding to the second start prize is displayed, and the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. As an initial operation control during display, confirmation operations of the board top movable body 32A, board bottom movable body 32B, frame top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B may be started.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 118(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the occurrence of power failure, and the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 118(A), the effect control CPU 120 is A case where a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state during the two seconds from the reception of the power failure recovery designation command to the end of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the occurrence of power failure, and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by hot start, so that the image display device 5 displays the startup preparation display 132SG500. 118(B), as shown in FIG. 118(B), the confirmation operation of the board upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is performed as the initial operation control. The variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to be in the open state from the timing before the start of .

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIGS. 118(A) and 118(B), the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, and the upper frame movable body 132SG101 are executed as the initial operation control. , the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B can be suitably executed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 118(A), after the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the restoration display 132SG510, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 may be switched to the display of the restoration display 132SG510 at the timing when the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

Also, in FIGS. 117A and 117B, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot game state and activated by hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is in the middle of the round game. 119, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening ) is in the open state during a round game, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started, and the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. In the example shown in 119, the special variable winning ball device 7 is temporarily changed from the open state to the closed state during 2 seconds from when the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command to the end of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500. When the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again in the next round game, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 may be started after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is finished. .

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 119, the confirmation operation of the board upper movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is preferable as the initial operation control. It is possible to execute

In mode 3, a part of the fanfare effect started while the boot preparation display 132SG500 is displayed cannot be visually recognized by the player, and when the boot preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the part that cannot be visually recognized continues. While the fanfare effect can be visually recognized, in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display started during the display of the activation preparation display 132SG500 is rendered invisible by displaying the restoration display. there is In other words, in the variable display, since there must be no mistake in the important information that is related to whether or not a big hit will be made, it is controlled so that it cannot be visually recognized. Since there is an operation direction notification part to promote the operation, it is controlled so that it can be visually recognized.

Form 25 (Relationship Between Initialization Notification Image and Initial Action) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation check control will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation check control. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation check control.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start process after the power failure occurs, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. ) has passed and the CPU 103 has recovered, a power-on designation command, a game state background designation command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo designation command are transmitted. Then, based on the reception of these effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the power has been turned on with initialization (started by cold start processing), and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b and the on-board movable body LED 9d , the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the initialization notification sound (FIGS. 72 and 73). reference).

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, and based on the game state background designation command (normal background) Although the first background display 132SG310 is displayed, in this modified example, when the power is turned on with initialization, the initial display as described in FIG. Change notification display 132SG600 is displayed.

In this case, after starting the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation ends, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is finished. By doing so, it is possible to quickly confirm that the pachinko game machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operated by the operation confirmation control, and the movable body operated by the operation confirmation control. It is possible to prevent the confirmation of whether or not the visual initialization notification has been completed from being hindered.

In addition, operation check control after power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) is more effective than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot-start processing) until operation check control is performed. is longer. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to the operation confirmation control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with initialization.

Also, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and disappears after the predetermined execution period ends, and the start winning occurs during the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600. However, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Also, if the execution period of the variable display started based on the occurrence of the start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display. It may be done by By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Incidentally, when the starting prize is generated while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Also, after turning on the power without initialization (activation by hot start processing), the background display may be performed based on the game state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

In addition, as in this modification, when the power is turned on with initialization (activation in the cold start process), after the initialization notification display 132SG600 is started to be displayed, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started. 120, in which the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is finished after the initial operation is finished, as shown in FIG. is determined, while the advance notice of the movable object is executed, as shown in FIG. As described in Embodiment 1, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation by the advance notice of the movable body but also the effect display and the output of the effect sound are restricted, and the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is terminated. Afterwards, it is possible to perform the performance operation by the advance notice of the movable body.

Form 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modification>
Next, an operation example of operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122A to 122D are diagrams showing an operation example of operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. FIGS. 123A to 123D are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the win/fail button effect as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68A to 68J, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs cold start processing. In the operation confirmation control executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the activation (or hot start process), first, after the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the effect position and stops (FIG. 68 (B )), the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 68(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the effect position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 68(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the effect position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 68(E)). Next, after the lower board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 68(F)), the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See FIG. 68(G)). Next, after the upper frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 68(H)), the lower board movable body 32B moves downward from the production position and returns to the origin position. It stops, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 68(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) elapses, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends. can be changed to

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122A, the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is positioned at the origin position, and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is positioned at the origin position. As shown in FIG. 122(B), the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is positioned at the production position and the frame The separation distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B when the chance button 631B as the side movable body is positioned at the performance position is shorter.

In this modification, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B, which have the above relationship, are set so that the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A are the origins so that their initial operation periods overlap in the operation confirmation control. Movement from the position to the performance position is started at the same time (see FIG. 122(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that the respective initial action periods do not overlap. After that (see FIG. 122(C)), the on-board movable body 32A may move upward from the performance position and stop at the origin position (see FIG. 122(D)).

By doing so, the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B) can operate normally at the production position, and the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) can normally operate at the production position. It is possible to simplify the confirmation work by simultaneously confirming that it is operable, and at the same time, the operation of the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B), which is difficult to confirm, from the performance position to the origin position. , the movement of the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) from the performance position to the origin position can be confirmed individually.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the initial action periods overlap, for example, one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position and stops at the performance position, while the other moves from the origin position. It is sufficient if the movement to the performance position is started. In other words, at least a part of the advancement operation period of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A should overlap.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower board movable body 32B is raised from the origin position to the production position in the hit/fail button effect. (For example, the under-board movable body 32B) may be used. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 123(A), in the success/fail button effect, when the operation promotion effect is being executed in the operation effective period or the operation effective period has passed, the on-board movable body 32A and the board The on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position so that the performance action period with the lower movable body 32B does not overlap (see FIG. 123(B)), and the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position. (See FIG. 123(C)) to lift up the upper board movable body 32A. The on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the performance position to the origin position (see FIG. 123(D)).

As for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, which perform the performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body are in contact with each other (or overlap) in this way, in the operation confirmation control, FIG. It is preferable to execute the initial motion in a motion mode that does not include the effect motion described in (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the lower-board movable body 32B are moved separately). By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

In addition, an effect position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) is placed at the effect position is provided, and is placed at the effect position in the operation confirmation control. The movement of the first movable body (for example, board top movable body 32A) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, board bottom movable body 32B) is detected by effect position sensor 132SG134. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the operation confirmation control appropriately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the origin position in the operation confirmation control before the long initial movement control is started. When it is not, return control (for example, short initial operation control of board top movable body 32A, board bottom movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame top movable body 132SG101) is performed to move the movable body to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the operation check control.

Form 27 (operation check control)
Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening/closing door frame 3a are capable of performing an initial action, and the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the production position and stops at the production position (see FIG. 68(F)), the frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the production position, and then returns from the production position to the origin position. It is designed to move (see FIGS. 68(G) to (I)).

By doing so, it is indicated that the operation confirmation control is not finished by the first movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) arranged at the effect position in the operation confirmation control, and the first movable body (for example , board lower movable body 32B) is placed at the production position, the second movable body (for example, the upper frame movable body 132SG101) is started to operate, so that the second movable body (for example, the upper frame movable body 132SG101 ) can be prevented from overlooking the operation check control.

Specifically, the frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-side movable body 132SG101 and the chance button 631B are easily mischievous because they can be touched by players. If the board-side movable body fails to operate normally in the same way as the movable body, if the initial movement of the board-side movable body is performed again, the board-side movable body can be intentionally moved to a dead end state ( See FIG. 124(A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. Display an error image related to the malfunction of (for example, a telop such as "* Please check the frame movable body". Delete it when the frame side movable body can operate normally) on the background image, Initial operation at the time of error judgment of maximum 5 times (the number of times is more than that of the movable body on the board side, and the conditions up to the dead end are tightened considering that it is easy to be mischievous) (Only the movable body on the frame side. The operation mode is power-on.) If the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally even after the above-described operation is performed, only the frame-side movable body may be shifted to the dead end state.

In addition, an effect position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the frame upper movable body 132SG101) is placed at the effect position is provided, and is arranged at the effect position in the operation confirmation control. The operation of the first movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, the lower board movable body 32B) is detected by the effect position sensor 132SG104. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the operation check control appropriately.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 pachinko machine 2 game board 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 9 game effect lamp 11 main substrate 12 effect control substrate 31B push button 31B
32 movable body 100 game control microcomputer 120 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
a movable body;
A game control means,
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which game media can easily enter,
When a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, special control can be performed to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state again,
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The first reach includes a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. ,
The second reach includes a title display part for displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. ,
Different from the execution time of the title display part in the first reach and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach,
The title display part in the first reach and the title display part in the second reach,
a first part from when the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed at the fixed position;
A third part from the state where the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed at the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display the startup preparation display,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration in progress display,
In the advantageous state, when a power failure occurs while the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on,
The display of the startup preparation display is performed,
After that, the special control is performed,
After that, the display during recovery is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movable control is performed,
In the title display part in the first reach, the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part, corresponding to the first reach. Display the title display,
In the title display part in the second reach, the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part corresponds to the second reach so that it is longer than the third part. A game machine that displays a title display

Images